JP2021078631A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing fun regarding a shift to a game state advantageous to a player.SOLUTION: A game machine includes a diverter valve 451 of a guide path 455 that game balls flowing down a game area 30a can pass, and is configured so as to shift to a jackpot round game state advantageous to a player by passage of game balls flowing down the game area 30a through an accessory continuous gate 413, shift to a high-probability state in which a value of a jackpot random number counter is changed from a value at the time of a low probability to a value at the time of a high probability after completion of the jackpot round game state by passage of game balls flowing down the game area 30a through a V area 435, and allow game balls passing through the diverter valve 451 to pass at least the accessory continuous gate 413.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 3

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the results of a lottery of symbols based on entering a ball into a starting port are aligned in a combination that is advantageous for the player, a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. There is a gaming machine that shifts to. As a gaming state that is advantageous for the player, for example, there is a jackpot round game in which the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times, and a probability change state in which the probability that the result of the lottery after the jackpot round game is completed becomes the jackpot game state increases. It is also known.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2005-253952 (page 46, FIGS. 40, 41)

However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined by the combination of symbols which advantageous gaming state is to be achieved, it is difficult to further improve the interest of the game regarding the transition to the advantageous gaming state for the player. There's a problem.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

The present invention has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.
That is, the invention according to claim 1 comprises a gaming area in which a gaming ball launched by a launching means is guided.
A passing portion through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass,
An advantageous game state transition means capable of shifting to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the predetermined area.
A specific game state transition means for shifting to a specific game state advantageous to the player after the end of the advantageous game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the specific area.
The game ball that has passed through the passing portion is characterized in that it can pass through at least the predetermined region.

[Action / Effect] According to the first aspect of the present invention, the profitable game state transition means is an advantageous game state in which the game state is advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through a predetermined area. It is possible to move to. The specific game state transition means shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player after the end of the advantageous game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the specific area. As a result, it is not possible to shift to the advantageous gaming state unless the correct passing procedure is such that the game ball that has passed through the passage portion passes through the predetermined area. Therefore, by adding the operating skill of the player to the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player, it is possible to pay attention to the movement of the game ball, which is where the game ball has passed in the game area. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine of Example 1 of this invention. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing the display content of the third symbol display device, and (b) is an explanatory diagram showing a hold display. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of various counters used for game control. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. (A) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. This is a table for selecting a variable pattern of the main decorative symbol for special figure 1. This is a table for selecting a variable pattern of the main decorative symbol for special figure 2. It is an example of the variable display effect of the super reach E of the main decorative symbol for special figure 1, (a) shows the “6” symbol reach, and (b) shows the “7” symbol reach. This is an example of a variable display effect of Super Reach F of the main decorative pattern for Special Figure 1. It is an example of the variable display effect of the super reach E of the main decorative symbol for special figure 2, (a) shows the “6” symbol reach, and (b) shows the “7” symbol reach. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows the normal processing by a main control unit. It is a flowchart which shows 1st symbol variation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery processing. It is a flowchart which shows the next game state setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the opening and closing process of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start winning process. It is a flowchart which shows the lottery process for look-ahead. It is a flowchart which shows NMI interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a payout control device. It is a flowchart which shows the payout control process. It is a flowchart which shows the prize ball control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the ball lending control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the frame button input monitoring and effect processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the effect execution management process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the look-ahead variation pattern specification command reception processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the opening / closing mode (big hit) display setting processing by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the variation display mode setting process by a sub-control device. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the switching process such as a display mode by a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery display process. It is a table for lighting a ball entry portion for shifting to an advantageous gaming state, (a) shows a case of a special figure 1 big hit, and (b) shows a case of a special figure 2 big hit. It is a perspective view which saw the entry part for advantageous game state transition, the entry part for specific game state transition, and the surroundings from diagonally above, (a) shows before the jackpot is confirmed, and (b) is after the jackpot is confirmed. Is shown. It is a top view of the ball entry part for the advantageous game state transition, the ball entry part for the specific game state transition, and the surroundings thereof. (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the AA line of the ball entry section for the advantageous gaming state transition shown in FIG. 3 on the left side, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of the ball entry section for the specific game state transition shown in FIG. is there. (A) to (e) are diagrams showing the relationship between the position of the movable portion and the V region where the ball can enter. It is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the role gate and a guide lever that closes the V region. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the normal prize is won. (A) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region of the second embodiment, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. It is a time chart of a game ball passing through a combination gate in the case of the first to third big hits and a guide lever that closes the V region. (A) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region of Example 3, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. It is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate and a guide lever that closes the V region in the case of the first big hit. It is a front view of the game board of Example 4. (A) is a perspective view of the ball entry portion for the advantageous game state transition seen from diagonally above, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball entry portion for the specific game state transition seen from diagonally above. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery processing. It is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. It is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the role gate and a guide lever that closes the V region. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the time when a big hit is confirmed to the time when a V prize is won. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the time when a big hit is confirmed to the time when a V prize is lost. It is a front view of the game board of Example 5. It is a perspective view which saw the entry part for advantageous game state transition, the entry part for specific game state transition, and the surroundings from diagonally above, (a) shows before the jackpot is confirmed, and (b) is after the jackpot is confirmed. Is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st symbol change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the V closure start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery processing. (A) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. It is a time chart which shows the timing when the game ball which passed through the role-ream gate wins a prize in the V area. It is a table for selecting enemy characters during the variation pattern of the main decorative pattern and the reach development production. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the fluctuation start of the super reach A to the end of the reach development effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the fluctuation start of the super reach B to the end of the reach development effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the time when a big hit of super reach A, B is confirmed to the time when V wins a prize. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the fluctuation start of the super reach C to the end of the reach development effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the fluctuation start of the super reach D to the end of the reach development effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the time of the jackpot confirmation of super reach C, D to the time of V winning. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the fluctuation start of the super reach E to the end of the reach development effect. It is a figure which shows the display mode of the 3rd symbol display device from the time of the jackpot confirmation of super reach E to the time of V winning. FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the advantageous gaming state transition entry portion, the specific gaming state transition entry portion, and the surroundings thereof as viewed from diagonally above, where FIG. 6A shows before the jackpot is confirmed, and FIG. , Shows after the jackpot is confirmed. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery processing. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. (A) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. It is a time chart which shows the timing when the game ball which passed through the role-ream gate wins a prize in the V area. FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the advantageous gaming state transition entry portion, the specific gaming state transition entry portion, and the surroundings thereof as viewed from diagonally above, where FIG. 7A shows before the jackpot is confirmed, and FIG. , Shows after the jackpot is confirmed. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery processing. (A) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table. (A) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. It is a time chart which shows the timing when the game ball which passed through the role-ream gate wins a prize in the V area. (A) is the special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the eighth embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 2 big hit lottery table. It is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the role gate and a guide lever that closes the V region. It is a front view of the game board of Example 9. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery processing. (A) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. It is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the role gate and a guide lever that closes the V region. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery display process. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won. (G) to (j) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won, following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery display process of Example 10. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 when the right-handed operation is not performed in FIG. 94. It is a time chart of the game ball which passed through the role-ream gate of the eleventh embodiment, and the guide lever which closes the V region. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery display process. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won. (A) is the special figure 1 big hit lottery table of the twelfth embodiment, and (b) is the special figure 2 big hit lottery table. It is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the role gate and a guide lever that closes the V region. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery display process. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won when the result of the V chance determination is a hit. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the jackpot is confirmed when the result of the V chance determination is wrong. It is a front view of the game board 30 of Example 13. It is a top view of the ball entry part for the advantageous game state transition, the ball entry part for the specific game state transition, and the surroundings thereof. (A) to (f) are diagrams for explaining the operation mode of the specific area during the period in which the game ball can enter the specific area. It is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the role gate and a guide lever that closes the V region. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery display process. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the number of jackpot rounds is determined to the time when the V prize is won. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot game state lottery process of Example 14. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot game state lottery display process. (A) to (f) are diagrams showing the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the number of jackpot rounds is determined to the time when the V prize is won.

The present specification also discloses the following inventions relating to gaming machines and the problems to be solved by the inventions.

<First task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the results of a lottery of symbols based on entering a ball into a starting port are aligned in a combination that is advantageous for the player, a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. There is a gaming machine that shifts to. As a gaming state that is advantageous for the player, for example, there is a jackpot round game in which the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times, and a probability change state in which the probability that the result of the lottery after the jackpot round game is completed becomes the jackpot game state increases. It is also known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-253952 (page 46, FIGS. 40, 41)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined by the combination of symbols which advantageous gaming state is to be achieved, it is difficult to further improve the interest of the game regarding the transition to the advantageous gaming state for the player. There's a problem.
The invention according to the following (A0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. And.
The invention according to the following (A0) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(A0) A game area in which the game ball launched by the launching means is guided, and
An advantageous game state transition means capable of shifting to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the predetermined area.
A specific game state transition means for shifting a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific game state advantageous to the player by passing through the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the passing rate to the specific area differs depending on the passing location of the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine described in (A0), the advantageous gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes through the predetermined region. Make it possible. The specific game state transition means shifts the game state to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the specific area. As a result, since the passing rate to the specific area differs depending on the passing point of the predetermined area, the player can be made to recognize the ease of passing to the specific area depending on where the passing point of the predetermined area is. Further, if the game ball can be passed through the specific area, the player can obtain a feeling of self-help as if the game ball was passed through the specific area by himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

In addition, the advantageous game state transition means shifts to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the predetermined area, and to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player. It may be possible not to migrate. As a result, it is possible to further pay attention to the passage of the game ball flowing down the game area in the predetermined area.

(A1) The gaming machine according to (A0), wherein the gaming machine shifts to one of the advantageous gaming states having different advantages depending on the passing location of the predetermined region through which the gaming ball passing through the gaming region passes.

According to the gaming machine described in (A1), since the advantage of the advantageous gaming state that shifts by passing through the predetermined region differs depending on the passing location of the gaming ball that has passed through the gaming region, the pachinko machine passes through the predetermined region. Attention can be drawn to the movement of the game ball.

(A2) The gaming machine according to (A0) or (A1), which is configured so that when a gaming ball that has passed through the gaming area passes through a specific portion of the predetermined region, it easily passes through the specific region.

According to the gaming machine described in (A2) above, whether or not a gaming ball easily passes through a specific region depends on whether or not the gaming ball that has passed through the gaming region passes through a specific portion of the predetermined region. , It is possible to attract attention to the movement of the game ball as to whether or not it passes through a specific part of a predetermined area.

(A3) When a game ball that has passed through the game area passes through the specific portion, even if the game ball is operated to be launched with the same strength, the advantageous game having a high advantage among the plurality of advantageous game states. The gaming machine according to (A2) above, which shifts to a state.

According to the gaming machine described in (A3), whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state having a higher advantage among a plurality of advantageous gaming states is determined by the gaming ball passing through the gaming area passing through a specific portion of the predetermined area. Since it depends on whether or not, attention can be focused on the movement of the gaming ball as to whether or not it passes through a specific part of a predetermined area. Further, since it is sufficient to operate so that the game ball is launched with the same strength when passing through the specific portion and when shifting to the advantageous gaming state, the operation burden on the player is reduced.

When a game ball that has passed through the game area passes through a specific portion, even if the game ball is operated to be launched with the same strength, the game shifts to a more advantageous game state among a plurality of advantageous game states. Not only that, it may be configured so as to easily pass through a specific area. Since it is sufficient to operate so that the game ball is launched with the same strength when passing through a specific part, when passing through a specific area, and when shifting to an advantageous gaming state, the operational burden on the player is further reduced. To.

(A4) The games according to (A0) to (A3) provided with a first lottery means for drawing which of the plurality of advantageous gaming states will be obtained when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area. Machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (A4), which of the plurality of advantageous gaming states will be obtained when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area is determined by the result of the lottery by the first lottery means. Therefore, it can be expected that the gaming state will be more advantageous from the time when the gaming ball passes through the predetermined area until the result of the lottery by the first lottery means is obtained.

(A5) Whether or not the game ball that has passed through the game area in the predetermined area can easily pass through the specific portion, or whether or not it is possible to pass through the specific portion. The gaming machines according to (A0) to (A4), which are provided with a second lottery means for drawing a lottery in which a player is determined.

According to the gaming machine described in (A5) above, whether or not it is easy for the gaming ball that has passed through the gaming area to pass through the specific portion, or whether or not it is possible to pass through the specific portion. Whether or not it is determined by the result of the lottery by the second lottery means, whether or not it is easy for the game ball that has passed through the game area without changing the structure to pass through the specific portion, or whether or not the game ball passes through the specific portion. You can change whether or not it is possible.

<Second task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the results of a lottery of symbols based on entering a ball into a starting port are aligned in a combination that is advantageous for the player, a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. There is a gaming machine that shifts to. As a gaming state that is advantageous for the player, for example, there is a jackpot round game in which the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times, and a probability change state in which the probability that the result of the lottery after the jackpot round game is completed becomes the jackpot game state increases. It is also known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-253952 (page 46, FIGS. 40, 41)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined by the combination of symbols which advantageous gaming state is to be achieved, it is difficult to further improve the player's interest in shifting to the advantageous gaming state for the player. There is a problem.
The invention according to the following (B0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. And.
The invention according to the following (B0) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(B0) A game area in which a game ball launched by a launching means is guided, and
An advantageous game state transition means capable of shifting to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the predetermined area.
A specific game state transition means for shifting a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific game state advantageous to the player by passing through the specific area.
A gaming machine provided with a control means for changing the specific area when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

In the gaming machine according to (B0), the advantageous gaming state transition means makes it possible to shift the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player by passing the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area through a predetermined area. .. The specific game state transition means shifts the game state to a specific game state that is advantageous to the player when the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the specific area. The control means changes a specific area when a predetermined condition is satisfied. That is, it is not a configuration in which whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state and the specific gaming state is determined only by the combination of symbols, and depending on a predetermined condition established as an opportunity to change the specific area, the specific area is moved to the specific area in various ways. Since it is possible to change the ease of passage of the player, it is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a game state that is advantageous to the player.

Specific examples of the gaming machine described in (B0) above are described in Examples 1, 4, and 5 described later.

(B1) A first measuring means for starting time measurement when a game ball flowing down the game area passes through the first passing portion is provided.
The gaming machine according to (B0), wherein the control means can be controlled so as to start a change in the specific region when the first measuring means measures a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine described in (B1), the first measuring means starts measuring the time when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes through the first passing portion, and the first measuring means has a predetermined time. When measuring, the control means can be controlled to start a change in a specific area. Therefore, at the timing when the game ball reaches the specific area, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the change in the specific area is within the range that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area.

Specific examples of the gaming machine described in (B1) above will be described in Examples 1 and 4 described later.

(B2) A second measuring means for starting the time measurement when the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the second passing portion is provided.
The gaming machine according to (B0) or (B1), wherein the control means can be controlled so that the gaming ball cannot enter the specific area when the second measuring means measures a specific time.

According to the gaming machine described in (B2) above, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes through the second passing portion, the second measuring means starts measuring the time, and the second measuring means starts measuring the time at a specific time. When the above is measured, the control means can control the game ball so that the game ball cannot enter the specific area. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that the game ball must be put into a specific area by the time a specific time elapses after passing through the second passing portion.

Specific examples of the gaming machine described in (B2) above will be described in Example 1 described later.

(B3) The gaming machine according to (B0) to (B2), wherein the second passing portion is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine described in (B3), since the second passing portion is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined region, after the gaming ball is passed through the second passing portion, the predetermined region and the specific region are divided. It is necessary to pass the game ball. Therefore, it is necessary to give the player a feeling of excitement that the game ball must be passed through the predetermined area and the game ball must be passed through the specific area by the time when the predetermined time elapses after passing through the second passing portion. Can be done.

Specific examples of the gaming machine described in (B3) above will be described in Example 1 described later.

(B4) The gaming machine according to (B0) to (B3), wherein the first passing portion is provided in the predetermined area.

According to the gaming machine described in (B4), since the first passing portion is provided in the predetermined region, a predetermined time measured by the first measuring means elapses after the gaming ball passes through the predetermined region. The change of the specific area is started at the timing of the change. Therefore, after the game ball has passed through the predetermined area, the feeling of excitement that the game ball must be passed through the specific area within a time within which the change in the specific area is within the range that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area. It can be given to the player.

Further, when the second passing portion is provided on the upstream side of the predetermined region and the first passing portion is provided in the predetermined region, the measurement is performed by the second measuring means after passing through the second passing portion. Changes in a specific area after the game ball has passed the predetermined area under the restriction that the game ball must be passed through the predetermined area by the time when the predetermined time elapses and the game ball must also be passed through the specific area. It is possible to give the player a double feeling of excitement that the game ball must be passed through the specific area within a time within the range that allows the game ball to pass through the specific area.

(B5) The gaming machine according to (B0) to (B4), which is provided so that the predetermined time measured by the second measuring means differs depending on the passing location of the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine described in (B5), the time until the game ball cannot enter the specific area differs depending on the passing location of the predetermined region. The passage rate to the area can be changed. In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to which passage of the predetermined area the game ball passes through.

(B6) The gaming machine according to (B0) to (B6), further comprising a first delay means for reducing the flow speed of the gaming ball between the predetermined region and the specific region.

According to the gaming machine described in (B6), it takes time for the gaming ball to reach the specific region after passing through the predetermined region. Therefore, it takes time from passing through the predetermined region to passing through the specific region. There is a feeling of excitement that the game ball may not be able to enter the specific area, and the change in the specific area after the game ball has passed the predetermined area is the time when the game ball is not allowed to pass through the specific area. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that it may be.

(B7) The gaming machine according to (B0) to (B6), further comprising a second delay means for reducing the flow speed of the gaming ball between the second passing portion and the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine described in (B7), it takes time for the gaming ball to reach a predetermined area after passing through the second passing portion, and therefore, by the time when the gaming ball cannot enter the specific area. The feeling of excitement that the remaining time may be shortened, and the time during which the change in the specific area after the game ball has passed through the predetermined area is within the range allowed for the game ball to pass through the specific area is shortened. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that it may be.

(B8) A ball entry portion where the game ball flowing down the game ball can enter, and
A symbol variation display means for varying the symbol on the display unit based on the entry into the ball entry portion,
The gaming machine according to the above (B0) to (B4), or the above (B6) and (B7), wherein the predetermined time is determined according to the combination of specific symbols by the symbol variation display means.

According to the gaming machine described in (B8), the predetermined time measured by the first measuring means and the predetermined time measured by the first measuring means according to the combination of specific symbols which is the result of the symbol variation display based on the entry into the ball entry portion. A predetermined time measured by the second measuring means is determined. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the ease with which the game ball is subsequently entered into the specific area, that is, the ease of transition to the advantageous gaming state, by the combination of the specific symbols.

(B9) A third measuring means for starting measurement at a predetermined time when the specific combination is displayed is provided.
The gaming machine according to (B0) to (B8), wherein the gaming ball is configured so as not to pass through the predetermined area and the specific area when the third measuring means measures the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine described in (B9), the game has a feeling of excitement that the gaming ball must be passed through a predetermined area and a specific area from the time when the specific combination is displayed until the predetermined time is measured. Can be given to a person.

(B10) The gaming machine according to (B0) to (B9), which does not notify that the gaming ball is in a state where it can enter the specific area or is in a state where the gaming ball shifts to the specific gaming state when the ball enters the specific area.

According to the gaming machine described in (B10), it is possible to shift to a specific gaming state based on entering a specific area without the player knowing.

<Third task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the results of a lottery of symbols based on entering a ball into a starting port are aligned in a combination that is advantageous for the player, a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. There is a gaming machine that shifts to. As a gaming state that is advantageous for the player, for example, there is a jackpot round game in which the jackpot is opened a predetermined number of times, and a probability change state in which the probability that the result of the lottery after the jackpot round game is completed becomes the jackpot game state increases. It is also known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2005-253952 (page 46, FIGS. 40, 41)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, in the conventional gaming machine, when it is determined by the combination of symbols which advantageous gaming state is to be achieved, it is difficult to further improve the interest of the game regarding the transition to the advantageous gaming state for the player. There's a problem.
The invention according to the following (C0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in shifting to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player. And.
The invention according to the following (C0) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(C0) A game area in which a game ball launched by a launching means is guided, and
A passing portion through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass,
An advantageous game state transition means capable of shifting to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the predetermined area.
A specific game state transition means for shifting to a specific game state advantageous to the player after the end of the advantageous game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball that has passed through the passing portion has a configuration capable of passing at least the predetermined region.

According to the gaming machine described in (C0), the advantageous gaming state transition means shifts the gaming state to an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes through the predetermined region. Make it possible. The specific game state transition means shifts to a specific game state advantageous to the player after the end of the advantageous game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the specific area. As a result, it is not possible to shift to the advantageous gaming state unless the correct passing procedure is such that the game ball that has passed through the passage portion passes through the predetermined area. Therefore, by adding the operating skill of the player to the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player, it is possible to pay attention to the movement of the game ball, which is where the game ball has passed in the game area. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player.

(C1) The gaming machine according to (C0), wherein the gaming ball that has passed through the predetermined region has a configuration capable of passing through the specific region.

According to the gaming machine described in (C1), the transition to the specific gaming state is determined depending on whether or not the gaming ball that has passed through the predetermined region passes through the specific region, so that a complicated program is required. It is possible to determine the transition to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player without doing so, and it is possible to improve the interest in the transition to the gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
In addition, the movement of the game ball depends on whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area after the game ball has passed through the passing portion, and whether or not the game ball passes through the specific area after the game ball has passed through the predetermined area. On the other hand, since attention is focused on it, it is possible to improve the interest in the movement of the game ball.

(C2) The game ball flowing down the game area is controlled so as not to shift to the advantageous gaming state when the game ball passes through the predetermined area without passing through the passing portion (0). The gaming machine described in.

According to the gaming machine described in (C2) above, even if a gaming ball passes through a predetermined entry portion, it does not shift to an advantageous gaming state unless it is in the correct passing order, so that an illegal operation, action, or irregularity is performed. It is possible to reduce the transition to an advantageous gaming state.

(C3) The game ball flowing down the game area is controlled so as not to shift to the specific game state when the game ball passes through the specific area without passing through the passing portion (C0). The gaming machine described in (C2).

According to the gaming machine described in (C3), even if a gaming ball passes through a specific area, it does not move to the specific area unless the passing order is correct. It is possible to reduce the transition to the state.

(C4) The game ball flowing down the game area is controlled so as not to shift to the specific game state when the game ball passes through the specific area without passing through the predetermined area (C0). The gaming machine described in (C3).

According to the gaming machine described in (C4) above, even if a gaming ball passes through a specific area, it does not move to the specific area unless the passing order is correct. It is possible to reduce the transition to the state.

(C5) From (C0) to (C4), the game ball that has passed through the gaming area shifts to one of the advantageous gaming states having different advantages depending on the passing location of the predetermined area. ).

According to the gaming machine described in (C5), since the advantage of the advantageous gaming state that shifts by passing through the predetermined region differs depending on the passing location of the gaming ball that has passed through the gaming region, the pachinko machine passes through the predetermined region. Attention can be drawn to the movement of the game ball.

(C6) The above (C0) to (C2) are characterized in that the passing rate to the specific area is different depending on the passing location of the predetermined area through which the game ball passing through the predetermined area passes. , (C5).

According to the gaming machine described in (C6), since the passing rate to the specific region that triggers the generation of the specific gaming state differs depending on the passing location of the gaming ball that has passed through the predetermined region, the pachinko machine passes through the predetermined region. Attention can be drawn to the movement of the game ball.

(C7) A predetermined portion through which a game ball that has passed through the game area can pass, and
The game ball is provided with a variable means that can be changed to an open state in which the game ball can easily enter the ball based on passing through the predetermined portion.
The gaming machine according to (C0) to (C6), wherein when the variable means is in the open state, a gaming ball that has not passed through the predetermined region can enter the ball.

According to the gaming machine described in (C7), even if the gaming ball does not pass through the predetermined region, if the gaming ball has passed through the predetermined portion, the variable means can be changed to an open state for easy entry. , Since the game ball that has not passed through the predetermined area can easily enter the ball, the burden on the player can be reduced.

<Fourth task>
Conventionally, as this type of gaming machine, for example, an operation effect such as displaying a predetermined image on a display device is executed so as to prompt the player's operation at a predetermined timing before the player's operation is performed. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-81588 (page 45, FIG. 40)).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that it is difficult to further improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the operation of the player.
The invention according to the following (D0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in operation effects that encourage the player to operate. ..
The invention according to the following (D0) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(D0) A lottery means for performing a lottery that can determine whether or not to perform a predetermined effect that encourages the player's operation when the predetermined condition is satisfied.
As a result of the lottery, when it is determined that a predetermined effect is to be performed, a determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined execution condition is satisfied, and a determination means.
As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the execution means for executing the predetermined effect for urging the player's operation while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation is provided. A featured gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (D0), the lottery means draws a lottery that can determine whether or not to perform a predetermined effect that encourages the player's operation when the predetermined condition is satisfied. As a result of the lottery, the determination means determines whether or not the predetermined execution condition is satisfied when it is determined that the predetermined effect is to be performed. When it is determined as a result of the determination that the predetermined execution condition is satisfied, the execution means executes, as a predetermined effect, a time-dependent operation effect that prompts the player to operate while indicating the passage of time. As a result, the player is given a feeling of excitement by showing the passage of time related to the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player to operate.

(D1) The executing means is characterized in that, when executing the predetermined effect, the player is expected to perform a specific effect by performing an operation prompted by the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to the above (D0).

According to the gaming machine described in (D1), when the executing means executes a predetermined effect, the degree of expectation that a specific effect is performed by performing an operation prompted by the predetermined effect. To the player. As a result, the player is given a sense of expectation as to whether or not he / she can receive a specific effect by performing the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player's operation.

It should be noted that the specific effect executed by performing the operation prompted by the predetermined effect is a preferable effect for the player. For example, it is an effect that explicitly or implicitly indicates that a player can obtain or may obtain a value that is different from the game value or the game value. It may be shown step by step so that the possibility of obtaining the value is divided.

(D2) The execution means executes a second effect of urging the player's operation while indicating the passage of time related to the player's operation by performing the operation urged by the predetermined effect. The gaming machine according to (D0) or (D1), which is characterized.

According to the gaming machine described in (D2), the executing means prompts the player's operation while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation by performing the operation prompted by the predetermined effect. Perform the production of 2. As a result, the player is continuously given a feeling of excitement by continuously indicating the passage of time related to the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player's operation.

(D3) The second effect of whether or not to execute the second effect of urging the player's operation while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation by performing the operation urged by the predetermined effect. Equipped with a second lottery means to draw lots
The execution means according to (D0) or (D1), wherein the execution means executes the second effect when it is determined to execute the second effect as a result of the second lottery. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (D3), the second lottery means operates the player while showing the passage of time related to the operation of the player because the operation prompted by the predetermined effect is performed. A second lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the second effect that encourages. The execution means executes the second effect when it is decided to execute the second effect as a result of the second lottery. As a result, the player continuously gives a feeling of excitement by continuously showing the passage of time related to the operation only when the result of the second lottery is the result of executing the second effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player to operate.

(D4) The gaming machines according to (D0) to (D3), wherein the executing means executes another effect different from the specific effect when the operation prompted by the predetermined effect is not performed. ..

According to the gaming machine described in (D4) above, the executing means executes another effect different from the specific effect when the operation prompted by the predetermined effect is not performed. As a result, the player receives a specific effect instead of another effect, which gives a greater feeling of excitement by showing the passage of time related to the operation. The sex can be improved.

It should be noted that another effect executed when the operation prompted by the predetermined effect is performed is not preferable for the player. For example, it is an effect indicating that the game value could not be obtained, or an effect indicating that a player having a value different from the game value could not obtain a favorable value.

<Fifth task>
Conventionally, as a gaming machine of this type, for example, when the results of a lottery of symbols based on entering a ball into a starting port are aligned in a combination that is advantageous for the player, a gaming state that is advantageous for the player. There is a gaming machine that shifts to. It is also known that there is a gaming machine that shifts to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player when the gaming ball enters a specific area in the gaming state that is advantageous to the player (for example, JP-A-2005-). No. 253952 (page 46, FIGS. 40, 41).
However, in the case of the conventional example having such a configuration, there are the following problems.
That is, the conventional gaming machine has a problem that if the gaming ball remains in a state where the gaming ball can enter the specific area, fraudulent acts on the specific area are likely to occur.
The invention according to the following (E0) has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that preferably makes it difficult for fraudulent acts against a specific area to be performed.
The invention according to the following (E0) has the following configuration in order to achieve such an object.

(E0) A game area in which a game ball launched by a launching means is guided, and
An advantageous game state transition means capable of shifting to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the predetermined area.
A specific game state transition means for shifting a game ball flowing down the game area to a specific game state advantageous to the player by passing through the specific area.
The advantageous gaming state is at least
The first period in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area by changing the specific area into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, and
The specific area includes a second period in which the game ball is difficult to enter and is in a closed state.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second period, a notification means for notifying information about a game in which a gaming ball is passed through the specific area is provided.

According to the gaming machine described in (E0), the advantageous gaming state is changed to at least an open state in which a specific area is easy to enter a gaming ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter a gaming ball. It includes a first period in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the specific area, and a second period in which the specific area is in a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball. As a result, as compared with the case where the advantageous gaming state is composed of only the first period, the period during which the specific area can be entered is shortened by the amount of the second period, so that the specific area can be entered. It can make cheating less likely. In addition, the notification means notifies information about the game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area in the second period. As a result, information on the game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area in the second period is notified, so that there is no possibility of entering the specific area even if the second period is provided in the advantageous gaming state. The risk of being misidentified by the player is reduced, and the risk of missing a ball entering a specific area is also reduced. Therefore, it is possible to preferably reduce fraudulent activities in a specific area.

(E1) The advantageous gaming state is
The first period and
The second period that occurs after the first period and
The game ball is entered into the specific area by changing the specific area to an open state in which it is easy to enter the game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, which occurs after the second period. Including the first period, which is easy
The notification means according to the above (E0), wherein the notification means notifies information about a game in which a game ball is passed through the specific area, which occurs when the first period is entered in the second period. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine described in (E1), the advantageous gaming state includes a first period, a second period that occurs after the first period, and a specific region that occurs after the second period. Since it has a first period in which it is easy to enter the game ball in the specific area by being changed to an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, the second period is provided. By providing a period, it is possible to reduce the chance of passing the game ball through a specific area. In the second period, the notification means notifies information about the game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area generated when the first period is entered. As a result, the player can recognize that the game ball is likely to enter the specific area again, so that there is no possibility of entering the specific area even if the second period is provided in the advantageous gaming state. The risk of being mistaken by the player is further reduced, and the risk of missing a ball entering a specific area is further reduced.

(E2) The information regarding the game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area is the information for prompting the operation of the player who passes the game ball through the specific area in the game (E0) or (E1). ).

According to the gaming machine described in (E2), the information regarding the game in which the gaming ball is passed through the specific area is the information for prompting the operation of the player who passes the gaming ball through the specific area in the game. As a result, the player can recognize that it is necessary to pass the game ball through the specific area in the game based on the information even during the second period, so that the player operates in the second period. It is possible to make it difficult to cause a disadvantage such as quitting.

The pachinko machine of the first embodiment will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. 5A and 5B are explanatory views in which FIG. 5A shows the display contents of the third symbol display device 42, and FIG. 5B shows a hold display.

In the following embodiments, unless otherwise specified, the directions of up / down / left / right and front / back (or back / front) will be described with reference to a state in which the game board is viewed from the front, that is, a front view of the game board.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10 and is fixed to a game island of a game hall (hall), and one side portion (for example, the front surface) of the outer frame 11. An inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the outer frame 11 with the opening / closing shaft J1 as the left side portion in the visual view, and an inner frame with one side portion (for example, the left side portion in the front view) of the inner frame 12 as the opening / closing shaft J2. It is provided with a front frame set 14 that can be opened and closed with respect to 12.

The outer frame 11 is formed of a wooden plate material in a rectangular shape as a whole when viewed from the front, and each plate material is assembled by a detachable fastener such as a machine screw. In the present embodiment, for example, the outer dimension of the outer frame 11 in the vertical direction is 809 mm (inner dimension 771 mm), and the outer dimension in the left-right direction is 518 mm (inner dimension 480 mm). The outer frame 11 may be made of a light metal such as resin or aluminum.

The inner frame 12 is roughly classified into a resin base 12a as a main member forming the outer shape thereof and a game board 30 attached to the resin base 12a. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the inner frame 12 includes a front frame set 14 that can be opened on one side on the front side of the resin base 12a.

Here, the front frame set 14 will be described in a little more detail.

As shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a lower plate portion 13 located at the lowermost portion, an upper plate portion 21 located above the lower plate portion 13, and the upper plate portion when viewed from the front. It is roughly classified into a glass frame portion 23 located above the 21.

The front frame set 14 is formed by attaching the lower plate portion 13, the upper plate portion 21, and the glass frame portion 23 to each of the front side portions of the base plate body (not shown) which is a resin molded part of the front frame set 14. Is configured.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate portion 13 is a component in which a component forming the lower plate 15 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is located at the lowermost portion of the front frame set 14. , Screws and other fasteners fix the base plate (not shown) to the bottom in front view. The lower plate portion 13 is provided with a lower plate 15 and a ball pulling lever 17 on the front surface side thereof.

As shown in FIG. 1, the lower plate 15 as a ball tray is provided on the left side of the large three-dimensional character portion 25 when viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, and has a size of about half the width of the front frame set 14. The game balls discharged from the discharge port 16 can be stored in the lower plate 15. The ball pulling lever 17 is for pulling out (discharging) the game ball in the lower plate 15, and by moving the ball pulling lever 17 to the left side in FIG. 1, a predetermined position on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15 ( For example, a circular discharge portion formed at a substantially central portion) is opened, and the game ball stored in the lower plate 15 can be pulled out downward through the opened circular discharge portion on the bottom surface of the lower plate 15.

As shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 is a component in which a component forming the upper plate 19 and a component surrounding the component are integrated, and is a lower portion of the front frame set 14 (the lower plate 15 described above). It is fixed to the lower part of the base plate body (not shown) in front view by fasteners such as screws so as to be located at the upper position), and is provided with an upper plate 19 as a saucer for a game ball. Here, the upper plate 19 is a ball tray for temporarily storing the game balls and guiding them toward the launching device 229 while arranging them in a row.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the upper plate portion 21 is provided with various operation buttons operated by the player on the upper surface portion thereof. These operation buttons include an effect button 80 provided on the upper surface of the upper plate portion 21 near the ball storage space of the upper plate 19, and a portion on the front side of the effect button 80 (more for the player than the effect button 80). Examples thereof include an upper selection button 71, a lower selection button 72, a left selection button 73, and a right selection button 74 (collectively, selection buttons 71 to 74) arranged side by side (close to each other). In addition to the push button type, for example, a lever type, a touch sensor type, or the like may be used.

As shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 includes a window portion 101 formed on the upper side of the upper plate portion 21, and various illuminated portions (first illuminated portion 300) provided around the window portion 101. , The second illumination unit 302 and the third illumination unit 304) and the sound output units 24a and 24b are provided. The sound output unit 24a includes a speaker that outputs normal sound in a frequency band that is output as the normal game progresses.

As shown in FIG. 1, the sound output units 24 are provided at two upper left and right positions in the front view of the front frame set 14, and output sound from speakers provided inside or at the back of the front frame set 14. It is formed by a plurality of output ports for the purpose of. Only a part of this output port is shown in FIG. 1, and the whole drawing is omitted.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a game area 30a (see FIG. 3) of the game board 30 at the center of the glass frame 23 located above the upper plate 21. A substantially vertically elongated elliptical window portion 101 is formed so that most of the windows can be visually recognized from the outside. Specifically, the window portion 101 has a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape and a hollow center (opening 101a), and a glass unit (not shown) is not shown so that the opening 101a is covered with a glass plate 137 having a substantially vertically elongated elliptical shape or the like. Is attached to the back side of the front frame set 14. This glass unit has a double glass structure in which two glass plates 137 are arranged close to each other in the front-rear direction. The substantially central portion of the window portion 101 may be linear, and the glass plate 137 may also be adapted to the shape. Further, the glass plate 137 is not limited to glass, and any material thereof may be used as long as it is a transparent plate having a predetermined strength.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, the glass frame portion 23 includes a first illuminated portion 300, a second illuminated portion 302, and a third illuminated portion 304 around the window portion 101. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, the front frame set 14 has a first illuminated portion 300 (left illuminated portion) having an LED or the like built in the left portion around the window portion 101 when viewed from the front. ), The second electric decoration part 302 (right side lighting part) having an LED or the like built in the right part around the window part 101, and the third electric part having an LED or the like built in the upper part around the window part 101. It is provided with a decoration portion 304 (upper illumination portion). These illuminated parts play a role of enhancing the effect during the game by controlling the change of the light emitting mode such as lighting and blinking according to the change of the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach.

In the pachinko machine 10, the first illumination unit 300, the second illumination unit 302, and the third illumination unit 304 function as jackpot lamps, and by lighting or blinking at the time of jackpot, the pachinko machine 10 notifies that the jackpot is in progress. To do. In addition, the first illumination unit 300 and the second illumination unit 302 of the pachinko machine 10 are provided with a prize ball lamp 105 that lights up during the payout of the prize ball and an error indicator lamp 106 that lights up when a predetermined error occurs. There is.

Further, a small window 107 made of transparent resin is provided at a portion diagonally lower right on the peripheral edge of the window portion 101 so that a part of the surface of the inner frame 12 and the surface of the game board 30 can be visually recognized. Since the predetermined portion of the small window 107 is flat, a certificate stamp or the like attached to the lower right corner of the game board 30 can be suitably read by a machine from the flat portion of the small window 107.

Further, a ball lending operation unit 120 is arranged at the lower right of the window portion 101, and the ball lending operation unit 120 is provided with a ball lending button 121 and a return button 122. When the ball lending operation unit 120 is operated with bills, cards (for example, prepaid cards), etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball lending operation unit 120 responds to the operation. Pachinko balls are rented. The ball lending button 121 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 19 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 122 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. The ball lending operation unit 120 may be further provided with a frequency display unit (not shown). This frequency display unit (not shown) displays the balance information of the card or the like. A pachinko machine, a so-called cash machine, in which a game ball is directly lent to an upper plate from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, eliminates the need for the ball lending operation unit 120. Therefore, a decorative sticker or the like is attached to the installation portion of the ball rental operation unit 120. As a result, it is possible to standardize the ball lending operation unit between the pachinko machine using the card unit and the cash machine.

Next, the configuration of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is provided with a game board 30b which is made of square wooden (for example, plywood) in a front view and has a shape in which both corners on the left side are removed, and a peripheral portion thereof (described later). The outer portions of the rails 51 and 52) are attached in contact with the back side of the resin base 12a of the inner frame 12. The game area 30a, which is a substantially central portion on the front side of the game board 30, is formed on the front surface of the base plate body (not shown) of the front frame set 14 through the glass plate 137 of the window portion 101 shown in FIG. It is visible from the front outside of the frame set 14.

Further, the game board 30 includes a general winning opening 31, a variable winning device 32, a starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1, a starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, a starting opening 34 for ordinary symbols, and a variable display device unit 35. There is. These are arranged in each through hole formed by router processing in the game board 30, and are attached from the front side of the game board 30 with wood screws or the like.

The start winning device 33a for the special figure 1 is a so-called navel type start opening (start chucker) that does not have an electric accessory that opens and closes the entrance for the game ball. The start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is a so-called electric chew type start opening (start chucker) having an electric accessory that opens and closes the entrance for the game ball. The normal symbol start port 34 is a start port (through chucker) that opens the electric accessory of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b a predetermined number of times due to the game ball passing through the gate (through gate). The variable winning device 32 is a winning device having an electric accessory (door member) that opens and closes the large winning opening based on the lottery results of the special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. The opening and closing of the electric accessory is not limited to the rotating type shown in the figure, and may be a type that linearly advances and retreats back and forth or left and right.

The start winning device 33a for special figure 1 inserts a game ball that has flowed down the left game area 30al provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 35 and has dropped from directly above by rolling the stage portion 47B. It is a ball-capable starting port. Above the start winning device 33a for the special figure 1, a stage portion 47B is provided to swing (reciprocate) the game ball flowing down the left game area 30al in the horizontal direction. A game ball that has fallen from a position directly above the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 of the stage portion 47B enters the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1.

The start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is a right game area 30ar provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 35, and is discharged from the discharge path 458 without being guided to the taxiway gate 413 from the taxiway 455 described later. The game ball is provided at a position where the game ball can enter, and is a start port where the game ball discharged from the discharge path 458 can enter. A start port 34 for a normal symbol is provided above the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2. When the result of the lottery of the ordinary symbol based on the detection of passing through the starting port 34 for the ordinary symbol is a hit, the electric accessory of the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is opened.

That is, the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 can enter a game ball that has not passed through the winning combination gate 413 when the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is in the open state. With this configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the combination gate 413, if the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start port 34, it can be changed to an open state for easy entry. Since the game ball that has not passed through the winning combination gate 413 can easily enter the start winning device 33b for FIG. 2, the burden on the player can be reduced. Some of the game balls discharged from the discharge path 458 may be passed through the normal symbol start port 34, or all the game balls discharged from the discharge path 458 may be passed through the normal symbol start port 34. You may let me.

The variable winning device 32 is provided on the downstream side of the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 in the right gaming area 30ar. That is, the variable winning device 32 is arranged at a position where a right-handed hit is aimed at entering the ball. The right-handed operation for aiming to enter the variable winning device 32 is performed with the same firing intensity as the right-handed operation for passing the winning combination gate 413 and entering the starting winning device 33b for special figure 2, which will be described later. Be told. Therefore, a game for passing the winning combination gate 413, a game for entering the variable winning device 32, and a game for entering the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 can be performed with a right-handed operation of a certain strength. It can be easily executed. If the game ball discharged from the discharge path 458 of the taxiway 455, which will be described later, passes downstream without entering the starting port 33b for special drawing 2, if the variable winning device 32 is in the open state. , It is possible to enter the variable winning device 32.

The general winning opening 31, the variable winning device 32, the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1, the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, and the starting opening 34 for ordinary symbols are not shown to detect the entry or passage of a game ball, respectively. The detection switch is provided, and the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a, the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, and the normal symbol starting port 34 is individually detected by each detection switch.

Further, a ball entering the general winning opening 31, the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1, and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is detected by a detection switch (a winning opening switch (not shown)), and the variable winning device 32 is entered. Each ball is detected by a detection switch (count switch (not shown)), and a predetermined number of prize balls are paid out to the upper plate 19 (or lower plate 15) based on the output of the detection switch.

For example, in the case of entering the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, three prize balls are paid out. Further, in the case of entering the general winning opening 31 and the variable winning device 32, 10 prize balls are paid out. The number of these prize balls is arbitrary and may be various.

The game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 34, and the passage is detected by a detection switch (passage detection switch (not shown)), but even if the ball enters the normal symbol start port 34, the game ball Is not paid out.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, the game board 30 is provided with an out port 36, and a game ball that has not entered various winning devices or the like is passed through the out port 36 to a ball discharge path (not shown). You will be guided to the direction. A large number of nails 39 are planted on the game board 30 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the game ball. In addition to this, various members (accessories) such as a wind turbine may be arranged.

As shown in FIG. 3, the variable display device unit 35 is triggered by winning a prize in the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and the first symbol (for example, a special symbol) as identification information. The first symbol display device 40 for variable display, the second symbol display device 41 for variable display of the second symbol (for example, normal symbol) triggered by the passage of the normal symbol start port 34, and the special symbol 1 start prize. It is provided with a third symbol display device 42 that variablely displays a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol) by using the device 33a and the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 as a trigger. The third symbol display device 42 may be, for example, a display device dedicated to a display effect, or a light-transmitting resin plate such as an acrylic panel capable of displaying an image provided in place of the glass plate 137 or together with the glass plate 137.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first symbol display device 40 is, for example, a first segment display which is a segment display (for example, a 7-segment LED display with a decimal point) in which a plurality of segment light emitting units are arranged in a predetermined manner. The part 40a is provided. The first segment display unit 40a emits variable light or the like based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the first symbol display device 40 includes a hold lamp 40c indicating the number of hold of variable display on the first segment display unit 40a. The hold lamp 40c is also configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5A, the third symbol display device 42 has the first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 corresponding to the four hold lamps 40c and the fluctuation pattern currently being executed. The hold display TH corresponding to the above is provided. In FIG. 5A, when the number of holds is 4, the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold display TH is started, and when the number of holds is 4, the symbol change display corresponding to the hold display TH is confirmed to be out of alignment. Indicates the time, or when the number of reservations is 4, when the decorative symbol (third symbol) consisting of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ in the symbol variation display corresponding to the hold display TH is displayed in a variable manner. The first to fourth hold displays H1 to H4 and the hold display TH are displayed in colors according to the high possibility of becoming a big hit. That is, as shown in FIG. 5 (b), if the jackpots are shown in order from the one with the lowest possibility of hitting the jackpot, the possibility of hitting the jackpot increases in the order of white, blue, red, and rainbow. The white hold does not suggest that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is likely to be a jackpot combination, or suggests that it is unlikely to be a jackpot combination. A blue hold is more likely to be a jackpot for the variation pattern corresponding to the hold than a white hold, but it is more likely to be a jackpot than a variation pattern corresponding to a red hold. It suggests that it is relatively low. The red color suggests that the variation pattern corresponding to the hold is higher than the variation pattern corresponding to the blue hold. The rainbow-colored hold is most likely to be a jackpot, suggesting that the variation pattern corresponding to that hold has been confirmed to be a jackpot combination. Note that FIG. 5A shows that the first to fourth hold indications H1 to H4 and the hold indication TH are white.

The first segment display unit 40a changes the light emission of each segment light emitting unit at random or in order based on the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, so that the first segment display unit 40a emits light. A fluctuation display state of the symbol (in this embodiment, a light emission fluctuation mode of each segment light emitting unit) is generated, and when the light emission fluctuation is stopped, whether it is a big hit or a miss is displayed according to the light emission display mode. In addition to whether it is a big hit or a miss, if it is a big hit, the type of the big hit may be displayed. For example, displaying the first symbol (for example, numbers and letters) by light emission means the first jackpot, and displaying the second symbol (for example, numbers and letters) by emitting light means the second big hit, and the third symbol (for example, numbers). When the light emission display of (or letters, etc.) means the third big hit, and when the fourth symbol (for example, numbers, letters, etc.) is light emission display, it means the miss. Since the light emitting display by the first segment display unit 40a does not know what a general player means even if he / she sees it, whether the player sees it alone is a big hit or a miss. The display is such that it is unknown (or difficult to understand) whether it is a type of jackpot.

In the game board 30, the result of the variation display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40 and the variation display of the third symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is a big hit below the third symbol display device 42. It is equipped with a two-kind accessory 401 that allows a game ball to enter in the event of a situation. The two-kind accessory 401 has a high probability of a lottery for the number of rounds in which the jackpot will be a jackpot, and a jackpot lottery probability in the next gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state until the next jackpot. It is used for the probability change lottery to see if the probability change state becomes. On the left side of the game board 30 when viewed from the front, while the game ball is in the type 2 accessory 401, the result of the round number lottery will be a large number of rounds, and the result of the probability variation lottery will be a probability variation. A production accessory 403 that imitates a clock used for performing a fanning effect is provided. The fanning effect is also performed on the third symbol display device 42.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the result of the lottery based on the winning detection of the first symbol display device 40 is a big hit, the next gaming state is the support state for facilitating the winning of the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. Is set for a predetermined number of games, and a right-handed game in which a right-handed game is performed to make the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 win a game ball is executed. The right-handed operation for making the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 win the game ball is a right-handed operation for passing the game ball through the winning combination gate 413, which will be described later, or inserting the game ball into the variable winning device 32. It is performed with the same firing intensity as the right-handed operation to make the ball. Therefore, a game for passing the winning combination gate 413, a game for entering the variable winning device 32, and a game for entering the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 can be performed with a right-handed operation of a certain strength. It can be easily executed. When the right-handed game ball passes through the normal symbol start port 34, the winning / losing lottery by the second symbol and the result display are performed within an extremely short time. In FIG. 3, the game ball can flow down below the left game area 30al that overlaps the taxiway 455. When the result of the lottery by the second symbol is a hit, the electric accessory of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is opened for a predetermined time. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the normal symbol start opening 34 is likely to enter the special figure 2 start winning device 33b during the time saving state or the probability change state. When the result of the variable display of the first symbol and the third symbol based on the winning of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is the result of the jackpot, the number of jackpot rounds is determined through the same process, and the jackpot round gaming state is determined. After the end of, it is determined whether or not the probabilistic state continues.

As the first symbol display device 40, a single or a plurality of LEDs of a type capable of emitting light of at least two colors may be adopted. Specifically, for example, when two LEDs capable of emitting light in red and blue are adopted as the first symbol display device 40, the first pattern display device 40 is changed by alternately changing the emission color of each LED. A variable display state of the design (emission color mode of each LED) is generated. For example, when both LEDs stop in the red light emitting state, the first jackpot is shown, and one LED stops in the red light emitting state and the other LED stops. When it is turned off, it indicates a second jackpot, when both LEDs stop in a blue light emitting state, it indicates a third jackpot, and when both LEDs stop in a different color emitting state, it indicates a disconnection. Further, at least one of the first segment display unit 40a and the holding lamp 40c constituting the first symbol display device 40 is a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. In particular, it may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42. The pattern displayed on the first symbol display device 40 includes a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of symbols are displayed, a configuration in which a plurality of types of characters are displayed, or a plurality of types. A configuration in which colors are displayed can be considered.

The second symbol display device 41 has, for example, a "○" display unit 41a for the second symbol, a display unit 41b on which, for example, "x" is drawn for the second symbol, and a holding lamp 41c. Every time the game ball passes through the third start port 34, for example, the display symbols (ordinary symbols) on the display units 41a and 41b fluctuate, and when the variation display stops at a predetermined symbol, the start for special figure 2 on the lower side. The winning device 33b is configured to be in operation (open) for a predetermined time. The number of times the game ball has passed through the third starting port 34 is held up to four times, and the number of times held is lit and displayed by the hold lamp 41c. The display units 41a and 41b have LEDs (light emitting diodes) inside the display units 41a and 41b, and are configured to be variablely displayed by switching the light emission (or lighting of the lamp) of the LEDs. Further, at least one of the second symbol display device 41 and the hold lamp 41c may be configured by other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device, and in particular. It may be configured to be displayed on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

In the third symbol display device 42, the variation display and the predetermined display (stop display) of the first symbol are displayed on the first symbol display device 40 based on the winning of the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. ) Is performed, the variation display of the third symbol and the predetermined display (stop display) are performed accordingly. In the third symbol display device 42, not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the special drawing 1 start winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, but also the specific game that shifts after the big hit is won. Display effects during the state are performed.

The third symbol display device 42 is composed of, for example, a liquid crystal display device, and the display content is controlled by the display control device 45 described later. On the third symbol display device 42, for example, as shown in FIG. 5, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are displayed. Each decorative symbol row L, M, R is composed of a plurality of decorative symbols, and these decorative symbols are variably displayed on the third symbol display device 42 so as to be scrolled for each decorative symbol row L, M, R. Scroll. In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device) includes, for example, a large liquid crystal display having an size of 11 inches. In the variable display device unit 35, a center frame 47A is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 42 so as to substantially surround the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 in a front view. In the present embodiment, a liquid crystal display device is adopted as the third symbol display device 42, but other types of image display devices (for example, PDP: plasma display panel, EL: electroluminescence display, organic EL, etc.) May be adopted.

The variable winning device 32 shown in FIG. 3 is normally in a closed state in which the game ball cannot win a prize (or may be in a closed state in which it is difficult to win a prize). It is operated repeatedly in the closed state of. Such a state in which the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly operated in the open state and the normal closed state at the time of a big hit is called an advantageous gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and a large number of variable winning devices 32 are used. Since the game balls are entered (winning) and a large amount of game balls are paid out in response to the winning, the gaming state is advantageous for the player. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the number of game balls inserted (the number of game balls launched into the game area 30a by the launching device 229) is the number of prize balls paid out (general winning opening 31, variable). The normal game state (game ball consumption state), which is larger than the number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game balls into the prize device 32, the start prize device 33a for special figure 1, the start prize device 33b for special figure 2, etc. The number of prize balls paid out can be changed to an advantageous game state (for example, a jackpot game state) in which the number of prize balls paid out is larger than the number of game balls inserted.

More specifically, when a game ball wins a prize in the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is displayed in accordance with the variation display. 3 The third symbol of the symbol display device 42 is changed and displayed. The variable display based on the winning of the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b is preferentially changed over the variable display based on the winning of the special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a. It is also possible to change in the order of winning the device 33a and the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2. When it is determined that the display of the first segment display unit 40a and the third symbol display device 42 after each change stop is a symbol and a combination indicating a jackpot set in advance, an advantageous gaming state can be generated. .. That is, as described below, after it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit, the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the next gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state are in the low probability state in the type 2 accessory 401. Or it is determined whether it will be in a high probability state.

Then, after the round number lottery and the time saving / probability variation lottery are performed in the type 2 accessory 401, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is in a predetermined open state, and the game ball is easily won (big hit). State). Specifically, the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 is repeatedly opened a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 rounds), with the passage of a predetermined time or a predetermined number of winnings in the opened state as one round. Further, the number of times the game ball has passed through the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is held up to 4 times, and the number of holdings is held by the holding lamps 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4 (collectively referred to). In this case, it is called a hold lamp 40c). The hold lamp 40c is turned on in the order of 40c1, 40c2, 40c3, 40c4. The hold lamp 40c may have a configuration in which a hold display or the like is displayed on a part of the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, two rails 51 and 52 for guiding the game ball launched from the launching device 229 (see FIG. 2) to the upper part of the game board 30 are attached to the game board 30. The game ball launched by the rotation operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is guided to the predetermined game area 30a through the ball guide passage 49 described later of the two rails 51 and 52. The two rails 51 and 52 are long stainless steel metal strip-shaped members, which are double-mounted on the game board 30 inside and outside. The inner rail 51 is formed in a shape excluding a portion of a substantially vertical ellipse from diagonally upper left to diagonally lower right in the front view of the game board 30. The outer rail 52 is formed so that a part (mainly the left side portion) faces the inner rail 51. In such a case, the guide rail is formed by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, and the ball guide passage 49 is formed by the portion (the portion on the left side when facing) in which the respective rails 51 and 52 are parallel to each other at a predetermined interval. .. The ball guide passage 49 is formed in a groove shape having a contact surface with the game board 30, that is, a groove shape in which the front side is open.

A return ball prevention member 53 is attached to the tip end portion (upper left portion in FIG. 3) of the inner rail 51. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the game ball once guided from the ball guide passage 49 between the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52 to the upper part of the game board 30 returns to the inside of the ball guide passage 49. Further, in a state where the game board 30 is attached to the inner frame 12, at a position on the outer rail 52 corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the game ball (upper right portion in FIG. 3: a portion corresponding to the tip end portion of the outer rail 52). Is located where the return rubber 54 is located. Therefore, the game ball launched with a momentum equal to or higher than a predetermined value hits the return rubber 54 and is bounced off. Since the outer rail 52 is a long metal band made of stainless steel, the flight of the game ball can be made smoother, that is, the frictional resistance of the game ball can be reduced. As shown in FIG. 3, the game area in the first symbol display device 40 is from the tip of the outer rail 52 (upper right of FIG. 3) to the right tip of the inner rail 51 (lower right of FIG. 3). The game area 30a is partitioned by locating the wall portion 56 on the 30a side and the wall portion 55 (shown by the broken line in FIG. 3) formed on the inner frame 12.

As shown in FIG. 3, the lower right corner of the game board 30 is a space for attaching a sticker SL (which may be a plate) such as a certificate stamp (for example, a serial number is written). By sticking a sticker SL such as a certificate stamp on the lower right corner of the game board 30, the game board 30 and the certificate stamp can be unique.

Next, the game area 30a of the game board 30 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the game area 30a is divided into substantially vertically elongated circular shapes by the inner peripheral portions (inner and outer rails) of the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52. In particular, in the present embodiment, the game board 30a is formed. The game area 30a partitioned on the board surface of the game is largely configured.

In the present embodiment, when the game area 30a is viewed from the front of the pachinko machine 10, the area surrounded by the inner rail 51 and the outer rail 52, excluding the area of the guide rail which is a parallel portion of the inner and outer rails 51 and 52. Area. Therefore, since the guide rail portion is not included in the game area 30a, the limit position on the left side of the game area 30a is specified not by the outer rail 52 but by the inner rail 51. Further, the limit position on the right side of the game area 30a is specified by the wall portion 55 (a part of the inner frame 12). Further, the lower limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the inner rail 51. Further, the upper limit position of the game area 30a is specified by the outer rail 52.

Although disclosure of detailed drawings is omitted, game balls are supplied to the launching device 229 one by one from a ball outlet (a ball outlet leading from the most downstream portion of the upper plate 19) of the front frame set 14 (not shown). ..

Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, in the pachinko machine 10, various control boards are arranged vertically and horizontally on the back surface (actually, the back surface of the inner frame 12 and the game board 30), and predetermined control boards are stacked in the front and back (actually,). For example, the payout control board 311a of FIG. 4, which will be described later, is located on the front side in the rear view, and the power supply control board of the power supply device 313 and the launch control board of the launch control device 312 are located on the back side of the payout control board 311a). Further, a game ball supply device (pain mechanism unit 352) for supplying the game balls, a resin protective cover 353, and the like are attached. In the present embodiment, various control boards are separately mounted on a plurality of (three) mounting bases 230 to 232 shown in FIG. 2, and these are used as each control board unit, and each control board unit is individually mounted on the inner frame 12 or It is attached to the back of the game board 30. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 2, the main control device 261 is mounted on the mounting base 230, and the sub control device 262 is mounted on the mounting base 232 to be unitized, and the payout control device 311 and the launch control device are respectively. The 312 and the power supply device 313 are mounted on the mounting base 231 to form a unit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2, in the payout mechanism unit 352, various parts (tank 355, tank rail 356, case rail 357, payout device 358, and power switch board 382, which will be described later) are reversed L when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10. The unit is arranged in a U-shape, and the payout mechanism portion 352 and the protective cover 353 are also integrated as one unit. Since the unit is sometimes referred to as a back pack, the unit is referred to as "back" here. It is called "pack unit 203".

The back pack unit 203 is configured so that it can be attached and detached in units of units without using any tools, and in addition to this, a support shaft portion is provided in a part thereof with respect to the inner frame 12 or the back surface of the game board 30. It has a structure that can be opened and closed. This is also a device for making it possible to easily confirm the hidden configuration or the like even if the back pack unit 203 and other configurations are arranged so as to overlap each other in the front-rear direction.

Further, on the back surface of the game board 30, a prize detection mechanism for detecting the passage of a game ball such as various prize openings is provided. Specifically, a winning opening switch (not shown) is provided at a position corresponding to the general winning opening 31 on the front side of the game board 30, and a count switch (not shown) is provided on the variable winning device 32. The count switch is a switch for counting winning balls. Further, at the positions corresponding to the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, the operation port switch (not shown) for the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device for special drawing 2 are located. An operating port switch (not shown) (not shown) for 33b is provided, and each operating port switch allows the game ball to enter the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Is detected by. A gate switch is provided at a position corresponding to the normal symbol start port 34, and the gate switch detects the passage of the game ball through the normal symbol start port 34.

The winning opening switch (not shown) of the general winning opening 31 and the gate switch of the starting port 34 for a normal symbol are connected to a board surface connection board (not shown) through electrical wiring (not shown), and this board surface connection board is further described as a main control. It is connected to the main control board 261a (see FIG. 4) in the device 261. Further, the count switch of the variable winning device 32 is connected to the large winning opening relay terminal board (not shown), and the large winning opening relay terminal board is also connected to the main control board 261a. On the other hand, the operation port switches of the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 are directly connected to the main control board 261a without passing through the relay board.

Although not shown in the illustration, the variable winning device 32 is provided with a large winning opening solenoid for opening the large winning opening 32a, and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 on the lower side opens an electric accessory. A working port solenoid is provided for this purpose.

The detection results detected by the winning detection mechanism are taken into the main control board 261a in the main control device 261 described later, and the payout command (of the game ball) according to the winning situation each time is taken from the main control board 261a. The number of payouts) is transmitted to the payout control board 311a. Then, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out by the output of the payout control board 311a.

As shown in FIG. 2, the main control device 261 is mounted on the lower mounting base 230 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10, and the sub control device 262 is mounted on the upper mounting base 232 in the rear view of the pachinko machine 10. Has been done. Here, as shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 261 includes a CPU 501 that controls the main control, a ROM 502 that stores a game program, a RAM 503 that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and various devices. Main control including input / output port 505 for communication, random number generator (not shown) used for various lottery, clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) used for time counting and synchronization, etc. A substrate 261a is provided, and the main control substrate 261a is housed in a substrate box 263 (encapsulating means) made of a transparent resin material or the like. The substrate box 263 includes a box base having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are unopenably connected by a sealing unit 261c, whereby the substrate box 263 is sealed.

Further, the sub control device 262 includes, for example, a CPU 551 that controls voice and lamp display and control of the display control device 45 according to an instruction from the main control board 261a in the main control device 261, and other ROM 552, RAM 552, bus line 554, and the like. A sub-control board 262a including an input / output port 555 and the like is provided, and the sub-control board 262a is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. The power supplied from the power supply board, which will be described later, is output to the display control device 45 via the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 2, the payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are mounted on the mounting base 231. The payout control device 311 includes a CPU that plays a central role in control, and a control board that includes other ROMs, RAMs, various ports, and the like. Further, the launch control device 312 includes a launch control board. Further, the power supply device 313 is provided with a power supply control board. The payout control board 311a of the payout control device 311 controls the payout of prize balls and loan balls. Further, the launch control board of the launch control device 312 controls the launch device 229 (see FIG. 4) according to the operation of the game ball launch handle 18 by the player, and the power supply board of the power supply device 313 controls various control devices and the like. The required predetermined power supply voltage is generated and output. The launching device 229 of this embodiment employs a solenoid-type launching component that strikes a game ball with a launching mallet (not shown) that can move forward and backward according to energization / non-energization of the launching solenoid (not shown). In addition, as other launching devices 229, there are various types such as a mechanical launching component that launches a game ball by hitting it with a launching punch that operates according to the drive of a launching motor, and an electromagnetic launching component that launches a game ball by generating an electromagnetic field. You may adopt the type of. The card unit connection board 314 is electrically connected to the ball lending operation unit 120 (see FIG. 1) on the front surface of the pachinko machine and a card unit (not shown), and takes in a command for the ball lending operation by the player and dispenses it. It is output to. The card unit connection board 314 is not required for a cash machine in which a game ball is directly lent to the upper plate 19 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit.

The payout control device 311, the launch control device 312, the power supply device 313, and the card unit connection board 314 are each housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material or the like. In particular, in the payout control device 311, similarly to the main control device 261 described above, the box base and the box cover constituting the substrate box 311b (encapsulating means) are unopenably connected by the sealing unit (sealing means). The board box 311b is sealed.

As shown in FIG. 2, the payout control device 311 is provided with a state return switch 311c. For example, when the state return switch 311c is pressed when a payout error such as ball clogging in the payout motor section occurs, the payout motor 358a (see FIG. 4) is slowly rotated in the forward direction to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state). ) Is planned.

Further, the power supply monitoring board 261b is provided with a RAM erasing switch 323. The pachinko machine 10 has a backup function, and can maintain the state at the time of a power failure even in the unlikely event of a power failure, and can return to the state at the time of a power failure when recovering from the power failure (recovery of power). Therefore, if the power is turned off in the normal procedure (for example, when the hall is closed), the state before the power is turned off is stored in memory. Therefore, when the power is turned on, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. It is decided to put it in.

Next, the configuration of the back pack unit 203 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 203 integrates a resin-molded protective cover 353 and a game ball payout mechanism portion 352.

The back pack unit 203 is provided with a tank 355 that opens upward at the uppermost portion thereof, and the tank 355 is sequentially replenished with game balls supplied from the island equipment (game island equipment) of the game hall. Below the tank 355, for example, a tank rail 356 having two rows of ball passages in the horizontal direction and gently sloping downward toward the downstream side is connected, and further, a case rail 357 in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 356. Are concatenated. A payout device 358 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 357, and a required number of game balls are appropriately paid out according to a predetermined electrical configuration of the payout motor 358a or the like. Then, the game balls paid out from the payout device 358 are supplied to the upper plate 19 through a payout passage (not shown) or the like.

Further, the tank rail 356 is provided with a vibrator 360 for adding vibration to the tank rail 356. For example, the vibrator 360 is fastened to and attached to the tank rail 356 with, for example, two screws. Further, the vibrator 360 is not in surface contact with the tank rail 356, but is in contact with the two screw portions, and the vibration by the vibrator 360 is more effectively transmitted to the tank rail 356. Therefore, if a ball clogging occurs in the vicinity of the tank rail 356, the ball clogging is eliminated by driving the vibrator 360.

A payout relay board (not shown) that relays a signal of a payout command from the payout control device 311 to the payout device 358 is installed in the payout mechanism unit 352, and a power switch board 382 for taking in the main power supply from the outside is installed. is set up. For example, an AC 24V main power supply is supplied to the power switch board 382 via a voltage converter, and the power is turned on or off by the switching operation of the power switch 382a.

The payout mechanism portion 352 from the tank 355 to the payout passage (not shown) is all molded of a conductive resin material (for example, a conductive polycarbonate resin), and a part thereof is grounded. .. As a result, the generation of noise due to the charging of the game ball is suppressed.

As shown in FIG. 2, an inner frame open detection switch 388 for detecting that the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 is provided on the upper right side of the inner frame 12. When the inner frame 12 is opened, it is output from the inner frame open detection switch 388 to the computer in the hall (inside the pachinko shop).

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 includes a main control device 261, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a display control device 45, a voice output control device 47, a power supply device 313, and the like. .. Hereinafter, these devices will be described in detail individually.

The main control device 261 of the pachinko machine 10 is equipped with a CPU 501 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The CPU 501 is a ROM 502 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 501, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 502 is executed. A certain RAM 503 and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in.

The RAM 503 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, and the RAM 503 temporarily stores various data and the like. It has memory and area.

That is, when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the normal processing to the end, so that the RAM 503 is used when the power is turned off (including the time when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter). It is only necessary to store and retain the contents of the counter buffer and the holding ball storage area, and the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power is turned off when the power is turned on again. Specifically, it is not necessary to provide the RAM 503 with a dedicated backup area for storing values such as registers and I / O for game information during normal processing when the power is turned off. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 501 is configured to input a power failure signal S1 output from a power failure monitoring circuit 542, which will be described later, when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like. Upon occurrence, power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing) is immediately executed.

An input / output port 505 is connected to the CPU 501 containing the ROM 502 and the RAM 503 via a bus line 504 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 505 includes a RAM erase switch circuit 543, a payout control device 311, a launch control device 312, a sub control device 262, a first symbol display device 40, a second symbol display device 41, and other switches not shown. Etc. are connected. Further, the main control device 261 has a function of controlling the variation display of the first symbol in the first symbol display device 40 and the variation display of the second symbol in the second symbol display device 41.

Similar to the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 described above, the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 313 and data can be retained (backed up) even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. , RAM 513 is provided with a memory and an area for temporarily storing various data and the like.

When the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like, the RAM 513 stores and holds information about the state at the time of power off so that the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be restored to the state before the power was turned off when the power is turned on again. That is, the storage of the RAM 513 is executed when the power is turned off by the steps in the latter half of the NMI interrupt process and the payout control process, and conversely, the restoration of the stored information of the RAM 513 is executed in the power recovery process when the power is turned on. ..

An input / output port 515 is connected to the CPU 511 containing the ROM 512 and the RAM 513 via a bus line 514 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 261 and a launch control device 312, a payout motor 358a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 515, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 4, the launch control device 312 permits or prohibits the launch of the game ball by the launch device 229, and the launch device 229 is permitted to drive when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the launch control device 312 includes a card unit connection signal S4 from the payout control device 311 (a signal output when the above-mentioned card unit is connected to the pachinko machine 10) and a player. The touch detection signal S5 output when the game ball launch handle 18 is touched, and the launch stop switch 18a provided on the game ball launch handle 18 for stopping the launch is not operated. The launch permission signal S7 is output to the main control device 261 on condition that all of the launch maintenance signals S6 are input. Further, a volume signal S10 corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18 is input from the game ball launch handle 18 to the launch control device 312, and the launch control device 312 outputs the volume signal S10 to the main control device 261. To do.

That is, the period when the launch permission signal S7 is ON (high level) is the launch permission state, and the period when the launch permission signal S7 is OFF (low level) is the launch disapproval state. That is, the main control device 261 sends the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) that controls the launch solenoid (not shown) that launches the game ball to the launch rail during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is ON. The ball feed control signal S9 (pulse signal) that controls the ball feed solenoid that feeds the game ball is repeatedly output to the launch control device 312 at a predetermined repetition cycle. The amplitude value of the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal) is determined by the main control device 261 based on the volume signal S10. For example, the larger the operation amount of the game ball launch handle 18, the more the launch control signal S8 (pulse signal). ) Increases the amplitude value. The launch control device 312 drives and controls the launch device 229 based on the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9, and launches the game ball with an intensity corresponding to the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 18. On the contrary, the main control device 261 does not output the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control signal S9 to the launch control device 312 during the period when the input launch permission signal S7 is OFF, and the launch device 229 does not output the game ball. Will not be fired.

The display control device 45 controls the variable display of the third symbol (decorative symbol) in the third symbol display device 42. The display control device 45 includes a CPU 521, a ROM (program ROM) 522, a work RAM 523, a video RAM 524, a character ROM 525, an image controller 526, an input port 527, an output port 529, and a bus line 530, 531. And have. The output of the sub controller 262 is connected to the input of the input port 527, and the CPU 521, the ROM 522, the work RAM 523, and the image controller 526 are connected to the output of the input port 527. Further, an output port 529 is connected to the image controller 526 via a bus line 531 and a third symbol display device 42, which is a liquid crystal display device, is connected to the output of the output port 529.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the decorative symbol display on the third symbol display device 42 based on various commands transmitted by editing and transmitting various commands from the main control device 261 by the sub control device 262. The ROM 522 is a memory for storing various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 521, and the work RAM 523 temporarily stores the work data and flags used when the various programs are executed by the CPU 521. Memory for.

The video RAM 524 is a memory for storing display data displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 524, the display contents of the third symbol display device 42 are changed. The character ROM 525 is a memory for storing character data such as decorative symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The image controller 526 adjusts the timings of the CPU 521, the video RAM 524, and the output port 529 to intervene in reading and writing data, and reads the display data stored in the video RAM 524 from the character ROM 525 at a predetermined timing to read the third data. It is to be displayed on the symbol display device 42.

The voice output control device 46 controls the sound output in the sound output unit 24a. The audio output control device 46 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and the like, and executes a process of controlling the output of normal audio and the output of specific sound according to the display effect on the third symbol display device 42. is there. The ROM stores a program for audio output processing and sound data. The audio output unit 24a includes an amplifier and a speaker for outputting audio.

Further, the power supply device 313 includes a power supply unit 541 for supplying electric power to each unit of the pachinko machine 10. The power supply unit 541 supplies the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like with the necessary operating power to each of them through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 541 takes in an AC 24-volt power supply supplied from the outside and generates a + 12V power supply for driving various switches and motors, a + 5V power supply for logic, a backup power supply for RAM backup, and the like. Then, these + 12V power supply, + 5V power supply, and backup power supply are supplied to the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 and the like. An operating power source (+ 12V power source, + 5V power source, etc.) is supplied to the launch control device 312 via the payout control device 311.

As shown in FIG. 4, the main control device 261 includes a main control board 261a and a power supply monitoring board 261b separate from the main control board 261a in a board box 263 made of a transparent resin material or the like. .. The power supply monitoring board 261b includes a power failure monitoring circuit 542 that monitors a power failure due to a power failure or the like, and a RAM erase switch circuit 543 that is connected to the RAM erase switch 323.

The power failure monitoring circuit 542 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal S1 to each NMI terminal of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 542 monitors the voltage of AC 24 volts in the power supply unit 541, and determines that a power failure (power failure) has occurred when the voltage becomes less than 22 volts, for example, when it exceeds 20 milliseconds. , The power failure signal S1 is output to the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311. By the output of the power failure signal S1, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the power failure processing (NMI interrupt processing).

In addition, even after the time when the AC 24 volt monitored by the power supply unit 541 becomes less than 22 volt exceeds 20 milliseconds, the power supply unit 541 has a sufficient time to execute the power failure processing. It is configured to maintain the output of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, at a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 can normally execute and complete the power failure processing.

The RAM erase switch circuit 543 is a circuit for taking in the switch signal of the RAM erase switch 323 and clearing the backup data of the RAM 503 of the main control device 261 and the RAM 513 of the payout control device 311 according to the state of the switch 323. When the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed, the RAM erase switch circuit 543 outputs the RAM erase signal S2 to the main control board 261a. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 323 is pressed (including turning on the power due to the resolution of the power failure), the data of the RAM 503 is cleared in the main control device 261 and the payout control device 311 is the main control device. When the initialization command from 261 is received, the data in RAM 513 is cleared.

By the way, as shown in FIG. 5, three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R on the left, middle, and right are set in the third symbol display device 42 (liquid crystal display device), and the decorative symbol rows L, Three decorative symbols, an upper decorative symbol, a middle decorative symbol, and a lower decorative symbol, are displayed in a variable manner for each of M and R. In the present embodiment, the series of symbols is composed of a main decorative symbol SZ with numbers "0" to "9" and a sub-decorative symbol FZ composed of diamond-shaped symbols. The main decorative symbols SZ are displayed in ascending or descending order, and the sub-decorative symbols FZ are arranged between the main decorative symbols SZ to form a series of decorative symbol rows L, M, and R. Then, the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are displayed in a variable manner from top to bottom with periodicity.

In such a case, in the left decorative symbol row L, the above series of decorative symbols are displayed in descending order (that is, in the order in which the numbers of the main decorative symbols SZ decrease), and in the middle decorative symbol row M and the right decorative symbol row R, the same applies. The series of decorative symbols are displayed in ascending order (that is, in descending order of the number of the main decorative symbol SZ). Then, the variable display is stopped in the order of the left decorative symbol row L → the right decorative symbol row R → the middle decorative symbol row M, and at the time of the stop, the five effective lines on the third symbol display device 42, that is, the upper line L1 and the middle line. If the main decorative symbol SZ is a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, the same combination of main decorative symbols SZ) in any of L2, lower line L3, right-up line L4, and left-up line L5, it is special as a jackpot. The game video is displayed.

The main decorative pattern SZ is composed of a number part SZa on which numbers are drawn and a decorative part SZb on which characters such as people and animals are decoratively drawn. For example, the main decorative symbols SZ "1" arranged in the three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R are the same characters ("2" to "1" in the frame surrounding the number part SZa "1" and "1", respectively. It is composed of a decorative portion SZb on which a character different from 9 ”is drawn. The same applies to the main decorative symbols SZ "2" to "9".

Next, the operation of the pachinko machine 10 configured as described above will be described.

In the present embodiment, the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 uses a random number related to the operation of the accessory and another random number used for the game to draw a lottery for the first symbol display device 40 (big hit lottery: first). (Big hit lottery of symbols) and symbol display settings, lottery of the second symbol display device 41 (winning lottery of the second symbol) and symbol display settings, and decorative symbols (third symbol) of the third symbol display device 42. A lottery related to variable display and its setting will be performed.

Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as a random number related to the operation of the accessory, as shown in FIG. 6, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery of the first symbol display device 40 and the first random number counter C1 The jackpot symbol counter C2 used for selecting the jackpot symbol of the symbol display device 40, the initial value random number counter CINI1 used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1, and the second symbol display device 41 used for the winning lottery. The two symbol random number counter C4 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 used for setting the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4 are used.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, as other random numbers used for the game, as shown in FIG. 6, in order to roughly specify the type of the variation pattern when selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42. The stop pattern selection counter C3 used for selecting the stop pattern, the variation type counters CS1, CS2, CS3 used for selecting the variation pattern of the decorative symbol of the third symbol display device 42, and the outlier symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 used for selection is used. Each of the above-mentioned counters is composed of a program executed by the CPU 501.

For example, "stop pattern 0" indicates a complete deviation variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of complete deviation fluctuation patterns, and "stop pattern 1" indicates a front-back deviation reach variation pattern group consisting of a plurality of types of front-back deviation reach fluctuation patterns. The "stop pattern 2" indicates a group of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, which is composed of a plurality of types of reach fluctuation patterns other than the front-back deviation, and the "stop pattern 3" is composed of a plurality of types of jackpot fluctuation patterns. It shows a group of jackpot fluctuation patterns.

For all of these counters C1 to C5, CINI1 to CINI2, CS1 to CS3, "1" is added to the previous value each time the counter is updated (hereinafter referred to as "update"), and after reaching the maximum value, it becomes "0". It is a return loop counter. Each counter is periodically updated, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. Further, the RAM 503 is provided with a holding ball storage area including one execution area and four holding areas (first holding area, second holding area, third holding area, fourth holding area). In each of these areas, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are set according to the winning history of the game ball to the special figure 1 start winning device 33a and the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. Each value such as is stored in chronological order. It should be noted that the winning of the game ball in the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is also referred to as the establishment of the starting condition. Each value stored in the execution area is also called a variable display for the executed portion, and each value stored in the reserved ball storage area is also called a variable display for the unexecuted portion.

Specifically, if the start condition is satisfied during the period when neither the executed portion nor the unexecuted portion is stored in the execution area and the reserved ball storage area, the execution portion fluctuation display is displayed in the execution area. Is stored. If the start condition is satisfied during the period when the variation display of the execution amount is stored in the execution area, the unexecuted part is in the order of the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area. The variable display of is stored. When the variation display of the execution amount is stored in the execution area, the variation non-execution condition for not executing the variation display of the symbol is satisfied with respect to the variation display of the unexecuted portion stored in the hold ball storage area.

The variable display of the unexecuted portion stored in the first hold area, the second hold area, the third hold area, and the fourth hold area is also called the first hold, the second hold, the third hold, and the fourth hold.

Each of the above-mentioned counters will be described in detail below with reference to FIG. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "599", reach the maximum value (that is, "599"), and then return to "0". In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The initial value random number counter CINI1 is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599), is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 21) described later, and is a normal process described later. It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time (see FIG. 15). The jackpot random number counter C1 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 21) described later in this embodiment), and the game ball is a start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and a start winning device for special figure 2. It is stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the 33b is won.

The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1, that is, the number of random numbers that become jackpots is set to two types, one at low probability and the other at high probability, and the number of random numbers that become jackpot at low probability is two. The value is "150,450", the number of random numbers that are big hits at high probability is 4, and the value is "50,150,350,450". That is, when the probability is low, the jackpot probability is 1/300, and when the probability is high, the jackpot probability is 1/150. The high-probability time refers to a state in which a jackpot is achieved by a predetermined probability fluctuation symbol and the subsequent jackpot probability is increased as an added value, that is, a so-called "probability change", which is a normal time (low probability time). Refers to the time when it is not in such a probabilistic state. Further, the high probability time (probability variation state) is continued until the next jackpot after the probability variation jackpot or the latent probability variation jackpot ends (after the jackpot 32a of the variable winning device 32 opens for 16 rounds, for example). The transition from the low probability time to the current probability time is performed when the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the V winning sensor 433. When the game ball flowing down the game area passes through the V winning sensor 433, the function of the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that shifts the hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1 from the value at the time of low probability to the value at the time of this probability is It corresponds to an example of the specific game state transition means for shifting the game ball flowing down the game area of the present invention to the specific game state which is advantageous to the player by passing through the specific area.

The jackpot symbol counter C2 is a symbol at the time of a jackpot when the fluctuation of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is stopped (in this embodiment, the final display symbol after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a). ) Is determined. In this embodiment, the jackpot symbol counter C2 is configured to be added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "99", reach the maximum value (that is, "9"), and then return to "0". There is. The jackpot symbol counter C2 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 21) described later) as in the case of the jackpot random number counter C1 described above, and the game ball is a start winning device 33a for special figure 1. , It is stored in the holding ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the timing when the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 wins a prize.

A jackpot lottery table using the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot symbol counter C2 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7A is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table, and FIG. 7B is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. When the jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "0" to "39", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the third symbol. As will be described later, the decorative symbols are arranged in odd-numbered symbols excluding "7" such as "1", "3", "5", and "9". Next, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "40" to "79", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is second. It stops at a symbol, and the decorative symbols are aligned with even-numbered symbols such as "2", "4", "6", and "8" as described later. Next, when the above-mentioned jackpot random number counter C1 is a hit and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "80" to "99", the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is the first. It stops at a symbol, and the decorative patterns are aligned with "7" as described later. When the jackpot random number counter C1 is off, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 stops at the fourth symbol regardless of the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, indicating that the decorative symbol is off. It will be a combination.

As will be described later, the combination gate 413 is composed of four combination gates 413A, 413B, 413C, and 413D (collectively referred to as combination gates 413. In FIG. 7, they are referred to as gate A and the like). Which of the special figure 1 big hit lottery table and the special figure 2 big hit lottery table is used for the distribution of the number of rounds for each role gate 413, that is, the distribution of the number of rounds for each role gate is a special figure. It depends on which of the starting winning device 33a for 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is won. Here, the probabilistic gaming state in which the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is used is more advantageous (greater value to be obtained) to the player than the normal game state in which the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table is used. The number of rounds is distributed to.

First, when the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table is used, if the jackpot symbols are odd-numbered symbols of "1", "3", "5", and "9" (third jackpot), the winning combination gate 413A ~ Since 413C is set to 2R and the combination gate 413D is set to 16R, the probability of becoming 2R is higher than the probability of becoming 16R. If the jackpot symbols are even-numbered symbols of "2", "4", "6", and "8" (second jackpot), the winning combination gates 413A and 413B are set to 2R, and the winning combination gate 413C is set to 8R. Since it is set and the combination gate 413D is set to 16R, the probability of becoming 2R and the probability of becoming 8R or 16R are almost equal. If the jackpot symbol is "7" (first jackpot), the combination gate 413A is set to 16R, the combination gate 413B is set to 8R, the combination gate 413C is set to 8R, and the combination gate 413D is set. Since it is set to 8R, it is confirmed that it is at least 8R or more.

The special figure 1 jackpot lottery table has one gate (advantageous hole) set to 16R out of the combination gates 413A to 413D, but the first jackpot, the second jackpot, and the third jackpot At least one of the gates may be set to either 2R or 8R (the number of rounds excluding 16R). In addition, the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table has one gate set to 16R out of the winning combination gates 413A to 413D, but it is set to 16R for each of the first jackpot, the second jackpot, and the third jackpot. The number of gates (advantageous holes) to be set may be changed. That is, the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table may also function as an advantageous hole lottery table described later.

Next, when the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is used, if the jackpot symbol is an odd number symbol of "1", "3", "5", "9", the winning combination gate 413A is set to 8R. Since the combination gate 413B is set to 2R, the combination gate 413C is set to 8R, and the combination gate 413D is set to 16R, the probability of becoming 8R or more is higher than the probability of becoming 2R. If the jackpot symbol is an even number symbol of "2", "4", "6", "8", the winning combination gate 413A is set to 8R, the winning combination gate 413B is set to 2R, and the winning combination gate 413C, Since 413D is set to 16R, the probability of becoming 8R or more is higher than the probability of becoming 2R, and the probability of becoming 16R is higher than the probability of becoming 8R. If the jackpot symbol is "7", the winning combination gates 413A to 413C are set to 16R, and the winning combination gate 413D is set to 8R. The probability of becoming 16R is higher. In this way, when the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is used, whether or not to pass through the 16R gate (advantageous hole) having a large number of rounds among the winning combination gates 413A to 413D is the first jackpot. The case is the easiest to pass through the advantageous hole, the second big hit is the easiest to pass through the advantageous hole, and the third big hit is the most difficult to pass through the advantageous hole. That is, does the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table make it easy for the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a to pass through the 16R gate (advantageous hole) having a large number of rounds among the winning combination gates 413A to 413D? It functions as an advantageous hole lottery table for performing a lottery to determine the type of big hit such as the first big hit, the second big hit, and the third big hit, which is decided whether or not.

Further, after the jackpot round game is completed, a support state for facilitating the winning of the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is set for a predetermined number of games. During the support state, the result of the normal symbol lottery based on the passage detection at the normal symbol start port 34 is likely to be won, and the special figure 2 start winning device 33b is in the open state where the game ball can be entered with high frequency. It is in a state of being done. During the support state, it is difficult to reduce the number of balls you have. If the player performs an operation of firing the game ball with the same strength as in the jackpot round game state during the support state, the fired game ball can be easily sent to the normal symbol start port 34 and the special figure 2 start winning device 33b. You can enter the ball.

For example, when the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table is used, in the case of the first jackpot, the support status is set until the next jackpot is won, and in the case of the second jackpot, the support status is set 100 times, and the third jackpot is set. In the case of a big hit, the support state of 0 times is set. That is, if the result of the lottery based on the detection of the ball entering the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is the first or second big hit, after the end of the big hit round game state, until then. The left-handed game aiming at the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is changed to the right-handed game aiming at the starting winning device 33b for special figure 2. In the case of the third big hit, the left-handed game is continued.

Further, for example, even when the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is used, in the case of the first jackpot, the support state is set until the next jackpot is won, and in the case of the second jackpot, the support state is set 100 times. In the case of the third big hit, the support state of 0 times is set. That is, if the result of the lottery is the first or second big hit, the right-handed game is continued after the end of the big-hit round game state, but in the case of the third big hit, the right-handed game is changed to the left-handed game.

In this embodiment, it is confirmed that a V prize will be won when passing through the winning combination gate 413A. Therefore, when the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table is used (that is, in the normal case), if it passes through the winning combination gate 413A, it will be a certain change, but the number of rounds that can be obtained is small. On the other hand, when the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is used (that is, in the probabilistic state), if the winning combination gate 413A is passed, the probabilistic change occurs and the number of rounds that can be obtained is large.

Further, the stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0" to "238", reach the maximum value (that is, 238), and then return to "0". In the present embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 causes the decorative symbol to reach on the third symbol display device 42, and then the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach decorative symbol to stop. Similarly, after the reach occurs, the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach decorative symbol, and the "reach other than the front and rear detachment" and the "complete detachment" where the reach does not occur are drawn by lottery. For example, C3 = 0 to 201 corresponds to complete deviation, C3 = 202 to 208 corresponds to front and rear deviation reach, and C3 = 209 to 238 corresponds to non-front and rear deviation reach. The content of the lottery (reach lottery) of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is whether the pachinko machine 10 has a low probability or a high probability, and the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40 is not activated. It may be set individually depending on whether it is in operation or in operation, how many balls are reserved for operation at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, and the like. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 21) described later), and the game ball wins the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. It is stored in the hold ball storage area of the RAM 503 at the same timing.

Further, among the three variable type counters CS1 to CS3, the variable type counter CS1 is added one by one in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 198", reaches the maximum value (that is, "198"), and then becomes "0". The variable type counter CS2 is configured to return to "0" after reaching the maximum value (that is, "240") by adding 1 in order within the range of "0 to 240", for example. The variable type counter CS3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of, for example, "0 to 162", reach the maximum value (that is, "162"), and then return to "0". In the following description, the fluctuation type counter CS1 will be appropriately referred to as a “first fluctuation type counter”, the fluctuation type counter CS2 may be referred to as a “second fluctuation type counter”, and the fluctuation type counter CS3 may be appropriately referred to as a “third fluctuation type counter”. ..

The first variation type counter CS1 determines a rough variation pattern group of decorative symbols such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as so-called normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc., and the type of complete deviation. .. Subsequently, one further variation pattern from the variation pattern group thus determined by the first variation type counter CS1 is determined by the second variation type counter CS2.

Next, an example of the closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435, which is necessary for determining whether or not the probability change state occurs after the end of the jackpot game state, will be described. FIG. 8A is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region 435, FIG. 8B is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and FIG. 8C is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. The closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435 may be different patterns or may be a combination of different patterns.

Whether or not the probability change state occurs after the end of the jackpot game state is determined by whether or not the game ball enters the V region 435 described later. The V region 435 is opened and closed by a guidance lever 437 that switches whether or not to guide the game ball into the V region 435. The V region 435 is composed of five V regions 435A to 435E, and each V region 435 is provided with a guide lever 437A to 437E. In this embodiment, the diameter of the game ball is 11 mm, and the front-rear width of the game area 435 is 20 mm. When the V regions 435A to 435E are generically referred to, they are referred to as V regions 435. In the drawings, the V regions 435A to 435E may be referred to as V regions A to E.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the V regions 435A to 435E are closed at a speed at which the game ball is closed to a width of 10 mm, which prevents the game ball from entering, 4 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. Will be done. The V region 435 may be closed continuously at a constant speed, may be closed stepwise at predetermined time intervals, or may be closed at a predetermined time at a predetermined time (for example, the above-mentioned 4 seconds). It may be closed to a position (for example, the above-mentioned position having a width of 10 mm). Of course, the V region 435 may be completely closed at once.

As shown in FIG. 8B, the V regions 435A to 435E are closed during the normal state before the jackpot winning is confirmed, but are opened when the jackpot is confirmed. At the time of jackpot confirmation, the jackpot confirmation may be displayed at the same time as the third symbol display device 42, or after the jackpot confirmation is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, whether or not a probability change state occurs next. It may be the time when a predetermined time for displaying the notification that the game for determining the game is to be performed has elapsed.

As shown in FIG. 8C, the V region 435A to 435E are closed every 4 seconds in the order of V region 435A → V region 435E → V region 435B → V region 435D → V region 435C. That is, the next V region 435 is set to start the closing operation at the timing when the V region 435 of 1 changes from being able to enter the ball to not being able to enter the ball. By gradually narrowing the V region 435 in this way, the player is given a feeling of excitement. Specifically, the V region 435A starts the closing operation 4 seconds after the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, and the V region 435E is 8 seconds after the game ball passes through the combination gate 413. The closing operation is started later, and the V area 435B starts the closing operation 12 seconds after the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, and the V area 435D is set after the game ball passes through the combination gate 413. The closing operation is started 16 seconds later, and the closing operation of the V region 435C is started 20 seconds after the game ball passes through the combination gate 413. The method of starting the closing operation of the V region 435 is not limited to this, and the closing operation of the other V region 435 may be started while one V region 435 can enter the ball.

The variation pattern of the decorative symbol for the special figure 1 is determined by using the variation pattern selection table for the main decorative symbol for the special figure 1 shown in FIG.

That is, when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "0" to "39" and the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "20", the normal reach group (big hit normal reach group) is determined. If it is "21" to "90" or "91" to "160" or "161" to "198", the super reach group (big hit super reach group) is determined. When the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "40" to "79" and the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "20", the normal reach group (big hit normal reach group) is determined and "21". "90" or "91" to "160" or "161" to "198", the super reach group (big hit super reach group) is determined. When the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "80" to "99", the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "70" or "71" to "140" or "141" to "198". If so, the super reach group (big hit super reach group) is determined. In this way, when winning a big hit, the probability that the super reach with a high jackpot expectation is selected is higher than the normal reach with a low jackpot expectation. As a result, it is possible to give the player the recognition that it is easy to win the jackpot when the reach with high expectations of the player is executed.

When the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "0" to "39" (that is, when the third symbol is an odd symbol excluding 7, the third jackpot), the detailed fluctuation pattern types are as follows. Is decided on. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "20" and the second variation type counter CS2 is "0" to "240", the normal reach A (big hit normal reach A) is determined.

Next, when the first variable type counter CS1 is "21" to "90" and the second variable type counter CS2 is "0" to "189", super reach A (big hit super reach A) is determined. If the second variable type counter CS2 is "190" to "240", the super reach B (big hit super reach B) is determined. As will be described later, Super Reach A is determined whether it is a big hit or a miss, but Super Reach B is determined only when it is a big hit. As a result, if a special hold change (special effect) such that the hold display TH changes to rainbow color is executed in Super Reach B, the fact that the hold display TH is rainbow color suggests that the jackpot is confirmed. It becomes easier to give the player the recognition.

If the first variable type counter CS1 is "91" to "160" and the second variable type counter CS2 is "0" to "189", super reach C (big hit super reach C) is determined. If the second variable type counter CS2 is "190" to "240", the super reach D (big hit super reach D) is determined. As will be described later, the super reach C is determined whether it is a big hit or a miss, but the super reach D is determined only in the case of a big hit. As a result, if a special hold change (special effect) such that the hold display TH changes to rainbow color is executed in Super Reach D, the fact that the hold display TH is rainbow color suggests that the jackpot is confirmed. It becomes easier to give the player the recognition.

If the first variable type counter CS1 is "161" to "198" and the second variable type counter CS2 is "0" to "119", super reach E (big hit super reach E) is determined. If the second variable type counter CS2 is "120" to "240", the super reach F (big hit super reach F) is determined. As will be described later, the super reach E is determined whether it is a big hit or a miss, but the super reach F is determined only in the case of a big hit. In the jackpot super reach F, after three matching symbols indicating that the jackpot is a jackpot (not confirmed) are displayed, a re-variation effect of changing the type (number) of the matching symbols is performed. As described above, the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413 differs depending on the type of jackpot symbol. The re-variation effect is an effect of whether or not to promote to a symbol corresponding to the round number distribution table with a large number of rounds, and is an effect that expects the first jackpot ("7") in which the round number distribution table is advantageous. is there. However, if the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "0" to "39", there is no promotion even if the re-variation effect is performed with the third jackpot (odd symbols excluding 7), and the third jackpot (3rd jackpot) ( Odd symbols except 7) remain.

Even when the jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "46" to "79" (that is, when the third symbol is an even numbered second jackpot), the jackpot symbol counter C2 described above is "0" to "39". Is determined in the same way as in the case of any of.

If the jackpot symbol counter C2 described above is any of "80" to "99" (that is, the first jackpot with the third symbol being "7"), if it is Super Reach E, it is a round as a special effect. The word "great chance" is displayed, suggesting that the number distribution table is advantageous. This special production of "Big Chance" is performed only by the jackpot Super Reach E or a specific out-of-order Super Reach E (Super Reach E that is out of front and back with 7 reach). As a result, when the round number distribution table becomes an advantageous first jackpot, the player is suggested that the round number distribution table is advantageous by performing a special effect different from the case of other jackpots. can do.

Further, when the above-mentioned jackpot symbol counter C2 is any of "80" to "99" (that is, when the third symbol is the first jackpot of "7"), if it is Super Reach F, a special effect is produced. As a re-variation effect is performed. The re-variation effect here is temporarily stopped at the second jackpot (even symbol) or the third jackpot (odd symbol excluding 7), but is re-variated and promoted to the first jackpot ("7"). It is a production. In this way, when the round number distribution table becomes an advantageous first jackpot, the round number distribution table can be changed by performing special fluctuations different from those of other jackpots even in the variation display of the symbol. It is possible to suggest to the player that it is advantageous.

The special effect of Super Reach F may be a special effect different from the above-mentioned special effect. For example, in Super Chi E, "Big Chance" is displayed in gold, and in Super Reach F, "Big Chance" is displayed in rainbow color. It is possible to suggest to the player that the round number distribution table is advantageous. Further, for example, in Super Chi B and D, the hold display TH is changed to rainbow color as a special hold change, but in Super Reach F, the hold display TH is changed to rainbow color as a different special hold change, and then 2 Even if it is doubled, it is possible to suggest to the player that the round number distribution table is advantageous by performing a special hold change different from other jackpot cases.

Next, if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "0" to "201", the complete deviation is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208", the front / rear deviation is normal. Either REIT or non-front-rear super reach is determined, and if the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "209" to "238", either non-front-rear normal reach or non-front-rear super reach is determined. In this way, when the jackpot lottery is missed, it is set so that it is likely to be completely missed.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "0" to "201", the detailed fluctuation pattern type is determined as follows. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", the complete deviation A is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the complete deviation B is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", the complete deviation C is determined.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "202" to "208", the detailed fluctuation pattern type is determined as follows. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", the front-rear deviation normal reach A is determined.

Further, when the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the front-rear deviation super reach A is determined. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "170", the front-rear deviation super reach C is determined. When the first variable type counter CS1 is "171" to "198" and the variable type counter CS2 is "0" to "199" (excluding the reach with the "7" symbol), the front and rear deviation super reach E Is determined, and if the variable type counter CS2 is "120" to "240", the front-rear out-of-front-back super reach E (of the reach with the "7" symbol) is determined.

Next, when the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any of "209" to "238", and when the first variation type counter CS1 is "0" to "100", the normal reach A is determined except for the front and rear. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "101" to "150", the point where the super reach A is determined except for the front and rear is that the stop pattern selection counter C3 is any one of "202" to "208". Is the same as in the case of. When the first variation type counter CS1 is "151" to "198", the super reach C is determined except for the front and rear. That is, since the out-of-order super reach E is limited to a specific out-of-order case, the expectation of the out-of-order super reach E can be increased.

The variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated once each time the normal processing described later is executed once, and are repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal processing. Then, the buffer values of the variable type counters CS1 to CS3 are acquired at the time of the start winning process.

The size and range of each of the above-mentioned counters are merely examples and can be arbitrarily changed. However, it is desirable that the jackpot random number counter C1, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 all have different prime numbers and are not synchronized in any case.

The variation pattern of the decorative symbol for the special figure 2 is determined by using the variation pattern selection table of the main decorative symbol for the special figure 2 shown in FIG.

The table for selecting the variable pattern of the main decorative symbol for special figure 2 is the same as the table for selecting the variable pattern of the main decorative symbol for special figure 1, but the table for selecting the variable pattern of the main decorative symbol for special figure 2 is used. In that case, the content of the special effect executed in the variable display effect is different.

When the fluctuation pattern E is determined by the jackpot symbol counter C2 being "40" to "79" (even symbols), as a special effect, it becomes more advantageous than the distribution of the number of rounds in the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table. The word "super chance" is displayed, suggesting that there are (there are two "16R"). Further, when the fluctuation pattern E is determined by the jackpot symbol counter C2 from "80" to "99" ("7" symbol), as a special effect, the number of rounds is not distributed at the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table. It is advantageous, and the jackpot symbol counter C2 is more advantageous in the distribution of the number of rounds than "40" to "79" (even symbols) (there are three "16R"). The word "chance" is displayed. As a result, when the table for selecting the variable pattern of the main decorative symbol for special figure 2 is used, the advantage of distributing the number of rounds is different when the table for selecting the variable pattern of the main decorative symbol for special figure 1 is used. Can be reflected in the variable display effect and suggested to the player.

Next, an example of the variable display effect of the main decorative symbol for special figure 1 will be described. FIG. 11 is an example of a variable display effect of the super reach E of the main decorative symbol for special figure 1, in which (a) shows the “6” symbol reach and (b) shows the “7” symbol reach. FIG. 12 is an example of a variable display effect of the super reach F of the main decorative symbol for special figure 1.

The jackpot super reach E and the missed super reach E when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 becomes “40” to “79” (even symbols) in the special figure 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 11 (a). In the third symbol display device 42, the main decorative symbol SZ is usually displayed on the front surface of the background. Based on the occurrence of the start winning prize, the variable display of the main decorative symbol SZ is started. When reach occurs, the left and right main decorative symbols SZ stop, and the middle main decorative symbol SZ continues to fluctuate. In the case of super reach, the normal reach using the main decorative symbol SZ is shifted to the development reach using the development symbol HZ. In the development reach, a reach development effect that suggests the result of the variable display is executed using an image other than the symbol. The reach development effect is, for example, a battle effect, in which a player image PY showing a player and an enemy image TK as an opponent fight each other. During the battle, a normal suggestion image NS suggesting the degree of expectation that the result of the variable display will be a big hit may be displayed. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the case of the jackpot super reach E with the “7” symbol, the characters “big chance” are displayed as the special suggestion image SS.

When the result of the variable display is a big hit, an image in which the player finally wins the opponent and the development symbols HZ are aligned in the big hit combination is displayed. After that, the jackpot combination by the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed, and the jackpot is confirmed. After the jackpot is confirmed, when a game for generating a probability variation state described later is performed, a round number distribution image RG showing the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 corresponding to the confirmed jackpot type is displayed. In the case of a big hit with an even numbered symbol, the round number distribution image RG displays "2R", "2R", "8R", and "16R". As shown in FIG. 11B, in the case of a big hit with the “7” symbol, the round number distribution image RG displays “8R”, “8R”, “8R”, and “16R”. This suggests whether the number of jackpot rounds that can be obtained is likely to increase.

If the result of the variable display is out of reach, the player finally loses to the opponent, and an image in which the development symbols HZ are aligned in a out-of-reach combination is displayed. After that, the reach deviation due to the main decorative symbol SZ is displayed, and the deviation is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 12A, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 in Special Figure 1 is "0" to "79" (odd symbol or even symbol excluding 7), the reach is developed in the jackpot super reach F. In the production, the player wins the opponent, and the images in which the development symbols HZ are aligned in a big hit combination are displayed, but each image is not completely stopped, for example, because the images quiver in small steps. Then, the development symbols prepared by the jackpot combination of the symbol "6" change again. This revariation suggests that the player may be promoted to a "7" symbol, which is more advantageous for rounds than the even symbol jackpot (second jackpot). However, when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 becomes "0" to "79" in the special figure 1, the symbol "6" is stopped and confirmed without promotion.

As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot super reach F when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "80" to "99" ("7" symbol) in special figure 1, the jackpot of the symbol "6" The development patterns that are aligned with the combination will change again. This revariation suggests that the player may be promoted to a "7" symbol, which is more advantageous for rounds than the even symbol jackpot (second jackpot). When the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 in special figure 1 becomes "80" to "99", there is promotion, so the jackpot symbol changes to "7" and is confirmed.

Next, an example of the variable display effect of the main decorative symbol for special figure 2 will be described. FIG. 13 is an example of a variable display effect of the super reach E of the main decorative symbol for special figure 2, (a) shows the “6” symbol reach, and (b) shows the “7” symbol reach.

As shown in FIG. 13A, in the jackpot super reach E when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is “40” to “79” (even symbols) in the special figure 2, the special figure 1 is used in the reach development effect. A special suggestion image SS indicated by the letters "super chance" is displayed, which suggests that it is more advantageous than the distribution of the number of rounds at the jackpot lottery table. Further, as shown in FIG. 13 (b), in the jackpot super reach E when the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is "80" to "99" ("7" symbol) in the special figure 2, the reach development effect is performed. , Special figure 1 It is more advantageous than the distribution of the number of rounds at the jackpot lottery table, and the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 in special figure 2 is "40" to "79" (even symbols). A special suggestion image SS indicated by the letters "super chance" is displayed, which suggests that it is more advantageous than the distribution of the number of rounds. In this way, the content of the distribution of the number of rounds that the player can acquire is reflected in the variable display effect, so even if the game determines the number of rounds that the player will acquire after the variable display is confirmed, the game will change. You can enjoy the game while being aware of the number of rounds that the player can obtain from the display.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6, the second symbol random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol of the second symbol display device 41. The second symbol random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order within the range of "0" to "250", and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250), the counter returns to "0". The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 21) described later), and is acquired when the game ball passes through either the left or right normal symbol start winning device 34. .. The number of random numbers to be won is 149, and the range is "5 to 153".

In particular, when the second symbol random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second symbol random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4. The initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is a loop counter similar to the second symbol random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and is updated once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 21) described later. , It is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the normal processing (see FIG. 15) described later. The second symbol random number counter C4 is periodically updated (once for each timer interrupt (see FIG. 21) described later in this embodiment), and the RAM 503 reaches the timing when the game ball passes through the normal symbol start winning device 34. It is stored in the second symbol hold storage area.

That is, the RAM 503 also has a second symbol hold storage area, which is an area different from the hold ball storage area, and has one execution area for the second symbol and four hold areas for the second symbol (second symbol). A second symbol hold storage area consisting of symbol hold 1st to 4th areas) is provided, and in each of these areas, according to the winning history of the game ball to the normal symbol start winning device 34, Each value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in time series.

Further, the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 is updated once every time the second symbol control process of the normal process in FIG. 15 described later is executed once, and the value thereof is the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol of the counter buffer. The second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5, which was updated and acquired in the buffer and was updated and acquired in the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol buffer when the second symbol random number counter C4 is stored in the second symbol holding ball storage area, is also the second symbol. It is stored in the hold ball storage area. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 6, when the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 is unsuccessful, "x" is drawn based on the value of the second symbol out-of-symbol symbol counter C5 in the second symbol holding ball storage area. The display unit 41b is lit and displayed. It should be noted that the second symbol variation display result may be performed based only on the second symbol random number counter C4 without providing the second symbol off symbol counter C5. That is, if the second symbol random number counter C4 is won, the display unit 41a on which "○" is drawn is lit and displayed, and if the second symbol random number counter C4 is unsuccessful, the display unit 41b on which "x" is drawn is lit and displayed.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 14 to 24. The processing of the CPU 501 is roughly divided into a main processing that is started when the power is turned on, a timer interrupt processing that is started periodically (at a cycle of 2 msec in this embodiment), and a power failure to the NMI terminal (non-maskable terminal). There is an NMI interrupt process that is activated by inputting a signal. For convenience of explanation, here, first, a timer interrupt process, a start winning process executed in the timer interrupt process, a look-ahead lottery process executed in the start winning process, and a look-ahead lottery process. NMI interrupt processing will be described, and then the main processing will be described.

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process, and this process is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, for example, every 2 msec.

In FIG. 21, first, in step S601, reading processing of various winning switches is executed. That is, the state of various switches (excluding the RAM erase switch 323) connected to the main control device 261 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

After that, in step S602, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (“599” in the present embodiment), it is cleared to “0”, and the initial value second symbol random number counter. CINI2 is incremented by 1 and cleared to "0" at the time of 1 increment after the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 6).

Further, in the following step S603, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment, "599" and "9", respectively. Clear to "0" at the time of 1 increment after reaching "250"). Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503 (see FIG. 6).

After that, in step S604, the start winning process associated with winning the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is executed. This start winning process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 22 described later.

After that, in step S605, the launch control process is executed. Specifically, in the launch control process, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 controls the launch control signal S8 and the ball feed control when the launch permission signal S7 from the launch control device 312 is ON, as shown in FIG. The signal S9 is output to the launch control device 312, and the game ball launch control is performed by the launch device 229. After performing the firing control process in this way, the CPU 501 temporarily ends the timer interrupt process.

The start winning process performed by the main control device 261 will be described with reference to FIG. 22.

In step S701, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game ball has won the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 based on the detection information of the operation port switch. If the prize is won, the process proceeds to step S702, and if not, the present process is terminated.

In step S702, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the number of operation-holding balls N of the first symbol display device 40 is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). If the number of operation-holding balls N is less than the upper limit, the process proceeds to step S703, otherwise the process ends. In step S703, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 increments the number of operation-holding balls N by one. In step S704, the main control device 261 converts the number N of operation hold balls incremented in step S703 into a hold ball storage area designation command, and outputs the command to the sub control device 262 together with the look-ahead variation pattern designation command described later. Set to.

In step S705, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 acquires a random number related to the winning of the first symbol and the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the third symbol. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 updated in step S603 are stored in the reserved ball storage area of the RAM 503 shown in FIG. It is stored in the first area of the vacant areas of the first to fourth reserved areas in the above.

In step S706, the main control device 261 executes a look-ahead lottery process that is performed prior to the variation start process shown in FIG. 17 described above.

The look-ahead lottery process will be described with reference to FIG. 23.

In step S711, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs a look-ahead lottery for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the holding ball storage area. Specifically, whether or not the result of the look-ahead lottery is a big hit is determined based on the relationship between the value of the big hit random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state). The hit value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is as described above.

In step S712, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the result of the look-ahead lottery is a jackpot, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area is set. Decide which one to use.

In step S713, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a fluctuation pattern (big hit effect pattern) at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 in the same order as the fluctuation start processing described above. Then, the fluctuation pattern is determined in advance.

If it is determined in step S711 that the result of the look-ahead lottery is not a big hit, in step S714, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the stop symbol that the result of the look-ahead lottery is stopped and displayed as a symbol.

In step S715, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the fluctuation pattern. Determine in advance.

In step S716, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines in advance the addition of the effect time, that is, the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S713 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S715. .. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) in the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, resulting in an increase in the effect time (the intermediate decoration). A variation pattern is pre-determined, including an increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbol in the symbol sequence to slip and appear to stop.

In step S717, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in advance in step S713, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the deviation fluctuation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

In step S718, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S712 and S713, the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S712 (“first specific hit symbol”, “second specific hit symbol”). If a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to "specific hit symbol" or "non-specific hit symbol") is set and steps S714 and S715 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in advance in step S714 is removed. Set the decorative symbol specification command corresponding to the symbol.

In step S719, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in advance in step S716, and ends this process.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing NMI interrupt processing, and this processing is executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt, the state of the main control device 261 when the power is turned off is stored in the backup area of the RAM 503.

That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. Then, the CPU 501 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24. The NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24 is stored in the ROM 502 of the main control device 261. Power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the main control device 261 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output, and the NMI interrupt processing is executed within this predetermined time.

In the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 24, in step S801, the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area. In this embodiment, the power failure occurrence information is flagged and stored in the backup area.

Next, the main processing performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 will be described.
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 501 in the main control device 261. This main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S101, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting process associated with the power-on. Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Further, in step S102, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 waits for the control devices on the sub side (sub control device 262, payout control device 311, etc.) to be in an operable state, for example, for about 1 second, to perform weight processing. To execute. In the following step S103, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 permits RAM access.

After that, the data backup process is executed for the RAM 503 in the CPU 501. That is, in step S104, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the RAM erase switch 323 provided on the power supply monitoring board 261b is pressed (ON), and if it is off, the process proceeds to step S105, and when it is on, the process proceeds to step S105. If there is, the process proceeds to step S113. In the following step S105, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power failure occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power failure occurrence information flag is set). Further, in step S106, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S107, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 matches the RAM determination value with the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off. Whether or not, that is, the effectiveness of the backup is determined. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 503 are correctly saved.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when it is desired to return to the initial state when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 323. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 323 is turned on, the process proceeds to the initialization process of the RAM 503 (step S113 or the like). Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.), the used RAM area is cleared and the RAM 503 initialization process (step). S113 etc.). That is, in step S113, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 clears the used area of the RAM 503 to "0" and executes the initialization process of the RAM 503.

In the following step S114, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout initialization command. As described above, the payout initialization command is output to the payout control device 311 when the main control device 261 is initialized.

Further, in step S115, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command at the time of turning on the power to the sub control board 262a. Since this command at the time of turning on the power includes a command for determining the model of the pachinko machine, the model can be determined based on the command content on the sub side such as the sub control board 262a or the display control device 45. ..

Further, in step S116, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the initial setting of the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit). In step S117, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt enable and shifts to the normal process (see FIG. 15) described later.

On the other hand, when the RAM erase switch 323 is not pressed, the power is restored on condition that the power failure occurrence information is set and the RAM judgment value (checksum value, etc.) is normal. Execute the process (process at the time of power failure recovery). That is, in step S108, the power outage occurrence information is cleared. In step S109, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a payout return command to the payout control device 311 and instructs the payout control device 311 to start payout control. Although the details will be described later, when the payout control device 311 receives the payout return command from the main control device 261, the payout control device 311 returns and starts the payout control.

In step S110, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a command for causing the control device on the sub side to be duplicated in the gaming state when the power is turned off, and in step S111, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is CTC (Counter). / Timer Circuit) Initial setting is executed. Further, in step S112, interrupt permission is set, and then the process proceeds to normal processing (see FIG. 15) described later. For example, even if the power is cut off in the middle of the normal processing, the power is turned off after the last step of the normal processing (the step of "RAM access prohibited" shown in FIG. 15) is executed. Will be executed from step S201, which is the first step of normal processing.

Next, the flow of normal processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. In this normal process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, the processes of steps S201 to S207 are executed as periodic processes having a cycle of 4 msec, and the counter update processes of steps S210 and S211 are executed in the remaining time.

In FIG. 15, first, in step S201, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 performs an external output process of transmitting output data such as a command updated in the previous process to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of the prize detection information is determined, and if there is the prize detection information, the prize ball payout command corresponding to the number of acquired game balls is transmitted to the payout control device 311. Further, since the decorative symbol (third symbol) is also variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42 in conjunction with the first symbol variation display (variation display of the first segment display unit 40a) of the first symbol display device 40. However, when displaying the variation of the first symbol of the first symbol display device 40, a variation pattern designation command, a decorative symbol designation command, a total stop command (confirmation command), and the like are transmitted to the sub control device 262 in the external output processing.

In this pachinko machine 10, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol, the external output of normal processing is performed in the order of fluctuation pattern specification command → effect command (command for specifying change of fluctuation time, etc.) → decorative symbol specification command. A predetermined number of commands (for example, three) are sent each time a process is performed (that is, three commands are sent every 4 msec), and a total stop command is sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses. In addition, after the fluctuation of the first symbol starts, a predetermined number (for example, three) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → the effect command → the decorative symbol designation command (that is, three every 4 msec). The command may be sent (by each), and the all stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

The variation pattern designation command is a command for designating a variation pattern of a decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to display and execute the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted variation pattern designation command.

The decorative symbol designation command is for designating whether the variable display effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42 is the first big hit, the second big hit, the third big hit, or the off. It is a command. The decorative symbol designation command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 is a third symbol display device so that the display result of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol becomes the result (first jackpot, second jackpot, third jackpot) according to the transmitted decorative symbol designation command. Display control of 42.

The all stop command is a command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed on the third symbol display device 42. The all stop command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the sub control device 262, and is transmitted from the sub control device 262 to the display control device 45. The display control device 45 controls the third symbol display device 42 so as to stop and display the variation pattern of the decorative symbol based on the transmitted all-stop command.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sends a fluctuation pattern designation command and an effect command (command for designating a change of the fluctuation time, etc.) to the sub control device 262 in the external output process (step S201) of the normal process. May be sent. That is, it is determined which time to set the fluctuation time addition (addition time due to the sliding effect of the decorative symbol described above) based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS3, and such addition time is appropriately set in the sub control device 262. Directing commands are used to direct. Therefore, after the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol, a predetermined number (for example, three) of each external output processing of the normal processing is performed in the order of the fluctuation pattern designation command → the effect command → the decorative symbol designation command (that is, three every 4 msec). A command is sent (by each), and a full stop command may be sent at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the presence / absence of the induction valve passage detection information indicating that the game ball has passed through the induction valve 451 described later, and the game ball passes through any of the combination gates 413. The presence or absence of the combination gate passage detection information indicating whether or not the ball has passed, the presence or absence of the V prize sensor passage detection information indicating that the game ball has passed through the V prize sensor 433, and the presence or absence of the normal prize sensor 434 that the game ball has passed. It is determined whether or not there is the normal winning sensor passage detection information shown and the presence or absence of the maximum opening time elapsed information indicating that the maximum opening time of the V region 435 has passed. Send information as a command.

Next, in step S202, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the update of the variation type counters CS1 to CS3. Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and when the counter values reach the maximum value (198, 240, 162 in the present embodiment) and then incremented by 1, they are "0", respectively. Clear to. Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area shown in FIG. 6 of the RAM 503.

In the following step S203 of FIG. 15, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 reads the prize ball counting signal, the payout abnormality signal, and the lower plate full tank signal received from the payout control device 311. After that, in step S204, the first symbol variation process for displaying the variation of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is executed. By this first symbol variation processing, a jackpot determination and a setting of a variation pattern of the first symbol are performed. However, the details of the first symbol variation processing will be described later.

In step S204A, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the jackpot is a jackpot in the jackpot determination of the first symbol variation process, the CPU 501 executes a jackpot game state lottery process for shifting the game state to the jackpot game state. To do. The details of the jackpot game state lottery process will be described later, but the jackpot game state lottery process also includes a process for determining whether a time saving state or a probability change state is attached in the next game state after the end of the jackpot game state. .. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 proceeds to step S204B when the condition for shifting to the jackpot gaming state is satisfied and it is determined whether the time saving state or the probability change state is attached.

In step S204B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the jackpot lottery probability in the next gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state when it is determined in step S204A whether the time saving state or the probability variation state is attached. Execute the next game state setting process for. The details of the next game state setting process will also be described later.

After that, in step S205, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens or closes the large winning opening 32a of the variable winning device 32 when the condition for shifting to the big hit state is satisfied in step S204A. To execute. That is, the large winning opening 32a is opened in each round of the jackpot state, and in each round, whether the maximum opening time of the large winning opening 32a has elapsed or whether the specified number of game balls have won in the large winning opening 32a is determined. judge. Then, when any of these conditions is satisfied, the opening of the large winning opening 32a in that round is stopped and closed, and if there is a remaining round, the opening of the large winning opening 32a is repeatedly executed for the remaining number of rounds.

Further, in step S206, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 41. Briefly, on condition that the game ball has passed through the normal symbol start winning device 34, the second symbol random number counter C4 is acquired each time, and the display units 41a and 41b of the second symbol display device 41 are displayed. The second symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Then, when the lottery of the second symbol is carried out based on the value of the second symbol random number counter C4 and the second symbol is in the winning state, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is subjected to the special drawing 2 on the lower side as shown in step S207. The start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is opened for a predetermined time. Although the explanation is omitted, the second symbol random number counter C4 is also updated by the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 21, like the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot symbol counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter C3. ing.

Further, in step S208, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the power-off occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 503 (whether or not the power-off occurrence information flag is set). If the power-off occurrence information is not set, the process proceeds to step S209, and if the power-off occurrence information is set, the process proceeds to step S212.

After that, in step S209, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next normal process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the previous normal process. Then, within the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process, the initial value random number counter CINI1, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are repeatedly updated (steps S210 and S211). ). That is, in step S210, the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 are updated. Specifically, the initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value is incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value ("599" in the present embodiment). Then, the updated value of the initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503. Similarly to this, the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is incremented by 1, and is cleared to "0" when the counter value reaches the maximum value ("250" in this embodiment) and then incremented by 1. To do. Then, the updated value of the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Further, in step S211, the variation type counters CS1 to CS3 are updated (similar to step S202). Specifically, the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are incremented by 1, and the counter values are incremented by 1 after reaching the maximum value (“198”, “240”, “162” in the present embodiment). Clear each to "0". Then, the updated values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 to CS3 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 503.

Here, since the execution time of each process of steps S201 to S207 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the initial value random number counter CINI1 and the initial value second symbol random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the initial value random number counter CINI1 (that is, the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1) and the initial value Value The second symbol random number counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the second symbol random number counter C4) can be updated at random.

Further, when the power cutoff occurrence information is set in step S208 and the process proceeds to step S212, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets interrupt disable. Subsequently, in step S213, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 transmits a power cutoff notification command indicating that the power supply has been quickly cut off to another control device. Subsequently, in step S214, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the output of the control signal. Subsequently, in step S215, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 calculates the RAM determination value and stores it in the backup area. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 503. Subsequently, in step S216, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 prohibits RAM access. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Next, the first symbol variation process in step S204 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 16, in step S401, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot is currently being hit. The jackpot includes a special game displayed on the third symbol display device 42 at the time of the jackpot and a predetermined time after the end of the special game. In the following step S402, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the variation display of the first symbol by the first symbol display device 40 is in progress. If the jackpot is not being performed and the fluctuation display of the first symbol is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S403, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has the number of operation-holding balls N of the first symbol display device 40 larger than "0". Determine if not. At this time, if the jackpot is in progress or the number of balls on hold for operation N is "0", this process is terminated as it is.

Further, if neither of the jackpots nor the fluctuation display of the first symbol is displayed and the number of pending balls N> 0, the process proceeds to step S404. In step S404, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 subtracts "1" from the number of operation-holding balls N. In step S405, a process of shifting the data stored in the reserved ball storage area is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the hold 1st to 4th areas of the hold ball storage area to the execution area side, and is a process of shifting the hold ball storage area to the execution area side in order. The data in each area is shifted in the order of the hold 1st area, the hold 3rd area → the hold 2nd Uria, the hold 4th area → the hold 3rd area, and so on.

After that, in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 executes the fluctuation start process. Here, the fluctuation start process will be described in detail using the flowchart of FIG. 17. In step S501, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area. Whether it is a big hit or not is determined based on it. Specifically, whether or not it is a jackpot is determined based on the relationship between the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the mode at that time (whether it is a probabilistic state or a normal state), and as described above, at the time of normal low probability. Of the numerical values "0" to "599" of the jackpot random number counter C1, "150,450" is the hit value (2 pieces), and at high probability, "50,150,350,450" is the hit value (4 pieces). is there.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that it is a jackpot, in step S502A, the jackpot flag is turned on and the process proceeds to step S502B. In step S502B, the jackpot symbol corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, that is, the first symbol to be displayed on the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 to Find which of the third symbols to use. That is, the jackpot corresponding to the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 is based on the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table or the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (see FIG. 7) showing the correspondence between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the symbol. Obtain a symbol ("first jackpot symbol", "second jackpot symbol", or "third jackpot symbol").

Next, in step S503, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a fluctuation pattern (big hit effect pattern) at the time of a big hit. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the value of the variation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 503 without using the stop pattern selection counter C3. Check in order and determine the fluctuation pattern.

That is, based on the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is displayed by the "stop pattern 3" of the normal jackpot (non-specific hit), or the third symbol display device 42. It is determined whether to display the decorative pattern with the "stop pattern 4" of the probability variation jackpot (specific hit). The type of the "stop pattern 3" or the "stop pattern 4" determined in this way is further determined based on the value of the first variable type counter CS1. That is, a rough variation pattern group of the decorative symbol such as the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) such as normal reach, super reach, premium reach, etc. is determined. Subsequently, one variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the variation pattern group of the roughly decorative symbols determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (intermediate decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of a jackpot, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the value of the second variation type counter CS2 The relationship with the stop symbol time is predetermined by a table for jackpots and the like.

On the other hand, when it is determined in step S501 that it is not a big hit, in step S504, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 uses a fourth symbol to indicate an out-of-line symbol, that is, the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40. Set to the stop symbol to display the stop.

Next, in step S505, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines a variation pattern (disengagement effect pattern) at the time of disconnection, and sets the deviation variation pattern in the variation pattern designation command. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 confirms the values of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 stored in the execution area of the hold ball storage area of the RAM 503 in that order, and determines the fluctuation pattern. decide.

That is, based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, after the reach of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 occurs, the final stop decorative symbol is shifted by one before and after the reach decorative symbol and stops. "Stop pattern 1", which is "Stop pattern 2" which is "Reach other than front and rear disengagement" where the final stop decorative symbol stops at a position other than the front and back of the reach decorative symbol, and "Complete disengagement" where reach does not occur. It is determined which stop pattern to use, which is "stop pattern 0". For example, when the determined stop pattern is, for example, "stop pattern 1" which is the front-rear out-of-reach reach, normal reach and super reach from the front-back out-of-reach change pattern group based on the value of the first variation type counter CS1. For example, a variation pattern in which the reach type of the decorative symbol (third symbol) is specified is determined, and a rough variation pattern group of the decorative symbol is determined. Here, it is assumed that the normal reach is decided. Subsequently, one further variation pattern is determined based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2 from the normal reach variation pattern group of the roughly decorative pattern determined in this way. For example, based on the value of the second variation type counter CS2, the elapsed time until the final stop decorative symbol (intermediate decorative symbol in the present embodiment) stops after the reach occurs is set to a predetermined time, and the finer decorative symbol is set. Determine the variation mode. In the case of deviation, the following relationships, that is, the relationship between the numerical value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 and the stop pattern, the relationship between the numerical value of the first variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern, and the numerical value of the second variation type counter CS2. The relationship between the stop symbol time and the stop symbol time is defined in advance by a table or the like for disengagement.

In the present embodiment, as one of the above-mentioned disengagement tables, for example, at a low probability, in the state of the fluctuation time shortening function of the first symbol display device 40, at the start of fluctuation of the first symbol. Some are adopted when the number of pending operations of the first symbol is "0", and when the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is "0 to 201", it corresponds to no reach (completely off), and " "202-208" corresponds to the front-rear reach, and "209-238" corresponds to the reach other than the front-rear reach.

Subsequently, in step S506, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the addition of the effect time, that is, the determination of the addition of the effect time of the jackpot variation pattern determined in step S503 or the deviation variation pattern determined in step S505. Do. More specifically, based on the value of the variable type counter CS3, the decorative symbol (third symbol) in the intermediate decorative symbol row on the third symbol display device 42 stops slipping, resulting in an increase in the effect time (the intermediate decoration). A variation pattern is determined, including the increase in the time it takes for the decorative symbol in the symbol sequence to slip and appear to stop.

Further, in step S507, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 issues a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the jackpot fluctuation pattern determined in step S503, or a fluctuation pattern designation command corresponding to the deviation fluctuation pattern determined in step S505. Set.

Subsequently, in step S508, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has passed through steps S502 and S503, the jackpot symbol of the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S502 (“first specific hit symbol”, When a decorative symbol designation command corresponding to "second specific hit symbol" or "non-specific hit symbol") is set and steps S504 and S505 have been passed, the first symbol display device 40 determined in step S504 Set the decorative symbol specification command corresponding to the out-of-order symbol.

Subsequently, in step S509, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets an effect time addition designation command corresponding to the effect time addition determined in step S506.

Returning to the description of FIG. 16, if step S402 is YES, that is, if the fluctuation display of the first symbol is in progress, the process proceeds to step S407, and the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the fluctuation time of the first symbol has elapsed. To determine. The fluctuation time of the first symbol is determined based on the fluctuation pattern and the effect time addition determined as described above using FIG. 17, that is, the first symbol is determined according to the fluctuation pattern of the first symbol. The fluctuation time of is determined, and when the fluctuation time elapses, step S407 is positively determined. If the fluctuation time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S408, and if the fluctuation time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S409.

Then, in step S408, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 updates the variation display of the first symbol on the first symbol display device 40. That is, the variable display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40 is continued, and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in step S409, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 stops the variation display of the first symbol and sets the stop symbol of the first symbol to the display symbol. That is, when the first jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 17, after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display unit 40a is represented by the first symbol. Stop display. When the second jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 17, after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the second symbol. To do. When the third jackpot symbol is determined in step S502 of FIG. 17, after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the third symbol. To do. When the symbol is determined to be out of alignment in step S504 of FIG. 17, after the fluctuation display of the first segment display unit 40a of the first symbol display device 40, the first segment display unit 40a is stopped and displayed by the fourth symbol ( It means off).

Subsequently, in step S410, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets a total stop command for instructing the stop of the variation pattern of the decorative symbol (third symbol) that is variablely displayed by the third symbol display device 42. The process proceeds to step S411.

In step S411, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot flag has been turned on in step S502A described above. If the jackpot flag is on, the process proceeds to step S412, and if the jackpot flag is off, this process ends. In step S412, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the jackpot game state lottery flag, sets the jackpot game state lottery command, and proceeds to step S413.

The jackpot game state lottery command includes the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2 indicating the type of jackpot in addition to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 indicating the jackpot winning. By including the value of the jackpot symbol counter C2, the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 determined for each type of jackpot is reflected in the jackpot game state lottery display control by the display control device 45. The jackpot game state lottery command may include the values of other counters. When the jackpot game state lottery display control by the display control device 45 is different depending on the type of the fluctuation pattern, the values of the fluctuation type counters CS1 and CS2 may be included.

In step S413, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the jackpot flag and ends this process.

Next, the jackpot game state lottery process in step S204A will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S511, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the jackpot game state lottery flag is on when the fluctuation is determined by the jackpot. When the jackpot game state lottery flag is on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 proceeds to step S513, and if not, ends this process.

In step S513, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 operates all the guide levers 437 to the open position to open all the V regions 435, and proceeds to step S515. In step S515, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 operates the induction valve 451 in the open position so that the game ball can pass through the induction valve 451.

In step S517, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the induction valve sensor 453 is turned on. If the induction valve sensor 453 is on, the process proceeds to step S519, and if the induction valve sensor 453 is off, the process proceeds to step S521.

In step S519, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the V region 435.

In step S521, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the induction valve 451 has elapsed. When the maximum opening time of the induction valve 451 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S523, and if not, the present process ends.

In step S523, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the induction valve 451 and proceeds to step S525. In step S525, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the fluxgate sensor 414A for detecting the game ball that has passed through the fluxgate 413A, which will be described later, is turned on. When the fluxgate sensor 414A is on, the CPU 501 of the main controller 261 sets a corresponding jackpot round with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (step S527), and in step S529. move on. For example, when the special figure 1 big hit lottery table shown in FIG. 7A is referred to and the lottery result of special figure 1 is the first big hit, the big hit round is set to 16R. In step S529, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the closing timing of each V region 435 with reference to the closing timing setting table of the V region 435, and proceeds to step S537.

When the combination gate sensor 414A is not on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the combination gate sensor 414B for detecting a game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B, which will be described later, is on (step S531). ). When the fluxgate sensor 414B is on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the corresponding number of jackpot rounds with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 jackpot lottery table (step S533), and steps S535. Proceed to. For example, when the special figure 1 big hit lottery table shown in FIG. 7A is referred to and the lottery result of the special figure 1 is the first big hit, the big hit round is set to 8R. In step S535, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the closing timing of each V region 435 with reference to the closing timing setting table of the V region 435, and proceeds to step S537.

When the combination gate sensor B is not on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 detects the game ball that has passed through the combination gate sensor 414C or the combination gate 413D, which will be described later. It is determined whether or not the Fluxgate Compass 414D is turned on (step S536A). When the combination gate sensor 414C or the combination gate sensor 414D is on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the corresponding number of jackpot rounds by referring to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 jackpot lottery table ( Step S536B) and step S536C. For example, when the special figure 1 big hit lottery table shown in FIG. 7A is referred to and the lottery result of the special figure 1 is the first big hit, the big hit round is set to 8R. In step S536C, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the closing timing of each V region 435 with reference to the closing timing setting table of the V region 435, and proceeds to step S537.

In step S537, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts the closing operation of the induction lever 437 that closes the V region 435 at the set closing timing of each V region 435, and proceeds to step S539.

In step S539, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. When the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the probability change flag (step S541), and proceeds to step S547. If the game ball has not passed through the V winning sensor 433, the process proceeds to step S543.

In step S543, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the V region 435 has elapsed. The measurement of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is started from the timing when it is detected that the game ball has passed the induction valve 451 of the induction path 455 described later. When the maximum opening time has elapsed from the start of measurement, the normal flag is turned on (step S545), and the process proceeds to step S547. If the maximum opening time has not passed, this process ends.

In step S547, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 drives all the guide levers 437A to 437E to be in the closed position, and proceeds to step S549.

In step S549, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 returns the measurement time of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 to 0, and proceeds to step S551. In step S551, the jackpot game state lottery flag is set to off, and the process proceeds to step SS553. In step S553, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the round start flag, sets an opening command for starting the jackpot round game state, and ends this process.

Next, the next game state setting process in step S204B will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S561, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the probability change flag is turned on in step S541 described above. If the probability change flag is on, the process proceeds to step S563. If not, the process proceeds to step S565.

In step S563, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery table shown in FIG. 7 to the value at the time of high probability, and proceeds to step S565. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the value at the time of high probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time of jackpot determination.

In step S565, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the normal flag is turned on in step S545 described above. If the normal flag is on, the process proceeds to step S567, and if not, the process ends.

In step S567, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 jackpot lottery tables to the value at the time of low probability, and ends this process. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 refers to the value at the time of low probability as the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 at the time of jackpot determination.

In this way, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 also allows the game ball flowing down the game area 30a to pass through any of the fluxgate gate sensors 414A to 414D, so that the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433. Even when the game ball does not pass through the V winning sensor 433, the game state is shifted to the jackpot round game state which is advantageous to the player. Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the V winning sensor 433, so that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 changes from the value when the probability is low to the value when the probability is high. It shifts to the high probability state that is changed to. Further, in the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a has passed the maximum opening time of the V area 435 without passing through the V winning sensor 433, the current game state is a low probability state. In that case, the low-probability state is maintained, and if the current gaming state is the high-probability state, the high-probability state is changed to the low-probability state.

In the jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 described above, steps S525, S531, S536A (determination of passage of the combination gate sensor 414) and steps S527, S533, S536B (corresponding number of rounds). The functions of step S553 (turning on the round start flag) are an example of the advantageous gaming state transition means of the present invention. Further, step S539 (determination of passage of the V winning sensor) and step S541 (probability change flag on) in the jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and step S561 (probability change flag) in the next game state setting process. The function of step S563 (set of the jackpot lottery table at the time of high probability) is an example of the specific gaming state transition means of the present invention.

Next, the opening / closing process of the large winning opening in step S205 described above will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing a large winning opening opening / closing process.

In step S581, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the round start flag is turned on in step S553 described above. If the round start flag is on, the process proceeds to step S583, otherwise the process ends. In step S583, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the start timing of the nth round (or the first round if it is the first). If it is the start timing of the nth round, the process proceeds to step S585, otherwise the process ends.

In step S585, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S587. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the solenoid to open the door of the large winning opening 32a in the variable winning device 32. In step S587, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the end timing of the nth round. The end timing of each round, that is, the opening time of the large winning opening 32a is predetermined.

If it is the end timing of the nth round in step S587, the process proceeds to step S589, otherwise the process ends. In step S589, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the large winning opening 32a and proceeds to step S591. Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the solenoid in order to close the door of the large winning opening 32a in the variable winning device 32. The closing time of the large winning opening 32a between each round, that is, the interval time between rounds is predetermined.

In step S591, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the final round. If it is the final round, the process proceeds to step S593, otherwise the process returns to step S583. In step S593, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns off the round start flag and ends this process.

Next, the payout control executed by the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311 will be described. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the main process of the payout control device 311, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on.

First, in step S901, the initial setting process accompanying the power-on is executed. Specifically, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the stack address and the interrupt mode. Further, in step S902, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 permits RAM access, and in step S903, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets an external interrupt vector.

After that, in step S904, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is set in the backup area of the RAM 513. Further, in step S905, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 calculates the RAM determination value, and in the following step S906, whether or not the RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power is turned off, that is, the backup is effective. Determine the sex. The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 513. It is also possible to judge the effectiveness of the backup based on whether or not the keywords written in the predetermined area of the RAM 513 are correctly saved.

Subsequently, in step S907, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initial setting of the RAM 513 at the time of power recovery. Specifically, when the main control device 261 is initialized, a payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 is the initial payout from the main control device 261. Upon receiving the conversion command, the RAM 513 is initially set at the time of power recovery in step S907. That is, the RAM area is initialized, and the control of the payout of the game ball is started.

Therefore, when the RAM erasing switch 323 is pressed (ON) when the power is turned on, the main control device 261 is initialized, and the payout initialization command is transmitted from the main control device 261 to the payout control device 311. Therefore, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs the initialization process of the RAM 513 based on the payout initialization command from the main control device 261.

Subsequently, in step S908, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 performs initial setting of peripheral devices of the CPU 511. Specifically, the CPU peripheral device is a timer control device called a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit), and the CTC is set to a predetermined value to generate a timer interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms).

Subsequently, in step S909, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the interrupt permission and shifts to the payout control process described later.

On the other hand, when the power failure occurrence information is not set in step S904, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) in step S906, the payout control device 311 is similarly used. The CPU 511 clears the entire area of the RAM 513 to "0" (step S910), and performs an initialization process (step S911).

Next, the flow of the payout control process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In FIG. 26, in step S1001, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 acquires and stores a command from the main control device 261. Here, as the command to be stored, 15 types of prize ball commands (15 types of prize ball commands for instructing the payout of 1 to 15 pieces) and the start of payout control to the payout control device 311 are instructed. There are 17 types of commands, including a payout return command for the purpose and a payout initialization command for instructing the payout initialization to the payout control device 311.

In step S1002, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not the payout permission has been received. That is, it is determined whether or not the payout return command or the prize ball command has been received. Further, in step S1003, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 checks the state return switch (not shown) and executes the state return operation when it is determined that the state return operation has started.

After that, in step S1004, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the lower plate full tank state or the lower plate full tank release state according to the change in the state of the lower plate 15. That is, when the lower plate 15 is full, the lower plate 15 is determined by the detection signal of the lower plate full switch, and when the lower plate is full, the lower plate full state is set and the lower plate is not full. , Execute the setting of the lower plate full tank release state.

Further, in step S1005, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes the setting of the tank ball-less state or the tank ball-less release state according to the change in the state of the tank ball. That is, the state without a tank ball is determined by the detection signal of the switch without a tank ball, the setting of the state without a tank ball is executed when there is no tank ball, and when the state without a tank ball disappears, the state without a tank ball is released. Perform the settings.

After that, in step S1006, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not there is a state of notifying, and if there is a state of notifying, the 7-segment LED provided in the payout control device 311 notifies.

In steps S1007 to S1009, the prize ball payout process is executed. In this case, if the prize balls cannot be paid out and the total number of prize balls stored in step S1001 is not "0" (both steps S1007 and S1008 are NO), the process proceeds to step S1009 and the prize ball control process ( FIG. 27), which will be described later, is started. If the prize balls cannot be paid out or the total number of prize balls is 0 (YES in any of steps S1007 and S1008), the process proceeds to the ball rental process.

After that, in steps S101 to S1012, the ball rental payout process is executed. In this case, if the ball lending cannot be paid out and the ball lending request from the card unit is received (NO in step S1010 and YES in S1011), the process proceeds to step S1012 and the ball lending control process (described later). FIG. 28) is started. Further, if the ball lending is not payable or the ball lending request is not received (YES in step S1010 or NO in S1011), the subsequent vibe motor control (step S1013) is executed.

In step S1013, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 executes control (vibe motor control) of the vibrator 360 (see FIG. 2). After that, in step S1014, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 determines whether or not a power failure has occurred. If a power failure occurs, the process proceeds to step S1015, and if not, the process returns to step S1001. In step S1015, the CPU 511 of the payout control device 311 sets the power outage occurrence information, and in step S1016, the RAM determination value is created. After that, it goes into an infinite loop in case the power is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed.

Here, in the prize ball control process shown in FIG. 27, in step S1101, the payout motor 358a is driven to pay out the prize balls. In the following step S1102, it is determined whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1103, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 26.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1104, and it is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch whether or not the game ball is normally counted. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1105, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 26.

Further, if the count of the game balls is normal, the process proceeds to step S1106, and it is determined whether or not the count number of the game balls by the payout count switch reaches the total number of prize balls and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1107, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 26.

Further, in the ball lending control process shown in FIG. 28, in step S1201, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the payout of the ball lending. In the following step S1202, whether or not the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal is determined based on the detection result of the payout rotation sensor. If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1203, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 26.

If the rotation of the payout motor 358a is normal, the process proceeds to step S1204, and whether or not the game ball is normally counted is determined from the detection result of the payout count switch. If the count of the game balls is not normal, the process proceeds to step S1205, the payout motor 358a is driven to execute the retry process, the payout motor 358a is stopped, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 26.

Further, if the game ball count is normal, the process proceeds to step S1206, and it is determined whether or not the number of game balls counted by the payout count switch reaches a predetermined number of rented balls (25 balls) and the payout is completed. If the payout is completed, the payout motor 358a is stopped in step S1207, and then the process returns to the payout control process of FIG. 26.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 311, and the state of the payout control device 311 when the power is turned off due to a power failure or the like is stored in the backup area of the RAM 513 due to the NMI interrupt. Similarly, power is supplied from the power supply unit 541 so that the processing of the payout control device 311 can be executed for a predetermined time after the power failure signal S1 is output. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal S1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 542 to the NMI terminal of the CPU 511 in the payout control device 311, and the CPU 511 interrupts the control during execution. The NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 24 is started. The contents are as described with reference to FIG. 24.

Next, the main process and the normal process of the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30. FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing an example of the main process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262, and this main process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a normal process executed by the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262.

First, in step S1301, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes the initial setting process accompanying the power-on. Specifically, port setting (port I / O switching and initial value output), timer setting (1 millisecond interval timer, liquid crystal command strobe output timer), and interrupt setting (subcommand strobe interrupt) are performed. ..

Further, in step S1302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power off processing is incomplete. Specifically, whether or not the various lamps (annular illumination unit 102, central illumination unit 103, etc.) of the front frame set 14 of the pachinko machine 10 are all turned off and the speaker is in a mute state. Determine. Then, if the power off processing is not completed, the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1303.

Subsequently, in step S1303, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed, and if it is destroyed, the process proceeds to step S1304, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1307. .. In step S1304, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a RAM area read / write check of the sub control device 262. Then, in step S1305, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal. If the RAM of the sub control device 262 is normal, the process proceeds to step S1306, and if it is abnormal, the process proceeds to step S1312. In step S1306, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 writes the data for the RAM destruction check for each area of the RAM 553, and sets the RAM destruction check data for determining that the data is destroyed if there is a read abnormality.

Then, in step S1307, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the power is turned on after the power is turned off. If the power is turned on after the power is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1308, otherwise the process proceeds to step S1309.

In step S1308, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 clears the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area. Specifically, the unprocessed RAM area is an area for storing information that causes a problem in the system when the data is cleared, and is an area of information that is desired to be retained except when the RAM area is destroyed. For example, a subcommand reception buffer and power-on information can be mentioned. When the main control device 261 turns off the power and the sub control device 262 resets (when a power cut notification command is received from the main control device 261), the RAM area other than the unprocessed RAM area is cleared.

In step S1309, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets interrupt enable. In step S1310, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the initial value of the RAM of the sub control device 262. In step S1311, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the effect initialization flag to “1” and shifts to the normal process shown in FIG.

In step S1312, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 notifies the RAM abnormality and enters an infinite loop. For example, notification such as turning on a predetermined lamp unconditionally can be mentioned.

As shown in FIG. 30, in step S1401, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the normal process. If 1 ms or more has passed, the process proceeds to step S1402, and if not, the process proceeds to step S1410.

In step S1402, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp output process. Specifically, the lamp output is performed according to the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol (third symbol) on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S1403, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 gives a power-on notification. Specifically, a power-on command is used to notify for 30 seconds.

In step S1404, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a customer waiting effect. Specifically, the title / still image is switched. That is, a so-called demo screen is displayed.

In step S1405, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the hold quantity display update process of the first symbol change. Specifically, this hold quantity display update process is a process for also performing the display corresponding to the hold lamp 40c of the first symbol display device 40 on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S1406, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs frame button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, this frame button input monitoring / effect processing is a pachinko machine provided with a frame button that can be pressed by the player (for example, the upper selection button 71, the lower selection button 72, the effect button 80, etc. shown in FIG. 1). This is for producing a machine-specific effect by pressing the frame button on the machine. Therefore, this process is not necessary for pachinko machines that do not have such a frame button.

In step S1407, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the lamp editing process. Specifically, the process of editing the lamp lighting pattern corresponding to (synchronized with) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 is performed.

In step S1408, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs sound editing / output processing. Specifically, the process of sounding (synchronizing) the sound corresponding to (synchronizing) the variation pattern production of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42 (outputting voice, music, sound effect, etc.) is performed.

In step S1409, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the effect execution management process. Specifically, time management or the like for synchronizing the lamp, the sound, and the liquid crystal effect (the variation pattern effect of the decorative symbol on the third symbol display device 42) is performed.

In step S1410, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a process of updating the value of a random number for determining the variation pattern of the decorative symbol to be performed by the third symbol display device 42 and the effect of the voice lamp. Specifically, this random number takes a value of, for example, "0" to "32767", and returns to "0" when the upper limit value "37268" is reached.

In step S1411, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives a command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 performs a process corresponding to each command.

Specifically, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a display command obtained by converting the fluctuation pattern designation command into a command to the display control device 45. The fluctuation pattern specification command may be output as it is. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the decorative symbol designation command from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits a stop display command obtained by converting the decorative symbol designation command into a command to the display control device 45. Further, when a notice command is generated in addition to the stop display command in the command conversion of the decorative symbol designation command, the notice command is also transmitted to the display control device 45. As this notice command, for example, the presence or absence of the appearance of a school of fish as a notice can be mentioned. Further, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the total stop command (confirmation command) from the main control device 261, the CPU 551 transmits the total stop command to the display control device 45 as it is.

In step S1412, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs a command output process for outputting a command to the display control device 45 or the like. The CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 transmits, for example, various commands such as the above-mentioned display command and stop display command to the display control device 45.

Further, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 receives an induction valve passage detection command indicating that the game ball has passed the induction valve described later, which is output in step S201, and any combination gate among the combination gates. The command to detect the passage of the winning combination gate, which indicates whether the ball has passed, the command to detect the passage of the V winning sensor indicating that the game ball has passed the V winning sensor, and the passing of the normal winning sensor indicating that the game ball has passed the normal winning sensor. When a detection command or a maximum opening time elapsed command indicating that the maximum opening time of the V region has elapsed is received, these commands are output to the display control device 45.

In step S1413, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the RAM of the sub control device 262 is destroyed. If the RAM is not destroyed, the process returns to step S1401, and if the RAM is destroyed, an infinite loop is entered.

Here, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing of step S1406 shown in FIG. 30 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 31. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the frame button input monitoring / effect processing by the sub control device 262.

As shown in FIG. 31, the sub control device 262 performs the frame button input monitoring process. Specifically, first, in step S1501, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs selection button input monitoring / effect processing. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the selection buttons 71 to 74 to instruct a predetermined selection on the display screen 42a, the player responds to the selection operation of the selection buttons 71 to 74 by the player. Indicates that a given selection is being made.

In step S1502, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the effect button input monitoring / effect process, and ends this process. Specifically, when the player is required to operate the effect button 80 to instruct the execution of a predetermined effect on the display screen 42a, the predetermined effect is responded to by the player pressing the effect button 80. It is displayed that the execution is instructed.

Next, the effect execution management process of step S1409 shown in FIG. 30 by the sub control device 262 will be described with reference to FIG. 32.

In step S1901, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing. The processing at the time of receiving the look-ahead fluctuation pattern specification command will be described below. FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a read-ahead variation pattern designation command reception processing by the sub control device 262.

In step S1911, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the read-ahead variation pattern designation command has been received. If the look-ahead variation pattern specification command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1912, and if not, this process ends.

In step S1912, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the hold ball storage area designation command has been received. If the hold ball storage area designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1913, otherwise the process ends.

In step S1913, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 stores the look-ahead variation pattern designation command received this time in the hold ball storage area designated by the hold ball storage area designation command. The RAM 553 of the sub control device 262 is provided with a hold ball storage area corresponding to the hold ball storage area (execution area and the first to fourth hold areas) provided in the RAM 503 of the main control device 261. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 stores the received command in any of the first to fourth hold areas designated by the look-ahead variation pattern designation command.

In step S1914, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 refers to the hold display pattern selection table and determines the hold display pattern corresponding to the look-ahead variation pattern designation command received this time. In step S1915, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 converts the determined hold display pattern into a display hold display command, and transmits this display hold display command and the above-mentioned hold ball storage area designation command to the display control device 45. Set so that it can be output. This is the end of this process.

<Open / close mode (big hit) display setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 32, in step S1902, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the open / close mode (big hit) display setting process. This open / close mode (big hit) display setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 34.

As shown in FIG. 34, in step S3201A, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the jackpot game state lottery command set in step S412 described above has been received. If the jackpot game state lottery command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2201B. In step S2201B, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display jackpot game state lottery command.

If the step S2201A is negative, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2201. In step S2201, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2202 if it has received the opening command, and proceeds to step S2203 otherwise.

In step S2202, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display opening command.

In step S2203, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 proceeds to step S2204 if it has received the ending command, and ends this process otherwise.

In step S2204, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets the display ending command and ends this process.

<Variable display mode setting process>
Returning to the effect management execution process shown in FIG. 32, in step S1903, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 performs the variation display mode setting process. This variation display mode setting process will be described below with reference to FIG. 35.

As shown in FIG. 35, in step S2301, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 proceeds to step S2302 if it has received the variation pattern designation command, and proceeds to step S2308 if it has not received it.

In step S2302, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 executes a process of shifting the data stored in the holding ball storage area provided in the RAM 553. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth hold areas of the hold ball storage area toward the execution area side. Specifically, the data in each area such as 1st hold area → execution area, 2nd hold area → 1st hold area, 3rd hold area → 2nd hold urea, 4th hold area → 3rd hold area. Is shifted.

In step S2303, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a display variation pattern designation command for displaying the decorative symbol variation corresponding to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 on the third symbol display device 42. Then, the process proceeds to step S2304. The display variation pattern specification command is, for example, jackpot normal reach A, B, jackpot super reach A to E, front and rear out normal reach A, B, front and back out, super reach A to D, out of front and back, normal reach A, B, and out of front and back. This is a display command for executing decorative symbol variation display with variation patterns such as reach A to D and complete deviation A to F.

In step S2304, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 displays a background image on the third symbol display device 42 behind the main decorative symbol SZ and the developed symbol HZ in response to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553. A display background display pattern specification command for display is set, and the process proceeds to step S2305. Specifically, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines the background display pattern by using the variation pattern specification command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 and the background display pattern selection table, and determines the background display pattern from the background display patterns. Converts the specified background display pattern to the display background display pattern specification command.

In step S2305, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 responds to the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553, and displays a balloon image on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display. Set the display balloon display pattern specification command for displaying HD, and end this process. Specifically, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines the balloon display pattern by using the variation pattern designation command shifted to the execution area of the RAM 553 and the balloon display pattern selection table (not shown), and the determined balloon. Converts the display pattern to a display balloon display pattern specification command. The balloon image HD is a character image inserted in the lower right corner of the front screen 42a. For example, it is an image including characters such as "reach!" And "super reach A" that notify the occurrence of normal reach and various super reach when the reach is established by the main decorative symbol SZ. A character image such as a person or an animal may be used instead of the balloon image.

In step S2306, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 determines whether or not the decorative symbol designation command has been received. If the decorative symbol designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S2307, and if not, this process ends. The CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 determines whether or not the end timing of the fluctuation time corresponding to the received fluctuation pattern designation command has been reached, instead of determining whether or not the decoration symbol designation command has been received. You may. In this case, when the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 receives the fluctuation pattern designation command, the fluctuation time is read from the command, the fluctuation time is measured by the timer, and the end timing of the fluctuation time is grasped.

In step S2307, the CPU 551 of the sub control device 262 sets a stop display command (confirmation command) for stopping (confirming) the variation display of the decorative symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and performs this process. finish.

Next, the normal processing of the display control device 45 and the switching processing of the display mode and the like will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing a normal process of the display control device. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing a switching process such as a display mode by the display control device.

As shown in FIG. 36, in step S3001, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a command input process for inputting various commands transmitted from the sub control device 262, and proceeds to step S3002. Examples of these various commands include a display command, a stop display command, a display opening command, a display ending command, a demo start command, and a symbol sequence fluctuation start command.

In step S3002, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a display mode switching process (display of symbol sequence variation, jackpot opening, jackpot ending, etc.), and proceeds to step S3003. Here, the switching process of the display mode and the like will be described with reference to FIG. 37.

As shown in FIG. 37, in step S3101, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not a display command has been received. If the display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3102, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3103. The display command is a command transmitted from the sub-control device 262, and is a command for permitting display on the third symbol display device 42 when the power is turned on to the pachinko machine, or a third symbol after the jackpot round is completed. This is a command for returning the display mode of the display device 42 to the normal mode.

In step S3102, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a normal screen on the third symbol display device 42. As shown in FIG. 5, the normal screen is a screen in which the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ are stopped and displayed in a manner that does not form a jackpot combination on the front side of the normal background image. The normal background image is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3103, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the demo screen display command has been received. If the demo screen display command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3104, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3105. The demo screen display command is a command received from the sub control device 262, and is a command for instructing the player to switch from the normal screen to the demo screen when a predetermined time elapses without firing the game ball. Is.

In step S3104, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the demo screen on the third symbol display device 42. The demo screen is an image that introduces the method of the game and the features of the game, and is stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3105, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display variation pattern designation command has been received. If the display variation pattern designation command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3106, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 starts the fluctuation of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ of the three decorative symbol rows L, M, and R shown in FIG. 5, and finally stops and displays the variable display. The display of the third symbol display device 42 is controlled so as to perform the above. Specifically, the variable display control of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ is a control for executing steps S3003 to S3007, which will be described later.

In step S3106A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the display jackpot game state lottery command set in step S2201B described above has been received. If the display jackpot game status lottery command has been received, the process proceeds to step S3106B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3107.

In step S3106B, the CPU 521 of the display control device performs a jackpot game state lottery display process, which will be described later.

In step S3107, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 proceeds to step S3108 if it has received the display opening command, and proceeds to step S3109 otherwise.

In step S3108, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying the jackpot opening image. The jackpot opening image is an image that is displayed after the decorative symbol variation display is confirmed by the jackpot combination, and is an image that congratulates the jackpot winning. Further, when the display of the jackpot opening is finished, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 continuously starts displaying the jackpot round image. The jackpot round image is an image displayed during the jackpot round, and is, for example, a privilege image that can be seen only during the jackpot round. The jackpot opening image and the jackpot round image are stored in the video RAM 524 of the display control device 45.

In step S3109, if the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has received the display ending command, the process proceeds to step S3110, otherwise the process ends. In step S3110, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display of the third symbol display device 42 so as to start displaying the jackpot ending image. The jackpot ending image is stored in the video RAM of the display control device 45.

Returning to FIG. 36, in step S3003, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the stop symbol and proceeds to step S3004. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines a predetermined stop symbol from the selectable stop symbol group determined by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. If it is a jackpot fluctuation pattern, a predetermined stop symbol is determined from the odd symbol or the even symbol. If it is a deviation variation pattern, a predetermined stop symbol is determined from the front-back deviation symbol, the deviation symbol other than the front-rear, and the complete deviation.

In step S3004, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and proceeds to step S3005.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines the variation display mode of the decorative symbol corresponding to the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. For example, if the command indicates jackpot normal reach A, B, the corresponding variable display mode is determined, and if the command indicates jackpot super reach A, B, the corresponding variable display mode is determined, and the command indicates jackpot super reach C, When D is indicated, the corresponding variable display mode is determined, and when the command indicates jackpot super reach E, the corresponding variable display mode is determined. If the command indicates normal reach A, B or non-front and rear normal reach A, B, the corresponding variation display mode described later is determined, and the command is front-rear out-of-front and back-out super reach A, B or non-front-back out-of-front and outside super reach A, If it is B, the corresponding variation display mode is determined, and if the command is out of front and back, Super Reach C, D, or if it is out of front and back, Super Reach C, D, the corresponding variation display mode is determined, and the command is completely off, A to F. If so, the corresponding variable display mode is determined. Each of the above-mentioned variable display modes is stored in the program ROM of the display control device 45.

In step S3005, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines an auxiliary effect (display mode of a suggestion image such as a message provided to the player and a balloon image HD), and proceeds to step S3006. The suggestion image is an image suggesting that the symbol variation display executed by the third symbol display device 42 may be a jackpot combination.

In step S3006, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 controls the display image of the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the symbol variation display image on the third symbol display device 42, the decorative symbol sequences L, M are in accordance with the variation display mode determined in step S3004. , R, the third symbol display device 42 is displayed and controlled so that the symbol variation display of the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ is finally stopped and displayed according to the stop symbol determined in step S3003. .. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 is such that the background image according to the display mode of the symbol variation display is displayed behind the symbol variation display image according to the display background display pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. 3 The symbol display device 42 is displayed and controlled. The background image includes a landscape image displayed behind the main decorative symbol SZ and the sub-decorative symbol FZ, and a character image of a person, an animal, or the like. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the balloon image HD on the display screen 42a of the third symbol display device 42 at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display according to the display balloon display pattern designation command received from the sub control device 262. The display control of the third symbol marking device 42 is performed so as to be displayed at the lower right. The balloon image HD is displayed once or a plurality of times during the symbol variation display of 1.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control for displaying a jackpot round image on the third symbol display device 42. If it is a jackpot round image, an image showing the current number of rounds is displayed together with a privilege image displayed during the jackpot round. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also performs display image control for displaying the resident image on the third symbol display device 42 if there is a resident image displayed on the third symbol display device 42.

In step S3007, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs hold display control for executing the hold display on the third symbol display device 42.

Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes a process corresponding to the display hold display command received from the sub control device 262. When the display hold display command received from the sub control device 262, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 reads the hold display execution program corresponding to the hold display pattern indicated by the received display hold display command from the program ROM 552 and executes it. .. In the hold display execution program, the execution pattern of the hold display in the first to fourth hold display areas and the execution pattern of the hold display in the hold display area are predetermined.

Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a process of shifting the hold display displayed in the hold display area each time the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is completed. Specifically, when the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is completed, the hold display in the execution display area is deleted, and the first hold display area → the execution display area, the second hold display area → the first hold display area, and the third hold The hold display is shifted in the order of display area → second hold display area, fourth hold display area → third hold display area. When the number of reserved balls is 0, the reserved ball is displayed in the execution display area.

In step S3008, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs other processing such as demo display.

In step S3009, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not 1 ms or more has elapsed from the start of the normal process. If 1 ms or more has passed, the process returns to step S3001, and if not, the process returns to step S3008.

Next, the jackpot game state lottery display process described above in step S3106B of FIG. 37 will be described. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery display process.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the processes of steps S3201 to S3203 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the jackpot game state lottery command (according to the timing at which the induction valve is released). That is, in step S3201, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a right-handed notification image for notifying the player to perform a right-handed hit on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 emits light of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 with the lighting color of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 according to the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413. Let me.

Here, the lighting color of the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state according to the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 will be described. FIG. 39 is a table for lighting the ball entry portion for shifting to the advantageous gaming state, where (a) shows the case of the special figure 1 big hit and (b) shows the case of the special figure 2 big hit.

The lighting color of the ball entry section 411 for the advantageous game state transition in the case of the special figure 1 jackpot and the case of the special figure 2 jackpot is white, green, blue, and red, and the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 is distributed. It shows that it is advantageous for the player, that is, the number of rounds that can be obtained is large. The relationship between the lighting color and the number of rounds can be described in the instruction manual attached to each gaming machine in the hall to inform the player in advance, but the gaming machine is not playing. By displaying it on the demo screen or during the reach production, it is possible to make it easier for players who do not read such a manual to notice it.

See FIG. 39 (a). When the jackpot type of special figure 1 is the third jackpot (the jackpot with odd-numbered symbols excluding "7"), 16R is one among the four combination gates 413, and the combination gate 413A (probability change state occurs). Since the winning combination gate) that is confirmed to be played is 2R, the advantage for the player is normal. Therefore, the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is white by the LED 425 for lighting the crune (see FIG. 42 (a)), which is an LED unit capable of emitting a plurality of colors arranged as a whole inside the ball entry unit 411. Is lit.

When the jackpot type of special figure 1 is the second jackpot (big hit with even-numbered symbols), 16R is one among the four even-numbered gates 413, and the role-series gate 413A is 2R, so that the player can use it. The advantage is normal. Therefore, the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is lit in white. Since the distribution of the number of rounds of the winning combination gate 413C is larger in the second jackpot than in the third jackpot, the ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state may have a different color.

When the jackpot type of special figure 1 is the first jackpot (“7” symbol), 16R is one among the four role-ream gates 413, but the role-ream gate 413A is 16R, and the other role-ream gates. Since 413B to 413D are 8R, the advantage for the player is greater than the second jackpot and the third jackpot. Therefore, the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is lit in green.

See FIG. 39 (b). When the jackpot type in Special Figure 2 is the third jackpot, 16R is one of the four winning gates 413, and the winning gate 413A is lower than 16R (8R). The ball entry portion 411 is lit in white. When the jackpot type in Special Figure 2 is the second jackpot, since there are two 16Rs out of the four combination gates 413, the combination gates 413A are lower than 16R (8R), but the game state shifts to an advantageous game state. The ball entry section 411 is lit in blue, which is more advantageous than the first jackpot in FIG.

When the jackpot type of the special figure 2 is the first jackpot, 16R is 3 out of the 4 winning combination gates 413 and the winning combination gate 413A is 16R. Lights up in the most advantageous red color. In this way, it is advantageous to have different colors according to the advantage of the number of rounds for each role gate 413. By lighting the ball entry unit 411 for transition to the game state, a game to obtain a larger number of rounds. It is possible to raise the expectation of the person.

Return to FIG. 38. In step S3205, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the right-handed game ball has passed through the induction valve 451. Specifically, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the induction valve passage command from the sub control device 262, it determines that the right-handed game ball has passed the induction valve 451. If it is determined that the induction valve 451 has passed, the process proceeds to step S3206, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3208.

In step S3206, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the first tilt display. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the area indicating 16R displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in red. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 lights the opening peripheral edge of the combination gate 413 distributed to 16R in red by the combination gate lighting LED 427 (see FIG. 42A). In step S3207, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 drives the effect accessory (clock accessory) 403 to perform a countdown display (analog display) of the remaining time of the maximum opening time of the V region. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a countdown display (digital display) of the remaining time of the maximum opening time of the V region on the third symbol display device 42. The countdown display may be started when the remaining time has passed 60 seconds in order to make it easier for the player to see the remaining time and be thrilled. Among the countdown displays, the digital display may perform the countdown display from the beginning, and the analog display may start from the time when 60 seconds have passed. In this way, the player can be strongly impressed that the remaining time is reduced by driving the production accessory (clock accessory) 403.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413, and if so, which combination gate 413 has passed. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines which combination gate 413 corresponds to the combination gate passage detection command output from the sub control device 262. If it is determined that the gate has passed the combination gate 413, the process proceeds to step S3209, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball has passed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the number of rounds display lamps 421. Turn on the lamp. In step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the second tilt display. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display an image showing the V region 435 being opened. Further, the V light emitting regions 436A to 436E provided on the front side of the V regions 435A to 435E, which will be described later, are turned on. The third symbol display device 42 displays an image in which the V region 435 is closed in accordance with the operation in which the V region 435 is closed. The V regions 435A to 435E are turned on in green while the V region 435 is open, and turned off after the V region 435 is closed.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device determines whether or not the V winning sensor passage detection command output from the sub control device 262 has been received. In this embodiment in which a plurality of V-winning sensors 433 are provided, the V-winning sensor passage detection command is distinguished so that it can detect which of the V-winning sensors 433 the V-winning sensor 433 has passed. There is. If the passage of the V winning sensor 433 is detected, the process proceeds to step S3212, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3213.

In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image for notifying the V prize (for example, a character image of "V prize!") On the third symbol display device 42, and SUPERV for notifying that it is a probability variation jackpot. Turn on the lamp 422. In step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the normal winning sensor. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the normal winning sensor passage detection command output from the sub control device 262 has been received. If the passage of the normal winning sensor is detected, the process proceeds to step S3214, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3215.

In step S3214, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays (out-displays) an image (for example, a character image of "V prize not won!") Notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the V prize has not been won. At the same time, the V lamp 423 that notifies that it is a normal jackpot is turned on. In step S3215, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V region has elapsed. If the maximum opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3216, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3216, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image (for example, a character image of "timeout!") Notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the maximum opening time has elapsed, and is usually a big hit. The V lamp 423 that notifies the above is turned on.

Next, with respect to the configuration of the game board 30, which is a feature of the present embodiment, particularly the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 and the specific game state transition entry section 431 provided in the game area 30a, FIGS. 40 to 42. Will be described with reference to. See also FIG. 3 as appropriate.

FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the advantageous gaming state transition entry section 411 before the jackpot is confirmed, the specific game state transition entry section 431, and its surroundings as viewed from diagonally above, and FIG. 40A is a perspective view before the jackpot is confirmed. Shown, (b) shows after the jackpot is confirmed. FIG. 41 is a top view of the advantageous gaming state transition transition ball entry section 411, the specific game state transition transition ball entry section 431, and its surroundings. 42 (a) is an AA line cross-sectional view of the advantageous gaming state transition entry section 411 shown in FIG. 3, and FIG. 42 (b) is a BB line cross section of the specific gaming state transition entry section 431 shown in FIG. It is a figure. In addition, FIG. 42A shows the cross section of the right half of the ball entry part 411 for the advantageous game state transition, and FIG. 42B shows the cross section of the guide gate 437A of the ball entry part 431 for the specific game state transition. ..

The game board 30 has a configuration for determining the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state after the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, and a configuration for determining the gaming state after the jackpot round gaming state is completed. Specifically, the game board 30 has an advantageous game state transition entry unit 411 that shifts to a predetermined number of rounds of jackpot game states triggered by the entry of a game ball after it is determined that the game board 30 will be a jackpot, and a game. It is provided with a specific game state transition ball entry unit 431 that shifts the game state after the end of the jackpot round game state to a time saving state or a probability change state when the ball enters. With such a configuration, after it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit, the number of rounds in the jackpot game state can be determined by inserting the game ball into a certain place in the game area 30a, and the game area 30a can be determined. By inserting the game ball into another part of, the game state after the end of the jackpot round game state can be determined.

The positions where the advantageous game state transition transition ball entry portion 411 and the specific game state transition transition ball entry portion 431 are arranged are various positions in the game area 30a. In the game board 30 of the present embodiment, the advantageous gaming state transition entry ball 411 is configured to be at a position where the game ball passes before the specific game state transition transition entry section 431. For example, the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 is arranged in the central portion of the game area 30a, and the specific game state transition entry ball 431 is arranged below the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411. To. With such a configuration, after it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit, whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, and in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the next gaming state is in a time-saving state. Or, whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state is not decided at once by the lottery result of the symbol or the entry into the specific area, but in order by the entry of the game balls into the two places provided in the game area 30a. Can be decided.

Further, in the game board 30 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has entered the advantageous gaming state transition entry section 411 is also configured to enter the specific gaming state transition entry section 431. With such a configuration, after it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit, whether or not to shift to the jackpot gaming state, and in the case of shifting to the jackpot gaming state, after the jackpot gaming state ends, the next gaming state is in a time-saving state. Alternatively, whether or not to shift to the probabilistic state is not decided at once based on the lottery result of the symbol or the entry into a specific area, but one game ball is used to move to two places provided in the game area 30a. It can be decided in order by entering the game ball. If the game ball is separately inserted into the advantageous game state transition entry section 411 and the specific game state transition entry section 431, the game area 30a of the game board 30 is used as a whole for hitting. It is also possible to have different fun of dividing.

The advantageous game state transition transition ball entry section 411 and the specific game state transition transition ball entry section 431 are located, for example, at the center of the game area 30a in front view and below the third symbol display device 42. It is arranged in the type 2 accessory 401 that affects the movement. The ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state has four accessory continuous operation gates 413A to 413D (collectively, the accessory continuous operation) corresponding to the types of the number of rounds in the jackpot game state in the two-type accessory 401. It is provided as a gate 413). Hereinafter, it will be referred to as a combination gate 413 (413A to 413D). With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player the process of determining the number of rounds in the big hit game state by the game ball after it is confirmed that the big hit is obtained by the variable display of the symbol.

The ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state is provided at a position outside the large winning opening 32a and different from the variable winning device 32. In addition, the specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431 has five V-winning sensors 433A to 433E (collectively, V-winning sensors 433) at a plurality of positions in the game area 32a according to the position where the game ball flows down. ) Is provided. The ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state is arranged in the type 2 accessory 401.

The winning combination gate 413 and the V winning sensor 433 have a configuration in which a game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 can pass through the V winning sensor 433. With such a configuration, after the jackpot is confirmed, the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 shifts to the jackpot gaming state depending on whether or not the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433. After the end of the jackpot game state, whether or not the next game state shifts to the time saving state or the probabilistic state is not decided at once by the lottery result of the symbol or the entry into a specific area, but the game of one ball. The ball can be sequentially determined by entering the game ball into two locations provided in the game area 30a.

The V winning sensors 433A to 433E include induction levers 437A to 437E (collectively referred to as induction levers 437) that structurally cover the V regions 435A to 435E (collectively referred to as V region 435). When the guidance lever 437 is opened so that the game ball can be guided, the V winning sensor 433 can detect the game ball guided to the V region 435, and the guidance lever 437 cannot guide the game ball. When the game ball is closed as described above, the game ball is not guided to the V region 435, and the game ball cannot be detected. With such a configuration, the specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431 is configured to change between a state in which the game ball is easy to enter and a state in which the game ball is difficult to enter. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player the process of determining whether or not the game ball will be in a high probability state after the jackpot is confirmed.

Further, the specific game state transition entry ball 431 can be entered by satisfying the condition that the game ball enters the advantageous gaming state transition entry section 411. Further, in the present embodiment, the V region 435 in which the game ball can enter changes V in the specific game state transition entry unit 431 when the condition that the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 413 is satisfied. It is also provided as a winning sensor 433. Specifically, the V region 435 changes into a state in which the ball cannot be delivered and a state in which the ball can be entered. With such a configuration, whether or not to change the V region 435 is not determined by the combination of symbols, so that the player can shift to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player without requiring a complicated program. Ease can be determined.

The game board 30 has a taxiway valve 451 that switches between a state in which the game ball is guided and a state in which the game ball is not guided upstream of the taxiway gate 413, and a taxiway drive that switches the taxiway 451 between a state in which the game ball is guided and a state in which the game ball is not guided. A portion 452 and a taxiway 455 for guiding the game ball to the induction valve 451 are provided. The induction valve 451 is a tapered member or a thin plate-shaped member that is inserted into and removed from the taxiway 455. The induction valve drive unit 455 is, for example, a solenoid. The taxiway 455 is provided with an entrance portion 456 in which a right-handed game ball can enter, and an exit portion 457 in which the game ball is discharged upstream of the service gate 413. The right-handed operation of entering the ball into the entrance portion 456 may be a right-handed operation in which the game ball is launched at the maximum strength, or a right-handed operation in which the game ball is launched slightly looser than the maximum strength. A game ball can be inserted into the entrance portion 456 by performing a certain right-handed operation. Further, the taxiway 455 includes a discharge path 458 that discharges a game ball that has not been guided upstream of the taxiway gate 413 to the outside of the taxiway 455. The taxiway 455 is made of a transparent or translucent permeable resin. In the vicinity of the induction valve 451 is provided with an induction valve sensor 453 that detects a game ball that has passed through the induction valve 451.

When it is determined that the induction valve 451 is a big hit, the induction valve 451 is in an open state in which the game ball is passed, and when the induction valve sensor 453 detects the passage of one game ball, the induction valve 451 is in a closed state in which the game ball is not passed. That is, even if the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, the game board 30 cannot shift to the jackpot round game state unless it passes through the combination gate 413 through the correct flow path ( After the end of the jackpot round game state, the next game state cannot be shifted to the time saving state or the probability change state).

Further, when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the combination gate 413 without passing through the induction valve 451, the jackpot round game state is executed by the jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261. It is controlled so that the state does not shift to. With this configuration, even if the game ball passes through the role gate 413, it will not shift to the big hit round game state unless it is in the correct passing order, so that the big hit round due to illegal operation, action or irregularity It is possible to reduce the transition to the gaming state.

Further, when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 without passing through the induction valve 451, the jackpot game state lottery process and the next game state setting process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 are executed. Controls the state so that the state does not shift to the time saving state or the probabilistic state. With such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433, it does not shift to the time saving state or the probabilistic state unless it is in the correct passing order. Alternatively, it is possible to reduce the transition to the probabilistic state.

Further, even when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 without passing through the winning combination gate 413, the jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 and the next game state The transition process controls the state so that it does not transition to the time saving state or the probabilistic state. According to such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the V winning sensor, it does not shift to the time saving state or the probabilistic state unless it is in the correct passing order. It is possible to reduce the transition to the probabilistic state.

The advantageous game state transition transition ball entry section 411 and the specific game state transition transition ball entry section 431 will be described in a little more detail. The game board 30 is provided with a plurality of combination gates 413A to 413D having different numbers of rounds in the jackpot game state as in the present embodiment as the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous game state. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a distribution mechanism 415 that distributes a game ball flowing down the game area 30a to any of a plurality of combination gates 413A to 413D. With such a configuration, it is possible to show the player how many rounds the game ball determines the number of rounds in the jackpot game state after the jackpot is confirmed.

In this embodiment, the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is provided as a plurality of combination gates 413A to 413D having different numbers of rounds in the jackpot gaming state in the type 2 accessory 401. The distribution mechanism 415 is provided as a round number distribution accessory 415a for distributing the game ball to any of a plurality of combination gates 413A to 413D in the type 2 accessory 401. The number of rounds in the jackpot game state differs depending on which of the plurality of winning combination gates 413 is passed. For example, the combination gate 413A is set to 16R. The combination gates 413B to 413D are set to 2R.

The round number distribution accessory 415a orbits the rolling region at a position near the center of the circular dish-shaped rolling region 417 (so-called crune) on which the game ball can orbit from the outside to the inside. It has four holes for the game ball to fall. These four holes correspond to the fluxgate gates 413A to 413D, and the fluxgate gates 413A to 413D are provided with the fluxgate gate sensors 414A to 414D for detecting the game ball that has fallen into the holes.

The round number distribution accessory 415a may have a variation in the time from when the game ball enters to when it passes through the combination gate 413. With such a configuration, it is possible to change the winning rate in the ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state. For example, the rolling region 417 may be configured so that the time of the game ball rolling in the rolling region 417 varies, or a movable member for playing the game ball may be provided in the rolling region 417. The rolling region 417 is composed of one crune, but may be composed of a multi-stage crune. In the multi-stage crune, the combination gate 413 may be arranged separately, or a warp hole that can shorten the rolling time (some crunes can be omitted) may be provided separately from the combination gate 413. Even with this configuration, the time required for the round number distribution accessory 415a can be varied.

Below the rolling region 417, as shown in FIG. 42 (a), a crune lighting LED 425, which is a plurality of LEDs for lighting the round number distribution accessory 415a as a whole, is arranged. The crune lighting LED 425 lights the round number distribution accessory 415a as a whole in colors (white, green, blue, red) according to the advantage of the number of rounds distributed to the combination gate 413. Further, around the hole of the combination gate 413, an LED 427 for lighting the combination gate that lights the combination gate 413 distributed to an advantageous number of rounds is arranged. The LED 427 for lighting the combination gate lights in a color that emphasizes the combination gate 413 assigned to 16R.

As in the present embodiment, the plurality of advantageous gaming state transition entry ball portions 411 can be combined with other advantageous gaming state transition entry ball portions 411 by entering the specific advantageous gaming state transition entry ball portion 411. It may be easier to enter the ball into the specific gaming state transition entry section 431 than in the case of entering the ball. When entering a specific advantageous gaming state transition entry ball 411, the ball may always enter the specific gaming state transition entry section 431. Any one of the plurality of advantageous gaming state transition entry ball 411s may not enter the specific gaming state transition entry section 431.

The type 2 accessory 401 includes a guidance accessory 471 that guides the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 to the V winning sensor 431 in various modes. The guide accessory 471 is designed so that the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 passes through the V winning sensor 431 at a predetermined passing rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, the guiding accessory 471 makes it easier for the game ball that has passed through the specific combination gate 413 to pass through the V winning sensor 431 than the game ball that has passed through the other combination gate 413. It is designed.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, the guiding accessory 471 is guided to the V winning sensor 431 by passing through the specific combination gate 413A, as compared with the case of passing through the other combination gates 413B to 413D. It is easy to be done. As an example, the type 2 accessory 401 includes an advantageous route 472 that advantageously guides the V winning sensor 431 by passing through a specific combination gate 413A.

Specifically, the guiding accessory 471 includes a first guiding unit 473 and a first guiding unit 473 that guide the game ball that has passed through the other winning combination gates 413B to 413D except for the specific combination gate 413A to the downstream side. The second guide unit 475 that guides the game ball guided by the second guide unit 475 to the downstream side and the game ball guided by the second guide unit 475 are guided to the V winning sensor 431 or without being guided to the V winning sensor 431. It is provided with a V winning distribution unit 481 that distributes whether to discharge to the outside of the second type accessory 401. The first induction unit 473, the second induction unit 475, and the V winning distribution unit 481 form a normal route having a lower probability of being guided to the V winning sensor 431 than the advantageous route 472.

Further, the V winning distribution unit 481 is not guided by the driving unit 482 having a driving mechanism such as a motor shown by a broken line in FIG. 41, the movable unit 483 operated by the driving force of the driving unit 482, and the V winning sensor 431. It is provided with a discharge unit 484 that discharges the game ball to the outside of the second type accessory 401. The V-winning distribution unit 481 guides the game ball to the V-winning sensor 431 when the timing at which the movable portion 483 is moved and the timing at which the game ball guided by the second guide unit 475 arrives match. When these timings do not match, the game ball is discharged to the discharge unit 484.

For example, the discharge portion 484 is provided in a circular opening provided at the downstream end of the second guide portion 475 in a top view and is guided by the second guide surface 476, but the timing with the movable portion 483 does not match. It communicates with the discharge passage shown by the broken line in FIG. 41, which accepts the game ball that has fallen in and discharges it to the outside of the second type accessory 401. A normal winning sensor 434 is provided in the discharge passage. The game ball that has fallen from the second guide surface 476 is detected as a normal winning by the normal winning sensor 434. The movable portion 483 is a bridge-shaped member hung between the downstream end of the second guide portion 475 and the V winning sensor 431, and rotates around the center of the opening of the discharge portion 484 as a rotation axis. The drive unit 482 is a motor that generates a driving force that rotates the movable unit 483. The drive unit 482 rotates the motor so that the movable unit 483 reciprocates between the left end and the right end of the downstream end of the second guide unit 475 as shown in FIGS. 43 (a) to 43 (e) described later. I'm switching. When the timing at which the movable portion 483 is moved matches the timing at which the game ball guided by the second guide portion 475 reaches the downstream end of the second guide portion 475, the game ball reaches the downstream end of the second guide portion 475. If any of the V regions 435 facing the movable portion 483 passes through the upper surface of the movable portion 483 and is in a state where the ball can enter, the game ball enters the V region 435.

The V region 435 is divided into five V regions 435A to 435E along the side of the outer circumference of the discharge portion 484 facing the downstream end of the second induction portion 475. The V winning sensors 433A to 433E are provided in each of the five V regions 435A to 435E. The V regions 435A to 435E are provided with guide levers 437A to 437E configured to be able to protrude and evacuate from the front side (player side) end of the discharge portion 484. When the guide levers 437A to 437E cover the upper part of the corresponding V winning sensors 433A to 433E, even a game ball passing through the upper surface of the movable portion 483 cannot enter the V region.

As shown in FIG. 42B, the induction lever 437 is provided with an induction lever drive mechanism 438 for driving the induction lever 437, respectively. The induction lever drive mechanism 438 includes, for example, a motor that generates a driving force for driving the induction lever 437 and a force conversion unit (fixed to the output shaft of the motor) that converts the rotational force generated by the motor into a linear movement of the induction lever. It is provided with a pinion and a rack on the lower surface of the induction lever in which teeth that mesh with the pinion are formed). The motor and the force conversion unit are separated by a wall that separates the V region 435 and the discharge unit 484. The guide lever 437 is projected forward from an opening provided on the wall surface of the partition wall so that the plate-shaped member covers (closes) the V region, and is retracted rearward so that the plate-shaped member opens the V region. .. In FIG. 42B, the induction levers 437A to 437E are shown so as to overlap each other adjacent to each other, but the induction levers 437 are alternately overlapped.

The first guide unit 473 includes a first guide surface 474 for guiding the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 to the second guide unit 475. The first guide surface 474 is composed of first guide surfaces 474A, 474B, 474C, and 474D that guide the game balls that have passed through the combination gates 413A to 413D in four different directions. Specifically, the first guide surface 474A extends below the service gate 413A. Both the first guide surfaces 474B, 474C and 474D extend below the joint gates 413B, 413C, 413D.

The first guide surfaces 474A to 474D are inclined in the direction in which they are guided. The first guide surface 474A guides the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A to the advantageous route 472. The first guide surface 474B guides the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B to the upstream end slightly to the left of the center of the second guide portion 475. The first guide surface 474C guides the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C to the upstream end on the left side of the second guide portion 475. The first guide surface 474D guides the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D to the upstream end on the right side of the second guide portion 475.

The second guide portion 475 includes a second guide surface 476 that is gently inclined downward toward the front. The most upstream side (back side) of the second guide surface 476 is vertically overlapped with the downstream end of the first guide portion 473 in a top view. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen from the first guidance unit 473 is guided to the upstream end of the second guidance unit 475. A large number of protrusions 475a are formed on the first guide surface 476. Since the game ball flowing down the first guide surface 476 is affected by the protrusion 475a and the flow direction changes, the arrival time to the downstream end is significantly slower than that of the game ball passing through the advantageous route 472.

Further, the game board 30 has a round number display lamp 421 corresponding to the number of rounds acquired based on the passage of the combination gate 413 when the game ball enters the combination gate 413, and the game ball wins a V prize. A SUPER V lamp 422 that notifies that it is a probability variation jackpot when it passes through the sensor 433, and a V lamp that notifies that it is a normal jackpot when the game ball passes through the normal winning sensor 434 or when the maximum opening time has passed. It is equipped with 423. These may be displayed as an image displayed on the third symbol display device 42.

Next, with reference to FIG. 43, the flow of the game ball when the number of rounds in the big hit game state is determined by the game ball after the jackpot is confirmed will be described. 43 (a) to 43 (e) are views showing the relationship between the position of the movable portion 483 and the V region 435 that can enter the ball. In addition, in FIGS. 43 (b) to 43 (d), in order to illustrate the region which is vertically overlapped and hidden on the advantageous route 472 shown in (a), a part of the parts forming the advantageous route 472 is shown by breaking. There is. It should be noted that the game ball can flow down even in the area hidden above and below the advantageous route 472.

After the variable display of the third symbol is stopped by the jackpot combination on the third symbol display device 42 and the jackpot is confirmed, the movable portion 483 is the left end of the lower end portion of the second guide surface 476 shown in FIG. 43 (a) (that is,). , The position facing the V region 435E) and the right end of the lower end portion of the second guide surface 476 shown in FIG. 43 (e) (that is, the position facing the V region 435A) reciprocates. For example, the movable portion 483 moves from the left end to the right end in 4 seconds, stops at the right end for a short time of less than 1 second, moves from the right end to the left end in 4 seconds, and stops at the left end for a short time of less than 1 second. , Move from the left edge to the right edge again. Therefore, the movable portion 483 always seems to swing left and right after the jackpot is confirmed. The operation start timing of the movable portion 483 may be different timing so as not to be the same each time.

After the variable display of the third symbol is stopped by the jackpot combination on the third symbol display device 42 and the jackpot is confirmed, the game ball hit right by the player enters the entrance portion 456 of the taxiway 455 and enters the ball. It flows down in the taxiway 455 toward the type 2 accessory 401. When the game ball that first enters the taxiway 455 passes through the open induction valve 451, the induction valve 451 is closed. Therefore, the second and subsequent game balls that have entered the taxiway 455 are blocked by the taxiway valve 451 in the closed state, guided to the taxiway 458, and discharged to the outside of the taxiway 455.

The game ball that has passed through the induction valve 451 is discharged from the outlet portion 457 of the induction path 455 to the round distribution accessory 415a. The game ball paid out to the round distribution accessory 415a gradually orbits the inside of the rolling region 417 while orbiting the outside of the rolling region 417, and finally has four holes (combined gate 413). Fall into one. The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A is guided to the start end portion 472a of the advantageous route 472 by the first guide surface 474A. The game ball guided to the advantageous route 472 is discharged from the opening 472c provided at the terminal portion 472b of the advantageous route 472 to the center of the movable portion 483 below. When the game ball is ejected from the opening 472c of the advantageous route 472 to the center of the movable portion 483, the V region 435 remains open. Therefore, the game ball that has fallen to the center of the movable portion 483 can pass over the movable portion 483 and enter any of the V regions 435. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413A is designed to always pass through the V winning sensor 433.

The game ball that has passed through the service gate 413B falls to the upper end portion slightly to the left of the center of the second guide surface 476 by the first guide surface 474B, and is affected by the plurality of protrusions 475a formed on the second guide surface 476. While receiving it, it flows down in a zigzag toward the bottom of the second guide surface 476. The game ball that has passed through the Yuren Gate 413C falls to the upstream portion on the left side of the second guide surface 476 in a state of being urged to the left by the inclined surface of the first guide surface 474C, and falls to the upstream portion of the second guide surface 476 to the left. While being influenced by the plurality of protrusions 475a formed on the surface, the second guide surface 476 rolls to the left and then flows down in a zigzag manner toward the bottom of the second guide surface 476. The game ball that has passed through the Yuren Gate 413D falls to the upstream portion on the right side of the second guide surface 476 in a state of being urged to the right by the inclined surface of the first guide surface 474D, and falls to the upstream portion on the right side of the second guide surface 476, and the second guide surface 476. While being influenced by the plurality of protrusions 475a formed on the surface, the second guide surface 476 rolls to the right and then flows down toward the bottom of the second guide surface 476.

Compared to the game balls that have passed through the gates 413A, the game balls that have passed through the gates 413B, 413C, and 413D flow down while being affected by the plurality of protrusions 475a. It takes a long time to reach. Further, the game ball that has passed through the combination gates 413C and 413D has a longer flow length due to the influence of the plurality of protrusions 475a than the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B, so that the second guide surface is longer. The time to reach the lower end of 476 is long.

The game ball that has passed through the role-ream gate 413B rolls from the upstream to the downstream of the second rolling surface 476, and then, as shown in FIG. 43 (c), is approximately in the center of the lower end of the second guiding surface 476. It passes through region 476b. If the movable portion 483 rotates in the central region 484b of the peripheral edge of the discharge portion 484 at this timing, the game ball is guided from the central region 476b of the lower end portion of the second guide surface 476 to the movable portion 483. At this time, if the V regions 435B, 435C, 435D located on the opposite side of the movable portion 483 are open, the ball can enter the corresponding V regions 435B, 435C, 435D.

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C fluctuates from the upstream side to the downstream side of the second rolling surface 476, and then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b), is approximately the lower end portion of the second guide surface 476, the left side region 476a. Pass through. If the movable portion 483 rotates in the left side region 484a of the peripheral edge of the discharge portion 484 at this timing, the game ball is guided from the left side region 476a of the lower end portion of the second guide surface 476 to the movable portion 483. At this time, if any of the V regions 435D and 435E located on the opposite side of the movable portion 483 is open, the ball can enter the corresponding V regions 435D and 435E.

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D rolls from the upstream to the downstream of the second rolling surface 476, and then, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), is approximately on the right side of the lower end of the second guiding surface 476. It passes through region 476c. If the movable portion 483 rotates in the right side region 484c of the peripheral edge of the discharge portion 484 at this timing, it is guided from the right side region 484c of the peripheral edge of the discharge portion 484 to the movable portion 483. At this time, if the induction lever of any of the V regions 435A and 435B located on the opposite bank across the movable portion 483 is opened, the ball can enter the V region 435A and 435B.

Next, it will be described whether or not the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 wins the V region 435. FIG. 44 is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 and a guide lever 437 that closes the V region 435.

Specifically, when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, the closing operation of the V region 435A starts at the same time as the passage detection of the game ball by the combination gate sensor 414, and 4 seconds after the passage detection, the V area 435E The closing operation starts, the closing operation of the V region 435B starts 8 seconds after the passage detection, the closing operation of the V region 435D starts 12 seconds after the passage detection, and the closing operation of the V region 435C starts 16 seconds after the passage detection. 4 seconds after the passage detection, the V region 435A cannot enter the ball, 8 seconds after the passage detection, the V region 435E cannot enter the ball, 12 seconds after the passage detection, the V region 435B cannot enter the ball, and 16 seconds after the passage detection. Later, the V region 435D cannot enter the ball, and 20 seconds after the passage detection, the V region 435C cannot enter the ball.

The time required for the game ball to pass through the round distribution accessory 415a of the distribution mechanism 415 of the ball entry portion 411 for the advantageous game state transition varies depending on the round distribution accessory 415a, but for convenience of explanation, the round The timing of passing through the distribution accessory 415 (time for rolling in the rolling region 417) will be determined and described. For example, at the passing timing 1, the ball passes through the winning combination gate 413 6 seconds after entering the rolling region 417. At the passing timing 2, the ball passes through the winning combination gate 413 12 seconds after entering the rolling region 417. At the passing timing 3, the ball passes through the winning combination gate 413 18 seconds after entering the rolling region 417. It should be noted that the combination gate 413 may be passed at a timing earlier or later than the passage timings 1 to 3.

The game ball that has passed through the Gakuren Gate 413A is guided to the advantageous route 472 and is less than 4 seconds after the passage is detected (for example, before the V region 435 cannot enter the ball, such as 3.8 to 3.9 seconds). It passes through the movable portion 483 and enters any of the V regions 435. Therefore, in most cases, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A at any of the passage timings 1 to 3 (unless it falls from the movable portion 483 or does not pass through the rolling region 417). You can enter any of the V regions 435.

It takes about 5 to 7 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B to reach the central region 484b of the edge portion of the discharge portion 484 while being affected by the protrusion 475a of the second guide surface 476. The V region 435 into which the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 476B can enter is one of the V regions 435B, 435C, and 435D. Therefore, at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B reaches the central region 484b at any of the passage timings 1 to 3 (5 to 7 seconds after the passage detection of the combination gate B), the V region 435B, 435C, and 435D are in a state where they can enter the ball. Therefore, when the timing when the game ball passing through the combination gate 413B reaches the central region 484b and the timing when the movable portion 483 is located in the central region 484b match, the game ball passing through the combination gate 413B is movable. It passes through the portion 483 and enters any of the V regions 435B, 435C, and 435D. As described above, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B is more difficult to enter the game ball into the V region 435 than the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A.

It takes about 7 to 9 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C to reach the left side region 484a of the edge portion of the discharge portion 484 while being affected by the protrusion 475a of the second guide surface 476. The V region 435 into which the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C at any of the passage timings 1 to 3 can enter is either the V region 435D or 435E. That is, at the timing when the game ball passing through the combination gate 413C reaches the left side region 484a, if it is 7.0 seconds or more and less than 8.0 seconds from the passage detection of the combination gate 413C, the V regions 435D and 435E Both are ready for entry. Therefore, when the timing when the game ball passing through the combination gate 413C reaches the left side region 484a and the timing when the movable portion 483 is located in the left side area 484a match, the game ball passing through the combination gate 413C is movable. It passes through the portion 483 and enters either the V region 435D or 435E.

If it takes 8.0 seconds or more from the detection of passage of the winning combination gate 413C at the timing when the game ball passing through the winning combination gate 413C reaches the left side region 484a, the V region 435E is already in a non-entry state. Therefore, only the V region 435D is in a state where the ball can enter. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C enters the V region 435D only when the timing with the movable portion 483 matches at the position where the ball can enter the V region 435D in the left side region 484a. In this way, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C takes longer to flow down the second rolling surface 476 than the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B, so that the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413B. It is more difficult to insert a game ball into the V region 435 than the ball.

It takes about 7 to 9 seconds for the game ball that has passed through the service gate 413D to reach the right side region 484c of the edge portion of the discharge portion 484 while being affected by the protrusion 475a of the second guide surface 476. The V region 435 into which the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D at any of the passage timings 1 to 3 can enter is either the V region 435A or 435B. That is, the V region 435A is already in a non-entry state at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D reaches the right side region 484c. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D enters the V region 435B only when the timing with the movable portion 483 matches at the position where the ball can enter the V region 435B in the right region 484c. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the Gakuren Gate 413D takes longer than the game ball that has passed through the Gakuren Gate 413B to flow down the second rolling surface 476, so that the game ball that has passed through the Gakuren Gate 413B However, it is difficult to insert a game ball into the V region 435. Further, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D is more difficult to enter the game ball in the V area 435 than the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C because of the closing order of the V area 435.

From the above, since the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A almost always enters the V region 435, the winning rate (easiness of winning) to the V region 435 is the highest. Next, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B can enter all three V regions 435 that can be positionedly entered at the timing when it reaches the central region 484b of the discharge unit 484. The winning rate for V region 435 is the second highest. Next, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C can enter both of the two V regions 435 that can be positionedly entered if the timing of reaching the left side region 484a of the discharge unit 484 is early. If the arrival timing is late, one of the two V regions 435 that can be positionedly entered cannot be entered, so the winning rate to the V region 435 is the third highest. Next, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D can enter only one of the two V regions 435 that can be positionedly entered at the timing when it reaches the right region 484c of the discharge unit 484. Therefore, the winning rate to the V region 435 is the lowest. As described above, since the winning rate to the V region 435 differs depending on the passage location of the combination gate 413, the player can be given a feeling of excitement depending on which combination gate 413 is passed.

Further, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds: maximum opening time) elapses from the timing when the game ball passes through the induction valve 451, the V regions 435A to 435E are forcibly closed so that the game ball cannot enter. Specifically, the measurement of the maximum opening time is started from the timing when the game ball passes through the induction valve 451. When the maximum opening time is measured, the induction lever 437 in the V region 435 that is not completely closed at that time is closed at once. Since the game ball passed through the combination gate 413 at a timing later than the passing timing 3, even if there is a V region 435 that is still ready for entry at the time when the predetermined time is measured, the guidance of the V region 435 is performed. The lever 437 is also closed at once. As a result, the longer the staying time in the rolling region 417 of the distribution mechanism 415 (round distribution accessory 415a) of the ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state, the more thrilled that the maximum opening time approaches. be able to.

Further, when the game ball that has passed through the induction valve 451 does not pass through any of the combination gates 413, or when the game ball passes over any of the induction levers 437 that are closed, the outside of the type 2 accessory 401. By measuring the maximum opening time from the passage of the induction valve 451 even when the game ball is discharged to the V region 435, the game of inserting the game ball into the V region 435 can be completed.

When a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds: maximum opening time) elapses from the timing when the game ball passes through the induction valve 451, the main control device is configured to close the V regions 435A to 435E so that the game ball cannot enter. In the jackpot game state lottery process (FIG. 18) described above, the CPU 501 of 261 starts measuring a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the induction valve sensor 453. This is realized by controlling the game ball from entering the V region 435 by measuring a predetermined time from the passage of the induction valve sensor 453. As a result, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that the game ball must be put into the V region 435 by the time when a predetermined time elapses after passing through the induction valve sensor 453.

Further, the induction valve sensor 453 is provided on the upstream side of the combined gate 413. According to such a configuration, after passing the game ball through the induction valve sensor 453, it is necessary to pass the game ball through the combination gate 413 and the V region 435. Therefore, the game ball is passed through the combination gate 413 by the time when a predetermined time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) elapses after passing through the induction valve sensor 453, and the game ball is also passed through the V region 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that he must.

Further, the fluxgate gate sensor 414 is provided in the fluxgate 413. According to such a configuration, the timing at which a predetermined time has elapsed since the game ball passed through the combination gate 413, that is, in the case of V region 435A, at the same time as passing through the combination gate 413, in the case of V area 435E. 4 seconds after passing the gate 413, 8 seconds after passing the gate 413 for V area 435B, 12 seconds after passing gate 413 for V area 435D, and 12 seconds after passing gate 413 for V area 435C. 16 seconds after passing through the gate 413, the closing operation for changing the V region 435 is started. Therefore, after the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413, the game ball must be passed through the V region 435 within a time within which the change in the V region 435 is within a range that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that he / she does not become.

Further, the induction valve sensor 453 is provided on the upstream side of the fluxgate gate 435, and the fluxgate gate sensor 414 is provided on the fluxgate gate 413. According to such a configuration, the game ball is passed through the combination gate 413 until a predetermined time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) elapses after passing through the induction valve sensor 453, and the game ball is passed through the V region 435. Within the time that the change in the V area 435 is within the range that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 435 after the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413 under the restriction that the game ball must also pass through. In addition, it is possible to give the player a double feeling of excitement that the game ball must be passed through the V region 435.

The predetermined time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) measured from the passage of the induction valve sensor 453 may be different depending on the passage location of the combination gate 413. According to such a configuration, the time until the game ball cannot enter the V region 435 differs depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413. The pass rate to region 435 can be varied. In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to which passage of the combination gate 413 the game ball passes through.

Further, a guide accessory 471 that reduces the flow speed of the game ball is provided between the combination gate 413 and the V region 435. According to such a configuration, since it takes time for the game ball to reach the V region 435 after passing through the combination gate 413, it takes time from passing through the combination gate 413 to passing through the V region 435. , The feeling of excitement that it may be time for the game ball to enter the V area 435, and the change in the V area 435 after the game ball passes through the role gate 413 passes the game ball into the V area 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that it may be an unacceptable time.

Further, a round number distribution accessory 415a for reducing the flow speed of the game ball is provided between the induction valve sensor 453 and the combination gate 413. According to such a configuration, it takes a long time for the game ball to reach the winning combination gate 413 after passing through the induction valve sensor 453, so that the game ball is left by the time when the game ball cannot enter the V region 435. The feeling of excitement that the time spent may be shortened, and the time during which the change in the V region 435 after the game ball passes through the role gate 413 is within the range allowed for the game ball to pass through the V region 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that it may be shortened.

After the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433, a big hit round game in which the big winning opening 32a is opened is started. When the game ball passes through the out port 36 without passing through the V winning sensor 433 (when it passes over the closed V region 435 and is discharged to the outside of the second type accessory 401), the second guide surface When the game ball flowing down the 476 falls into the discharge portion 484 as the discharge hole without being guided by the movable portion 483 as a rotating body, after a predetermined time (maximum opening time) has elapsed from the passage of the induction valve 451 The jackpot round game that opens the jackpot 32a is started. After the jackpot round game is completed, if it passes through the V winning sensor 433, it shifts from the normal state to the probabilistic state, and if it does not pass through the V winning sensor 433, it shifts from the normal state to the time saving state. The time saving state returns to the normal state after the predetermined number of games are executed. If the V winning sensor 433 is passed during the probabilistic state, the probabilistic state is continued, and if the V winning sensor 433 is not passed during the probabilistic state, the time is shortened and after a predetermined number of games are executed. , Return to normal state.

The probability that a game ball that has passed through the combination gates 413A to 413D will enter any of the V regions 435A to 435E is, for example, that a predetermined number of right-handed game balls are guided to the round number distribution bonus 415a. Occasionally, it is designed so that a game ball that has passed through the combination gates 413A to 413D can enter the V region 435A to 435E with a probability of, for example, 50%.

Specifically, the closing speed (closing timing) of the V regions 435A to 435E, the rotating speed of the movable portion 483 as the rotating body of the V winning distribution portion 481, the inclination angle of the second induction portion 474, the number of protrusions 475a, and the like. The shape and the inclination angle of the second guide portion 475 are adjusted so that about 50% of the game balls that have passed through the combination gates 413A to 413D enter any of the V regions 435A to 435E.

In this way, the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 and the specific game state transition entry ball 431 are the specific game state transition entry balls according to the entry points of the plurality of advantageous game state transition entry ball units 411. It is designed so that the ease of entering the ball into the section 431 is different. For example, in this embodiment, it is designed so that the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on the passing points of the winning combination gates 413A to 413D provided in the round number distribution winning combination 415a in the type 2 accessory 401. Has been done. Specifically, the type 2 accessory 401 includes a guide accessory 471 that guides the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 to the V winning sensor 433, and the guide accessory 471 has a route other than the advantageous route 472. It is configured so that the V winning sensor 433 is less likely to be reached than the advantageous route 472, and even if it is reached, it takes longer than the advantageous route 472.

With such a configuration, the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413. Therefore, it is easy to pass through the V winning sensor 433 depending on where the passing location of the winning combination gate 413 is. Can be made to be recognized by the player. Therefore, the player can get a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the passing portion of the winning combination gate 413 of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 30a is a portion easily passing through the V winning sensor 433. Further, if the passing portion of the winning combination gate 413 is a portion that easily passes through the V winning sensor 433 and the game ball can be passed through the V winning sensor 433, the player can pass the game ball to the V winning sensor 433 by himself / herself. You can get a feeling of self-help as if you passed through. As a result, it is possible to determine the ease of transition to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state without requiring a complicated program, and the interest in transitioning to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state can be obtained. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be improved.

In addition, the number of rounds of the jackpot round game that is transferred by passing through the combination gate 413 differs depending on which of the combination gates 413A to 413D is the passing point of the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a. Attention can be drawn to the movement of the game ball passing through the continuous gate 413.

Further, whether or not the game ball easily passes through the V winning sensor 433 depends on whether or not the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a passes through the combination gate 413A as an advantageous hole of the combination gate 413. , It is possible to draw attention to the movement of the game ball as to whether or not to pass through the combination gate 413A as an advantageous hole of the combination gate 413.

Whether or not to shift to the jackpot round gaming state in which the number of rounds is large among the jackpot round gaming states in which the number of rounds is large, the game ball passing through the game area 30a determines the role-ream gate 413A as an advantageous hole of the role-ream game 413. Since it depends on whether or not it passes, attention can be focused on the movement of the game ball as to whether or not it passes through the combination gate 413A as an advantageous hole of the combination gate 413.

Next, a display mode from the time when the jackpot is determined to the time when the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state are determined will be described. First. The display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won.

In the third symbol display device 42, the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed from the start of the variation of the third symbol until it is determined whether the combination is the same as the jackpot combination or the combination is out of order. In the third symbol display device 42, when the jackpot combination by the third symbol (for example, "7", "7", "7") is confirmed, the effect of congratulating the jackpot (for example, "Congratulations on the jackpot") is displayed (FIG. 45 (a)).

Next, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image for firing the game ball by hitting right (FIG. 45 (b)). For example, in the third symbol display device 42, "Gate OPEN!" Indicates that the induction valve 451 has been opened, and "Aim for the crune by hitting right!" Indicates that the ball can enter the crune. Is displayed. In addition, the third symbol display device 42 also displays an image showing the correspondence between the four holes of the crune and the number of jackpot rounds. In this image, when viewed from the front of the game board 30, the two holes on the back side are holes that can acquire 2 lands, the hole on the left front side is a hole that can acquire 8 rounds, and the hole on the right front side acquires 16R. It is displayed that it is a hole that can be made. In addition to this, the third symbol display device 42 displays a right-handed notification image such as an image showing a right-handed game ball heading toward the induction valve and an image suggesting that the character hits the player right-handed. You may.

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, the game ball that has passed through the induction valve 451 has a large number of rounds from the time the game ball passes through the induction valve 451 until the game ball passes through the combination gate 413. A round fanning effect that raises the player's expectation of passing through the continuous gate 413 is displayed (FIG. 45 (c)). For example, the third symbol display device 42 has an image of "passing through the gate!" Showing that the game ball has passed through the induction valve 451 immediately after passing through the induction valve 451 and "R within 30 seconds after passing through the gate." The image "Choose a gate prize and a V prize!" Is displayed. Further, in the third symbol display device 42, among the areas corresponding to each combination gate 413, the area corresponding to the combination gate 413A of 16 rounds is more conspicuous than the area corresponding to the other combination gates 413. It is displayed. Further, an image such as "30 seconds" is displayed as an image showing the remaining time, the measurement time of the clock accessory 403 is set to "30 seconds", and the measurement (countdown) is started. Further, the advantageous game state transition transition ball entry unit 411 emits light of the advantageous game state transition transition ball entry unit 411 with a light emitting color (green) corresponding to the jackpot (first jackpot) in the “7” symbol. In addition, the periphery of the 16R combination gate 413A may be made to emit light in a conspicuous color.

Here, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413A at the passage timing 1 shown in FIG. 44 (that is, 8 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451). In the third symbol display device 42, after passing through the winning combination gate 413A, an image of "16R acquisition!" Showing the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413A through which the game ball has passed is displayed (FIG. 45 (d)). After passing through the winning combination gate 413A, the round number display lamp 421 corresponding to the winning combination gate 413A through which the game ball has passed lights up. In addition, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "Determine V winning with the remaining time!".

On the front side of the V regions 435A to 435E, there are V emission regions 436A to 436E (collectively referred to as V emission regions 436) indicating that each V region 435 is in a state where a game ball can enter. It is provided. The V light emitting region 436 changes to a light-off state when each V region 435 is in a state where the ball cannot be entered, thereby indicating to the player that each V region 435 is in a state where the game ball cannot be entered. Here, when the remaining time is 22 seconds, all the V light emitting regions 436 are lit, but when the remaining time is 18 seconds, the V light emitting region 436A corresponding to the V region 435A is turned off, and the remaining time is 14 seconds. At the time point, the V light emitting area 436E corresponding to the V area 435E is turned off, when the remaining time is 10 seconds, the V light emitting area 436B corresponding to the V area 435B is turned off, and when the remaining time is 6 seconds, the V corresponding to the V area 435D is turned off. The light emitting area 436D is turned off, and the V light emitting area 436E corresponding to the V area 435E is turned off at the time remaining 2 seconds. As a result, the player can realize that the V region 435 that was able to enter the ball is gradually reduced. The third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "Determine V prize based on the remaining time!", An image of "20 seconds" indicating the remaining time is displayed, and the clock accessory 403 has the remaining time. Is displayed as 19 seconds (FIG. 45 (e)).

The game ball that has passed through the role-ream gate 413A is guided by the advantageous route 472 and passes over the movable portion 483 as a rotating body to any V region 435 before the guidance lever 437 is closed. Enter the ball. The time from passing through the combination gate 413A to reaching the V region 435 is less than 4 seconds from the passage detection (for example, 3.8 to 3.9 seconds before the V region 435 cannot enter the ball). .. This time is earlier than the time until the first closed V region 435A (the V region on the left side in front view) is closed (4 seconds after passing). Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate A always enters any V region 435. Here, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate A has entered any of the V regions 435 when the image of "18 seconds" indicating the remaining time is displayed.

When the game ball enters the V region 435, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "V prize!" Showing that the V prize has been detected (FIG. 45 (f)).

As described above, in the third symbol display device 42, the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433 after passing through the winning combination gate 413 until it passes through the V winning sensor 433 or the out port 36. A V-fan effect that raises the player's expectations is displayed. For example, the V-winning sensor 433 makes a valid portion emit light.

After the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433 or the out port 36, it is displayed whether the game ball is probable or non-probable. When the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433, the SUPER V lamp 422 of "SUPER V" is lit, and when the game ball passes through the out port 36, the V lamp 423 which displays only "V" is lit. To. Instead of lighting the V lamps 422 and 423, an image indicating "SPERE V" or "V" may be displayed on the third symbol display device 42.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the normal prize is won will be described. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the normal prize is won.

The display from the jackpot confirmation display (FIG. 46 (a)) to the display of the round fanning effect (FIG. 46 (c)) is the same as the description from FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (c), but FIG. 46 As shown in (c), it is assumed that the game ball that has rolled in the rolling region 417 has passed through the winning combination gate 413D.

When 4 seconds have passed from the passage of the combination gate 413D at the passage timing 1, the leftmost V region 435A is closed by the guide lever 437A in the front view, and the game ball cannot be entered. The third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "18 seconds remaining time" indicating the remaining time, and also displays that the V region 435A cannot enter the ball. Further, the leftmost V light emitting region 436A is turned off. As a result, since the V light emitting regions 436 are provided at four locations, the player is visually informed that the winning rate for the V region 435 is low.

Eight seconds after passing through the role gate 413D, the rightmost V region 435E in front view is closed by the V lever, and the game ball cannot be entered. An image of "14 seconds remaining" indicating the remaining time is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 (not shown). Further, the V light emitting region 436E provided on the front side of the rightmost V region 435E is turned off. As a result, since there are three V light emitting regions 436, it is visually shown to the player that it is more difficult to enter the V region 435 than after 5 to 9 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413.

When 9 seconds have passed since the passage of the combination gate 413D, the game ball passing through the combination gate 413D flows down the second guide portion 475 under the influence of the protrusion 475a and reaches the right region 476c of the discharge portion 484. To do. Here, the timing at which the game ball reaches the right side region 476c of the discharge portion 484 and the timing at which the movable portion 483 as a rotating body is located at the right side region 476c do not match, and the game ball falls into the discharge portion 484 and falls into the V region. Suppose that the ball did not enter 435. After that, after the maximum opening time has elapsed, when the V region 435 is completely closed, the character "timeout" is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and it is notified that the V prize could not be won.

In this way, in the third symbol display device 42, the clock accessory 403, the ball entry section 411 for the advantageous game state transition, and the ball entry section 431 for the specific game state transition, the winning combination gate 413 and the V winning effect are fueled. Is displayed, the player's feeling of excitement can be further improved.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
The jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 capable of shifting to the jackpot round game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the combination gate 413, and the jackpot game state lottery process.
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability, and the state shifts to the high probability state. The next game state setting process to be executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided.
The passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on the passing location of the combination gate 413 (for example, the gaming machine according to (A0)).

According to such a configuration, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 shifts the game state to the jackpot round game state which is advantageous to the player when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the winning combination gate 413. Make it possible. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, so that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 has a high probability from the value when the value is low. It shifts to a high probability state that is changed to the value of time. Since the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on the passing point of the winning combination gate 413, the player is made to recognize the ease of passing through the V winning sensor 433 depending on where the passing point of the winning combination gate 413 is. be able to. Therefore, the player can get a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the passing portion of the winning combination gate 413 of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 30a is a portion easily passing through the V winning sensor 433. Further, if the passing portion of the winning combination gate 413 is a portion that easily passes through the V winning sensor 433 and the game ball can be passed through the V winning sensor 433, the player can pass the game ball to the V winning sensor 433 by himself / herself. You can get a feeling of self-help as if you passed through. As a result, it is possible to determine the ease of transition to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state without requiring a complicated program, and the interest in transitioning to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state can be obtained. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be improved.

The CPOU 501 of the main control device 261 makes it possible to shift to a jackpot round game state that is advantageous to the player by allowing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a to pass through the combination gate 413. By passing through any one of the gates 413, it may be possible not to shift to the big winning round gaming state which is advantageous to the player. As a result, the passage of the game ball through the role-matching gate 413 can be further noticed.

Further, the game shifts to one of the jackpot round games having a different number of rounds depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball passing through the game area 30a passes (for example, the game machine according to (A1)).

According to such a configuration, the number of rounds of the jackpot round game that is transferred by passing through the winning combination gate 413 differs depending on the passing location of the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a, so that the winning combination gate 413 is passed. Attention can be drawn to the movement of the game ball.

Further, when the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a passes through the winning combination gate A as an advantageous hole of the winning combination gate 413, it is configured so as to easily pass through the V winning sensor 433 (for example, described in (A2)). Gaming machine).

According to such a configuration, whether or not the game ball easily passes through the V winning sensor 433 depends on whether or not the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a passes through the combination gate 413A as an advantageous hole of the combination gate 413. Since it depends on something, it is possible to draw attention to the movement of the game ball as to whether or not it passes through the role-ream gate 413A.

Further, when the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a passes through the combination gate 413A as an advantageous hole, even if the game ball is operated to be launched with the same strength, the jackpot round game state of a plurality of rounds is performed. Among them, the game shifts to a jackpot round game state in which the number of rounds is large (for example, the game machine described in (A3)).

According to such a configuration, whether or not to shift to the jackpot round gaming state in which the number of rounds is large among the jackpot round gaming states in which the number of rounds is large is determined by the advantage hole of the game ball passing through the game area 30a. Since it depends on whether or not the player passes through the role-series gate 413A, attention can be focused on the movement of the game ball as to whether or not it passes through the role-series gate 413A. Further, since it is sufficient to operate so that the game ball is launched with the same strength when passing through the combination gate 413A and when shifting to the jackpot round game state, the operation burden on the player is reduced.

When the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a passes through the combination gate 413A, even if the game ball is operated to be launched with the same strength, not only the jackpot round game state in which the number of rounds is large but also V It is configured so that it can easily pass through the winning sensor 433. Since it is sufficient to operate so that the game ball is fired with the same strength when passing through the role-ream gate 413A, when passing through the V winning sensor 433, and when shifting to the jackpot round game state with a large number of rounds. Furthermore, the operational burden on the player is reduced.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 makes it easy for the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a to pass through an advantageous hole (for example, a gate that gives 16R) having a large number of rounds in the combination gates 413A to 413D. Advantageous hole lottery table stored in ROM 502 of CPU 501 of the main control device 261 for performing lottery (the number of advantageous holes is set to be different for each type of jackpot (first to third jackpot)). In addition, the special figure 2 is provided with a distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate in the jackpot lottery table (for example, the gaming machine according to (A5)). The special figure 1 jackpot lottery table may also function as an advantageous hole lottery table.

According to such a configuration, whether or not it is easy for the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a to pass through the advantageous hole having a large number of rounds in the combination gates 413A to 413D is for the advantageous hole lottery. Since it is determined by the result of the lottery for each type of jackpot using the table, it is changed whether or not it is easy to pass through the advantageous hole with a large number of rounds in the winning combination gates 413A to 413D without changing the structure. be able to.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
The jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 capable of shifting to the jackpot round game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the combination gate 413, and the jackpot game state lottery process.
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability, and the state shifts to the high probability state. The next game state setting process to be executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided.
The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a function of changing the V region 435 when a predetermined condition of the time from the passage of the gaming ball by the combination gate sensor 414 is satisfied in the jackpot game state lottery process (for example, described above). (B0).

According to such a configuration, the combination gate sensor is set as the time from the passage of the combination gate sensor 414 (the combination gate 413) as a predetermined condition to be established as an opportunity to change the V region 435. Since the ease of entering the V region 435 can be changed with the time from the passage of the 414, the expectation for the transition to the specific gaming state differs depending on the time from the passage of the Fluxgate Compass 414. , It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the time when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a is detected to pass through the fluxgate sensor 414 (fluxgate 413) in the jackpot game state lottery process. (1st measurement function), the change of V region 435 (closing operation of the induction lever 437) is started by measuring a predetermined time from the passage of the fluxgate sensor 414 by the 1st measurement function (for example, the above-mentioned (for example, described above). B1) The gaming machine). According to such a configuration, the change in the V region 435 passes through the V region 435 at the timing when the game ball reaches the V region 435 according to the time after passing through the fluxgate sensor 414. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not it is within the permissible range.

Further, in step S519 of the jackpot game state lottery process, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 causes a game ball flowing down the game area 30a to pass through the induction valve sensor 453 for a specific time (maximum opening time of the V area 435). This function has a function to start the measurement of the ball, so that the game ball cannot enter the V area 435 when a specific time (maximum opening time of the V area 435) is measured from the passage of the induction valve sensor 453. Control (for example, the gaming machine according to (B2) described above).

According to such a configuration, the measurement of the maximum opening time is started when the game ball flowing down the game region 30a passes through the induction valve sensor 453, and the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is set from the passage of the induction valve sensor 453. It is controlled so that the game ball cannot enter the V region 435 when measured. Therefore, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that the game ball must be put into the V region 435 after passing through the induction valve sensor 435 until the maximum opening time elapses.

Further, the induction valve sensor 453 is provided on the upstream side of the combination gate 413 (for example, the gaming machine according to (B3) described above).

According to such a configuration, since the induction valve sensor 453 is provided on the upstream side of the combination gate 413, after passing the game ball through the induction valve sensor 453, the combination gate 413 and the V region 435 are formed. It is necessary to pass the game ball. Therefore, the player feels a sense of excitement that the game ball must be passed through the combination gate 413 and the game ball in the V region 435 by the time the maximum opening time elapses after passing through the induction valve sensor 453. Can be given to.

Further, the combination gate sensor 414 is provided in the combination gate 413 (for example, the gaming machine according to (B4) described above).

According to such a configuration, since the combination gate sensor 414 is provided in the combination gate 413, a predetermined time (at the same time as the passage of the combination gate 413) after the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, The change of each V region 435A to 435E is started at the timing when 4 seconds from the passage, 8 seconds from the passage, 12 seconds from the passage, and 16 seconds from the passage). Therefore, after the game ball has passed through the winning combination gate, the game ball must be passed through the V region 435 within a time within which the change in the V region 435 is within a range that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement.

Further, when the induction valve sensor 453 is provided on the upstream side of the combination gate 413 and the combination gate sensor 414 is provided on the combination gate 413, the measurement is performed after passing through the induction valve sensor 453. The game ball must pass the game ball through the Fluxgate 413 and the game ball in the V area 435 by the time the maximum opening time of the V area 435 elapses, and the game ball must pass through the Fluxgate 413. The double feeling of excitement that the game ball must be passed through the V region 435 within the time when the change in the V region 435 is within the range that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 435. It can be given to the player.

Further, a predetermined time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) may be different from the passage of the induction valve sensor measured by the second measurement function depending on the passage location of the combination gate 413 (for example, (B5) described above. ) The gaming machine).

According to such a configuration, the time until the game ball cannot enter the V region 435 differs depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413. The pass rate to region 435 can be varied. In addition, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to which passage of the combination gate 415 the game ball passes through.

Further, an induction accessory 471 that reduces the flow speed of the gaming ball is provided between the combination gate 413 and the V region 435 (for example, the gaming machine according to (B6) described above).

According to such a configuration, since it takes time for the game ball to reach the V region 435 after passing through the combination gate 413, it takes time from passing through the combination gate 413 to passing through the V region 435. , The feeling of excitement that it may be time for the game ball to enter the V area 413, and the change in the V area 435 after the game ball passes through the role gate 413 causes the game ball to pass through the V area 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that it may be an unacceptable time.

Further, a round number distribution accessory 415a for reducing the flow speed of the gaming ball is provided between the induction valve sensor 453 and the combination gate 413 (for example, the gaming machine according to (B7) described above).

According to such a configuration, it takes a long time for the game ball to reach the winning combination gate 413 after passing through the induction valve sensor 453, so that the game ball is left by the time when the game ball cannot enter the V region 435. The feeling of excitement that the time spent may be shortened, and the time during which the change in the V region 435 after the game ball passes through the role gate 413 is within the range allowed for the game ball to pass through the V region 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that it may be shortened.

Further, the CPU 551 of the sub-control device 262 is based on the ball entering the special figure 1 start winning device 33a or the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b of the game ball flowing down the game area 30a in the variation display mode setting process. The third symbol display device 42 has a function of changing the third symbol.
A predetermined time may be determined from the passage of the fluxgate compass 414 according to the combination of specific symbols set in the variation display mode setting process (for example, the gaming machine according to (B8) described above). ..

According to such a configuration, the first measurement is performed according to the combination of specific symbols which is the result of the symbol variation display based on the ball entering the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. A predetermined time measured by the function and a predetermined time measured by the second measurement function are determined. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the ease of entering the game ball into the V region 435, that is, the ease of transitioning to an advantageous gaming state, by the combination of the specific symbols.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment,
A taxiway 451 of a taxiway 455 through which a game ball flowing down the game area 30a can pass, and
The jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, which enables the game ball flowing down the game area 30a to shift to the jackpot round game state advantageous to the player by passing through the combination gate 413, and the jackpot game state lottery process.
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 changes from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability after the end of the jackpot round game state. It is provided with the next game state setting process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 to shift to the high probability state changed to.
The gaming ball that has passed through the induction valve 451 is configured to be able to pass through at least the winning combination gate 413 (for example, the gaming machine according to (C0) described above).

According to such a configuration, it is not possible to shift to the jackpot round game state unless the game ball that has passed through the induction valve 451 passes through the winning combination gate 413. Therefore, by adding the operating skill of the player to the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player, it is possible to pay attention to the movement of the game ball as to where the game ball has passed in the game area 30a. , It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

Further, the gaming ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 has a configuration that allows it to pass through the V region 435 (for example, the gaming machine according to (C1) described above).

According to such a configuration, the transition to the high probability state is determined depending on whether or not the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 passes through the V region 435, so that a complicated program is required. It is possible to determine the transition to a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the interest in the transition to the gaming state that is advantageous to the player.
Further, whether or not the game ball passes through the V region 435 after the game ball passes through the induction valve 451 and whether or not the game ball passes through the V region 435 after the game ball passes through the combination gate 413. Since attention is focused on the movement of the game ball, it is possible to improve the interest in the movement of the game ball.

Further, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 30a passes through the winning combination gate 413 without passing through the induction valve 453, it is controlled so as not to shift to the jackpot round gaming state (for example, (C2) described above). Described gaming machine). Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 of the fluxgate sensor 414 in steps S525, S531, and S536A only when the passage of the induction valve sensor 451 is detected in step S517 in the jackpot game state lottery process. The presence or absence of passage detection is determined.

According to such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, it does not shift to the jackpot round game state unless it is in the correct passage order, so that the jackpot round game is played by illegal operation, action or irregularity. It is possible to reduce the transition to the state.

Further, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 without passing through the induction valve 453, it is controlled so as not to shift to the probabilistic state (for example, described in (C3) described above). Game machine). Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the passage of the V winning sensor 433 is detected in step S539 only when the passage of the induction valve sensor 451 is detected in step S517 in the jackpot game state lottery process. Judging.

According to such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433, it does not shift to the probabilistic state unless it is in the correct passing order, so that it shifts to the probabilistic state due to an illegal operation, action, or irregularity. Can be reduced.

Further, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 without passing through the winning combination gate 413, it is controlled so as not to shift to the probabilistic state (for example, described in (C4) described above). Gaming machine). Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has or does not detect the passage of the V winning sensor 433 only when the passage of the fluxgate sensor 414 is detected in steps S525, S531, and S536A in the jackpot game state lottery process. Is judged.

According to such a configuration, even if the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433, it does not shift to the probabilistic state unless it is in the correct passing order, so that it shifts to the probabilistic state due to an illegal operation, action, or irregularity. Can be reduced.

Further, the game shifts to one of the jackpot round game states in which the number of rounds is different depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball passing through the game area 30a passes (for example, the game described in (C5) described above). Machine).

According to such a configuration, the number of rounds in the jackpot round game state that shifts by passing through the combination gate 413 differs depending on the passing location of the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a, and thus passes through the combination gate 413. You can draw attention to the movement of the game ball.

Further, it is characterized in that the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball passing through the winning combination gate passes (for example, (C6) described above. ) The gaming machine).

According to such a configuration, the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433, which triggers the occurrence of the probability change state, differs depending on the passing location of the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413. Attention can be drawn to the movement of the game ball.

In addition, a start port 34 for a normal symbol through which a game ball that has passed through the game area 30a can pass, and
It is provided with a start winning device 33b for special figure 2 having an opening / closing member (electric accessory) that can be changed to an open state in which a game ball can easily enter a ball based on passing through a start port 34 for a normal symbol.
When the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2 is in the open state, a gaming ball that has not passed through the winning combination gate 413 can enter the ball (for example, the gaming machine according to (C7) described above).

According to such a configuration, even if the game ball does not pass through the winning combination gate 413, if the game ball has passed through the starting port 34 for a normal symbol, it can be changed to an open state for easy entry. Since the game ball that has not passed through the winning combination gate 413 can easily enter the starting winning device 33b for 2, the burden on the player can be reduced.

In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the time from passing through each combination gate 413 until the V region 435 is closed was constant for each combination gate 413, but when passing through the same combination gate 413. However, the time until the V region 435 is closed may be different.

In this embodiment, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has an odd number of symbols (third symbol) other than 7 as the decorative symbol (third symbol) designated by the decorative symbol designation command (at the time of jackpot) set in step S508 of the fluctuation start process. In the case of a combination of "1", "3", "5", and "9"), even if the game ball passes through any of the combination gates 413A to 413D, the V region 435 is performed at 3 second intervals. Is set to start the closing operation. In addition, when the decorative symbols specified by the decorative symbol designation command are a combination of even-numbered symbols (any of "0", "2", "4", "6", and "8"), the combination gate 413A When the game ball passes through any of ~ 413D, the V region 435 is set to close at 4-second intervals. In addition, when the decorative symbols specified by the decorative symbol designation command are a combination of "7", even if the game ball passes through any of the combination gates A to D, the V region 435 is every 5 seconds after the passage detection. Is set to close.

With this configuration, depending on the combination of specific symbols (odd symbols other than 7; even symbols, 7 symbols), the decorative symbol specified by the decorative symbol designation command in the variation start process can be used. Since the time at which the closing operation of the V region 435 is started from the passage of the continuous gate sensor 414 is determined at different times such as 3 second interval, 4 second interval, and 5 second interval, it is determined by a specific combination of symbols thereafter. It is possible to inform the player of the winning rate (easiness of entering the ball) in the V region 435.

The closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 47A is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region 435 of the second embodiment, FIG. 47B is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region 435, and FIG. 47C is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region 435. It's a table.

See FIG. 47 (a). When the second jackpot (big hit with an even number symbol) is won, the closing speed of the V region 435 of the first embodiment is set to be the same, and the V regions 435A to 435E are closed from a completely open state. 4 seconds after the start of the game, the game ball is closed at a speed of closing up to a width of 10 mm, which prevents the ball from entering.

If the first jackpot and the third jackpot are won, different closing speeds are set. That is, when the first jackpot (the jackpot with the "7" symbol) is won, the game balls cannot enter the V regions 435A to 435E 5 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. It is closed at a speed that allows it to be closed up to a width of 10 mm. That is, when the first jackpot (the jackpot with the "7" symbol) is won, the closing speed is set to be slower than the V region 435 of the first embodiment.

In addition, when the third jackpot (big hit with odd-numbered symbols other than 7) is won, the game ball cannot enter the V regions 435A to 435E within 3 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. It is closed at a speed that allows it to be closed up to a width of 10 mm. That is, when the third jackpot (the jackpot with odd-numbered symbols other than 7) is won, the closing speed is set to be faster than the V region 435 of the first embodiment. As described above, in this embodiment, the time until the V region 435 is closed is different even when the same combination gate 413 is passed depending on the type of jackpot.

As shown in FIG. 47 (b), the V regions 435A to 435E are closed during the normal state before the jackpot winning is confirmed, but are opened when the jackpot is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 47 (c), when the second big hit is won, the V region 435A starts the closing operation at the same time as passing through the combination gate 413, and the V region 435E has a combination. The closing operation is started 4 seconds after the passage of the continuous gate 413, the closing operation of the V region 435B is started 8 seconds after the passage of the joint gate 413, and the V region 435D is 12 seconds after the passage of the joint gate 413. The closing operation is started later, and the V region 435C is started to close 16 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413.

When the first big hit is won, the closing timing is set to be later than that of the first embodiment, the closing operation of the V region 435A is started at the same time as the passage of the winning combination gate 413, and the V region 435E is the winning combination gate. The closing operation is started 5 seconds after the passage of the 413, the V region 435B is closed 10 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V region 435D is closed 15 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413. The operation is started, and the V region 435C is closed 20 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413.

Further, when the third big hit is won, the closing timing is set to be earlier than that of the first embodiment, the closing operation of the V region 435A is started at the same time as the passage of the winning combination gate 413, and the V region 435E is a winning combination. The closing operation is started 3 seconds after the passage of the continuous gate 413, the closing operation of the V region 435B is started 6 seconds after the passage of the joint gate 413, and the V region 435D is 9 seconds after the passage of the joint gate 413. The closing operation is started later, and the closing operation of the V region 435C is started 12 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413. As described above, in this embodiment, the timing at which the V region 435 is closed is different even when the same combination gate 413 is passed depending on the type of jackpot.

In this embodiment, the winning rate (easiness of winning) in the V region 435 differs depending on the type of jackpot, and this point will be described. FIG. 48 is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 and a guide lever 437 that closes the V region 435 in the case of the first to third jackpots.

For convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the game ball passes through the combination gate 413 6 seconds after entering the rolling region 417. Further, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A is 3.8 seconds to 3.9 seconds after 4.0 seconds before the V region 435A cannot enter the ball (hereinafter referred to as arrival timing A). It is assumed that the V region 435 is reached. It is assumed that the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B reaches the central region 476b of the discharge unit 458 5 to 7 seconds after the passage detection of the combination gate 413B (hereinafter, arrival timing B). It is assumed that the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C reaches the right region 476c of the discharge unit 458 7 to 9 seconds after the passage detection of the combination gate 413C (hereinafter, arrival timing C). It is assumed that the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D reaches the left side region 476a of the discharge unit 458 7 to 9 seconds after the passage detection of the combination gate 413D (the above arrival timing C).

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A can enter all of the V region 435A to the V region 435E at the arrival timing A in the case of the first jackpot and the second jackpot. However, in the case of the third big hit, since the V region 435A cannot enter the ball at the arrival timing A, it is possible to enter the V region 435B to the V region 435E.

In the case of the first to third big hits, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B has the timing of the game ball reaching the central region 476b and the timing of the movable portion 483 located in the central region 476b at the arrival timing B. For example, it is possible to enter the V region 435B, the V region 435C, and the V region 435D.

In the case of the first jackpot, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C has a V area if the timing at which the game ball reaches the right side area 484c and the timing at which the movable portion 483 is located in the right side area 484c match at the arrival timing C. It is possible to enter the 434D and V region 435E. In the case of the second big hit, if the timing of the game ball and the movable portion 483 match in the first half of the arrival timing C, it is possible to enter the V region 435D and the V region 435E, but at the timing of the latter half of the arrival timing C. Then, the V region 435E cannot enter the ball, and only the V region 435D can enter the ball. In the case of the third big hit, even if the timing of the game ball and the movable portion 483 match at the arrival timing C, the V region 435E cannot enter the ball, so only the V region 435D can enter the ball. In this way, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C has the highest winning rate in the V region 435 in the case of the first jackpot, followed by the winning rate in the V region 435 in the order of the second jackpot and the third jackpot. It gets lower.

In the case of the first and second big hits, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D has the timing when the game ball reaches the left side area 484a and the timing when the movable portion 483 is located in the left side area 484a at the arrival timing C. , It is possible to enter the V region 434B. In the case of the third big hit, except when the latest timing (9.0 seconds from the passage detection) is reached at the arrival timing C, if the timings of the game ball and the movable part 483 match, it is possible to enter the V region 434B. However, when the latest timing is reached, the ball cannot be entered in either of the V region 435D because the ball cannot be entered. As described above, the winning rate of the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413D is lower in the case of the third jackpot than in the case of the first and second jackpots.

From the above, even when the cases where the game ball passes from the combination gate 413A to the combination gate 413D are combined, the winning rate to the V region 435 is the highest in the case of the first big hit, followed by the second big hit and the third. The winning rate to the V area 435 decreases in the order of big hits. As a result, the player recognizes that when the result of the symbol lottery is the first big hit, the probability change state is most likely to occur. Therefore, the number of rounds and the presence or absence of the probability change state are determined by the result of the symbol lottery. Even if it is decided separately, it is possible to improve the interest in the variable display effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 flows down the game area 30a based on the fluctuation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command set in the fluctuation start processing. The third symbol display device 42 has a function of changing the third symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the special drawing 1 start winning device 33a or the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, and is a decoration for the variation start process. From the passage of the fluxgate sensor 414 to the start of the closing operation of the V region 435 according to the combination of specific symbols (odd symbols excluding 7, even symbols, 7 symbols) set by the symbol specification command. Time is determined. Therefore, it is possible to inform the player of the winning rate (easiness of entering the ball) in the V region, that is, the ease of transitioning to the probabilistic state, by the combination of specific symbols. (For example, the gaming machine according to (B8) described above)

In the gaming machine of the second embodiment, the time from when the gaming ball passes through the winning combination gate 413 until the guiding lever 437 closes the V region 435 is different for each type of jackpot, but in this embodiment, the time is different. In the second embodiment, the time from when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413 until the guide lever 437 closes the V region 435 is different for each combination gate 413 through which the game ball passes. Different from.

The closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 49A is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region 435 of the third embodiment, FIG. 49B is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region 435, and FIG. 49C is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region 435. It's a table.

See FIG. 49 (a). When passing through the combination gate 413A, the closing speed of the V region 435 of the first embodiment is set to be the same, and the V regions 435A to 435E are each set to 4 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. The game ball is closed at a speed of closing up to a width of 10 mm, which prevents the ball from entering.

When passing through the combination gates 413B and the combination gates 413C and 413D, different closing speeds are set. That is, when passing through the combination gate 413A, the V regions 435A to 435E are closed at a speed of closing to a width of 10 mm in which the game ball cannot enter in 8 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. It will be closed. That is, when passing through the combination gate 413B, the closing speed is set to be significantly slower than when passing through the combination gate 413A.

Further, when passing through the combination gates 413C and 413D, the V regions 435A to 435E are closed to a width of 10 mm in which the game ball cannot enter in 3 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. Closed at speed. That is, when passing through the combination gates 413C and 413D, the closing speed is set to be faster than when passing through the combination gates 413A. As described above, in this embodiment, the time until the V region 435 is closed differs depending on the passage location of the combination gate 413.

As shown in FIG. 49 (b), the V regions 435A to 435E are closed during the normal state before the jackpot winning is confirmed, but are opened when the jackpot is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 49 (c), when the combination gate 413A is passed, the V region 435A starts the closing operation at the same time as the combination gate 413 passes, and the V region 435E is set to the V region 435E. The closing operation is started 4 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, the closing operation of the V region 435B is started 8 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V area 435D is 12 after the passage of the combination gate 413. The closing operation is started after a second, and the closing operation of the V region 435C is started 16 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413.

When passing through the combination gate 413B, the closing timing is set to be significantly later than when passing through the combination gate 413A, and the V region 435A starts the closing operation at the same time as the combination gate 413 passes. The V region 435E starts the closing operation 8 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, the V region 435B starts the closing operation 16 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V region 435D starts the closing operation 16 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413. The closing operation is started 24 seconds after the passage of the 413, and the closing operation of the V region 435C is also started 24 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413.

Further, when passing through the winning combination gates 413C and 413D, the closing timing is set to be earlier than when passing through the winning combination gate 413A, and the closing operation of the V region 435A starts at the same time as passing through the winning combination gate 413. The V region 435E starts the closing operation 3 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, the V region 435B starts the closing operation 6 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V area 435D serves as a combination. The closing operation is started 9 seconds after the passage of the continuous gate 413, and the closing operation of the V region 435C is started 12 seconds after the passage of the continuous gate 413. As described above, in this embodiment, the timing at which the V region 435 is closed differs depending on the passage location of the combination gate 413.

In this embodiment, the winning rate (easiness of winning) to the V region 435 differs depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413, and this point will be described. FIG. 50 is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 and a guide lever that closes the V region 435 in the case of the first jackpot in the third embodiment. The arrival timings A to C are the same as those described in the second embodiment.

In this embodiment, the distribution for each winning combination gate shown in FIG. 7 is always set to 2R regardless of the type of jackpot when passing through the winning combination gate 413A, and when passing through the winning combination gate 413D, the distribution is always set to 2R. Always set to 16R regardless of the type of jackpot. As a result, in the combination gate 413A, the number of rounds is low but the probability of change is likely to occur, and in the combination gate 413D, the number of rounds is high but the probability of change is unlikely to occur.

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413A can enter all of the V region 435A to the V region 435E at the arrival timing A. That is, when the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 413A, the number of rounds that can be obtained is low (2R) as shown in FIG. 7A, but the winning rate in the V region 435 is high.

Since the closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435 of the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413B is significantly slow at the arrival timing B, all the V regions 435 enter at the timing when the game ball reaches the central region 476b. It is in a state where it can be balled. Therefore, if the timing of the game ball reaching the central region 476b and the timing of the movable portion 483 located in the central region 476b match, the ball can enter all the V regions 435. That is, even when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413B, as shown in FIG. 7A, the number of rounds that can be obtained is often low (2R), but the winning rate in the V region 435 is high.

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413C can enter only the V area 435D out of the V areas 435D and 435E at the timing when the game ball reaches the left side area 484a at the arrival timing C. Therefore, if the timing when the game ball reaches the left side region 484a and the timing when the movable portion 483 is located in the left side region 484a match, the ball can enter the V region 434D.

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413D cannot enter any of the V areas 435A and 435B at the timing when the game ball reaches the right side area 484c at the arrival timing D. That is, when the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 413D, the number of rounds that can be obtained is high (16R) as shown in FIG. 7A, but the V prize cannot be generated.

From the above, it is appropriate for the player by increasing the winning rate to the V area 435 even if the number of rounds that can be obtained is low, while lowering the winning rate to the V area 435 even if the number of rounds that can be obtained is high. It is possible to make it easier to play a game in a probable state by ejecting a ball.

In the gaming machine of the first embodiment, the number of rounds due to the passage of the winning combination gate 413 and the presence or absence of the probability change state depending on the presence or absence of the passage of the V winning sensor 433 are determined by one gaming ball. The machine is different from the game machine of the first embodiment in that it is necessary to separate the game balls for each of the number of rounds and the determination of the presence or absence of the probability change state.

The game board of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 51 is a front view of the game board 30 of the fourth embodiment. FIG. 52 (a) is a perspective view of the advantageous game state transition transition ball entry portion 411 viewed from diagonally above, and FIG. 52 (b) is a perspective view of the specific game state transition transition ball entry portion 431 viewed from diagonally above. is there.

In the game board 30 of the present embodiment, the variable display device unit 35 is arranged in the center of the game board 30, which is advantageous to the left game area 30al provided on the left side of the variable display device unit 35. Is provided, and a specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431 is provided in the right game area 30ar provided on the right side of the variable display device unit 35.

Also in this embodiment, after it is confirmed that the jackpot will be a big hit, it is confirmed that the game ball enters the advantageous gaming state transition entry unit 411 to shift to the jackpot gaming state, and the specific gaming state transition entry When the game ball enters the ball unit 431, it is determined whether or not the next game state shifts to the probabilistic state after the jackpot game state ends.

The ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is provided with a jackpot round number distribution accessory 415a including a plurality of combination gates 413A to 413D configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment. However, in this embodiment, unlike the first embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 is not guided to the V region 435 side and is discharged as it is. When one game ball is guided to the combination gate 413 side while the induction valve 451 is open, the induction valve 451 is closed and the second and subsequent game balls are guided to the discharge path 458. The game ball guided to the discharge path 458 is guided to the warp passage 48 leading to the stage portion 47B arranged below the third symbol display device 42, and is guided to the stage portion 47B.

The ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state is configured to be different from that of the first embodiment. That is, in the specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431, a plurality of V regions 435A to 435D are arranged side by side at positions where a game ball flowing down the right game region 30ar can enter. A plurality of nails 39 are arranged upstream of the V region 435, and the traveling direction is changed to the left or right while delaying the flow speed of the game ball flowing down the right game area 30ar by the plurality of nails 39. While letting the game ball flow down. That is, a plurality of nails 39 arranged upstream of the V region 435 act as protrusions 475a of the second guide portion 475. Here, it is assumed that it takes about 6 seconds for the right-handed game ball to reach the V regions 435A to 435D.

The guidance levers 437A to 437D that guide the game ball to the V regions 435A to 435D in the open state and close the V regions 435A to 435D in the closed state are configured to advance and retreat in the horizontal direction from the board surface. The induction levers 437A to 437D are provided with an induction lever drive mechanism 438 configured in the same manner as in the first embodiment. When the guide lever 437 is opened, an opening is formed in each of the V regions 435 having an opening width of about 12 mm so that one game ball can be inserted. The induction lever 437 switches between the open state and the closed state at once in a short moment of about 1 second. The induction lever 437 is driven so as to close the V region 435 in the order of the induction lever 437A, the induction lever 437B, the induction lever 437C, and the induction lever 437D. Even when the guide lever 437 is in the closed state, the guide lever 437 may be tilted downward to the left so that the game balls do not accumulate above the guide lever 437.

The large winning opening 32a is arranged on the right side of the V region 435. A game ball launched with the game ball launch handle 18 turned to the right as much as possible can enter the grand prize opening 32a. A game ball launched with a weaker force than that of a game ball entering the large winning opening 32a can enter the V region 435.

When it is detected that the right-handed notification has passed through the combination gates 413A to 413D, the redisplay voice is output almost at the same time.

Next, the jackpot game state lottery process of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery process. In addition, the same reference numerals are used for the parts common to the jackpot game state lottery process of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 18, and duplicate explanations are omitted.

The point that the jackpot game state lottery process of this embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, when the fluctuation display is confirmed by the jackpot (at the time of step S511), the induction valve 451 is opened instead of opening the V region 435 (step S515). In this embodiment, the V region 435 is not opened when the fluctuation display is confirmed as a big hit, but the V region 435 is opened after passing through the winning combination gate 413 (step S537A). Thereby, the games can be performed in the correct order, that is, in the order of first aiming at the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 and then aiming at the specific game state transition entry ball 431. After that, each V region 435 is closed at each set closing timing (step S537B).

Next, the relationship between the closing timing of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 54 is a closing timing setting table for each V region 435. FIG. 55 is a time chart of the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 and the guidance lever 437 that closes the V region 435.

When the game ball passes through the combination gate 413A, the guidance lever 437A closes 10 seconds after the passage detection, the guidance lever 437B closes 12 seconds after the passage detection, and the guidance lever 437C closes 14 seconds after the passage detection. , The induction lever 437D closes 16 seconds after the passage is detected. Since the right-handed game ball reaches the V regions A to E in about 6 seconds, the player has a margin of 4 seconds from the time the game ball passes through the role-matching gate 413A until the right-handed game ball starts to hit right.

Therefore, for example, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the winning combination gate 413A, the player confirms that the right-handed hit has been notified and at the same time starts right-handed hitting, about 8 seconds after the passing detection. Later, the right-handed game ball reaches the V regions 435A to 435D. That is, when the right-handed game ball reaches the V regions 435A to 435D, the V regions 435A to 435D are all left in the open state, so that the right-handed game ball is placed in any of the V regions 435A to 435D. Even if it reaches, it can enter the V region 435A to 435D.

When the game ball passes through the combination gate 413B, the guidance lever 437A closes 8 seconds after the passage detection, the guidance lever 437B closes 10 seconds after the passage detection, and the guidance lever 437C closes 12 seconds after the passage detection. , The induction lever 437D closes 14 seconds after the passage is detected. The player has a margin of 2 seconds from the time when the game ball passes through the role-matching gate B until the right-handed start is started. That is, since the margin time is shorter than when passing through the winning combination gate 413A, the winning rate to the V region 435 tends to be lower than when passing through the winning combination gate 413A.

When the game ball passes through the combination gates 413C and 413D, the guidance lever 437A closes 6 seconds after the passage detection, the guidance lever 437B closes 8 seconds after the passage detection, and the guidance lever 437C closes 10 seconds after the passage detection. It closes, and the induction lever 437D closes 12 seconds after the passage is detected, and the induction lever 437D closes 14 seconds after the passage is detected. The player has almost no time to spare from the time when the game ball passes through the combination gates 413C and 413D until the right-handed start.

Therefore, when the player detects that the game ball has passed through the winning gates 413C and 413D and confirms that the right-handed hit notification has been given and at the same time starts the right-handed hit, the right-handed game ball is V. When the area 435 is reached, the V area 435A is already closed, so the ball falls into the game area 30a without entering the V area 435A. In this way, the right-handed game ball can enter the V region 435 only when it reaches any of the V regions 435B, 435C, and 435D. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the winning gates 413C and 413D, the winning rate to the V region 435 is the lowest.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won in this embodiment will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the V prize is not won.

In the third symbol display device 42, the variation effect of the third symbol is displayed from the start of the variation of the third symbol until it is determined whether the combination is the same as the jackpot combination or the combination is out of order. In the third symbol display device 42, when the jackpot combination by the third symbol (for example, "7", "7", "7") is confirmed, the effect of congratulating the jackpot (for example, "Congratulations on the jackpot") is displayed (FIG. 56 (a)).

Next, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image for firing the game ball by hitting right (FIG. 56 (b)). For example, in the third symbol display device 42, "Gate OPEN!" Is displayed indicating that the induction valve has been opened, and "Aim for the crune with a left-handed strike!" Is displayed indicating that the ball can be entered into the crune. Will be done. In addition, the third symbol display device 42 also displays an image showing the correspondence between the four holes of the crune and the number of jackpot rounds.

Here, the case where the game ball passes through the combination gate 413A will be described. In the third symbol display device 42, after passing through the winning combination gate 413A, an image of "16R acquisition!" Showing the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413A through which the game ball has passed is displayed (FIG. 56 (c)). In addition, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "Aim for V prize by hitting right!" And an image showing the time until each V region 435 is closed (FIG. 56 (d)). When passing through the combination gate 413A, "A: OPEN: 10 seconds after closing" is displayed for V area 435A, and "B: OPEN: 12 seconds after closing" is displayed for V area 435B. "C: During OPEN: 14 seconds after closing" is displayed for the V region 435C, and "D: During OPEN: 16 seconds after closing" is displayed for the V region 435D.

The image showing the time until the V region 435 is closed is counted down as the time elapses. When the game ball enters the V region 435, an image of "V prize!" Showing that the V prize has been won is displayed (FIG. 56 (e)).

A case where the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 413C and does not win a V prize will be described with reference to FIG. 57. When the game ball passes through the combination gate 413C, "A: OPEN: 6 seconds after closing" is displayed for V area 435A, and "B: OPEN: 8 seconds after closing" is displayed for V area 435B. It is displayed, and "C: OPEN: 10 seconds after closing" is displayed for V area 435C, and "D: OPEN: 12 seconds after closing" is displayed for V area 435D (FIG. 57 (d). )). When the game ball passes through the combination gate 413C, the V region 435A cannot enter the ball at the timing when the game ball first arrives. The image showing the time until closure is displayed as "A: CLOSE: 0 seconds after closure", "B: OPEN: 2 seconds after closure" for V region 435B, and "2 seconds after closure" for V region 435C. "C: During OPEN: 4 seconds after closing" is displayed, and for V region 435D, "D: During OPEN: 6 seconds after closing" is displayed (FIG. 57 (e)). At this time, in the image of the ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state displayed on the third symbol display device 42, the image corresponding to 435A on the left side is colored in a predetermined color, and the guide lever 437A is closed to V. It shows that the ball cannot enter the area 435A.

Finally, when the game ball does not enter any of the V regions 435 and all the V regions 435 are closed, the image of the specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431 displayed on the third symbol display device 42. Is displayed that the image corresponding to the induction lever 437 of all V regions 435 is colored in a predetermined color, the induction lever 437 is closed, and the ball cannot enter all V regions 435 (Fig.). 57 (f)). When all the guide levers 437 are closed, the third symbol display device 42 does not receive a V prize due to the lapse of the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the V region 435. A text image is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is determined to be the time from the passage of the winning combination gates 413A to 413D in the left game area 30al in the jackpot game state lottery process. The V regions 435A to 435D in the right gaming region 30ar are also changed by satisfying the above conditions (for example, the gaming machine according to (B0) described above). That is, by setting the predetermined condition to be established as an opportunity to change the V region 435 to be the time from the passage of the combination gates 413A to 413D, the V is triggered by the time from the passage of the combination gates 413A to 413D. Since the ease of entering the area 435 can be changed, the expectation for the transition to the specific gaming state differs depending on the time from the passage of the winning combination gates 413A to 413D, and the gaming state is advantageous for the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the time when the game ball flowing down the game area 30a is detected to pass through the winning combination gates 413A to 413D in the jackpot game state lottery process (first measurement). (Function), the first measurement function enables control so as to start a change in the V region 435 (closing operation of the induction lever 437) when a predetermined time is measured from the passage of the combination gates 413A to 413D (for example, described above). (B1). According to such a configuration, the change of the V region 435 causes the game ball to pass through the V region 435 at the timing when the game ball reaches the V region 435 according to the time from the passage of the combination gates 413A to 413D. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not it is within the permissible range.

In the gaming machine according to the fourth embodiment, the measurement of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 from the time when the jackpot confirmation display of the third symbol is displayed until the V region 435 is closed by the induction lever 437 has been started. The pachinko and pachislot machine of the fourth embodiment is different from the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment in that the measurement of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is started before the jackpot confirmation display of the third symbol.

The game board 30 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a front view of the game board 30 of the fifth embodiment. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the advantageous gaming state transition transition ball entry section 411, the specific game state transition transition ball entry section 431, and their surroundings as viewed from diagonally above, and FIG. 59A shows before the jackpot is confirmed, and (b). ) Indicates after the jackpot is confirmed.

In the game board 30 of this embodiment, the ball entry section 411 for the advantageous game state transition and the ball entry section 431 for the specific game state transition are different from those of the above-described embodiment. That is, the ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state of this embodiment has a rolling region 417 in which the round number distribution bonus 415a is wider than that of the above-described embodiment. Therefore, the time required for the game ball rolling in the rolling region 417 to enter one of the winning combination gates 413 is more likely to be longer or shorter than that of the above-described embodiment. In this embodiment as well, it is also possible to adopt the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state of the above-described embodiment.

The specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431 of this embodiment does not have an advantageous route 472 and a V winning distribution unit 481. That is, in the specific game state transition entry section 431 of the present embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 is always guided to the specific area 435 such as the advantageous route 472 such as the combination gate 413A. The continuous gate 413 does not exist. Further, there is no V-winning distribution unit 481 that can pass through the discharge unit 484 only when riding on the movable unit 483 at the right time. However, since the five specific areas 435 are closed in order at a predetermined closing timing, the ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state corresponds to the timing when the game ball reaches the downstream end of the second guide surface 476. Only when the specific area 435 is maintained in the open state, the ball can be entered into the specific area 435. That is, the earlier the timing of reaching the downstream end of the second rolling surface 476, the higher the winning rate of the specific region 435.

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the V region 435 until the V region 435 is closed by the induction lever 437 is detected by the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 (each). It is determined at the start of fluctuation based on the passing detection of the winning sensor in the device), and the measurement of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is started from the start of fluctuation. When the number of holds is 0, the start winning prize and the fluctuation start time are almost the same, so the measurement is performed from the start winning prize of the special drawing 1 starting winning device 33a or the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b. .. If the number of holds is 1 or more, the measurement is started from the start of the fluctuation based on the start winning prize.

The maximum opening time of the V region 435 is, for example, that the closing operation of the guiding lever 435 is started when the guiding lever 435 is gradually closed from the time when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413. It is the time from time to the time when the induction lever 437 is completely closed regardless of the stage at which the induction lever 413 is closed. Further, the maximum opening time is, for example, when the induction lever 437 closes at once when the maximum opening time elapses, the induction lever 437 opens the V region 435 after the jackpot is confirmed and the induction lever 437 opens the V region 435. It may be the time until the 435 is closed at once.

Specifically, the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is a constant time such as 180 seconds from the start of fluctuation. The game board 30 in this embodiment is designed so that the longer the maximum opening time of the V area 435 is, the higher the winning rate in the V area is among the game boards 30 in the above-described embodiment. Is adopted. That is, the specific game state transition entry ball 431 in this embodiment has a longer remaining maximum opening time at the time of the jackpot confirmation display among the specific game state transition entry 431 in the above-described embodiment. The more it remains, the easier it is to enter the game ball, and the shorter the remaining time of the maximum opening time at the time of the jackpot confirmation display, the harder it is to enter the game ball.

That is, the longer the time from the start of the variable display to the confirmation of the variable display, the shorter the maximum opening time of the V region 435, and therefore the lower the winning rate in the V region 435. Further, the shorter the time from the start of the variable display to the confirmation of the variable display, the longer the maximum opening time of the V region 435, and therefore the higher the winning rate in the V region 435.

Whether or not the variable display takes a long time from the start of the variable display to the finalization of the variable display can be expected by the player depending on the content of the display effect executed according to the variable display.

For example, as will be described later, when a battle-type reach effect is executed according to a variable display, the reach effect is a big hit, a weak enemy character is displayed in the battle-type reach effect, or a player. The result of your own character defeating the enemy character will appear immediately. Therefore, the player can recognize that the time from the start of the variable display to the finalization of the variable display is short when the weak enemy character is displayed in the battle-type reach effect. As a result, when the player sees the battle-type reach effect, he / she can recognize that the winning rate in the V area 435 is high after the jackpot confirmation display.

Further, for example, when the battle-type reach effect is executed according to the variable display, the reach effect becomes a big hit, and when a strong enemy character is displayed in the battle-type reach effect, the player's own character It tends to take time to get the result of winning the enemy character. Therefore, the player can recognize that the variable display takes a long time from the start of the variable display to the finalization of the variable display when a strong enemy character is displayed in the battle-type reach effect. As a result, when the player sees the battle-type reach effect, he / she can recognize that the winning rate in the V area 435 is low after the jackpot confirmation display.

Further, the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is determined at the start of the fluctuation, the measurement of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is started from the start of the fluctuation, and the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is a constant time from the start of the fluctuation. By doing so, the display effect executed from the start of the variable display to the time when the game ball wins the V area 435 after the jackpot confirmation of the variable display can be executed as a series of display effects. A series of display effects is a battle-type effect that continues to the battle effect from the jackpot confirmation to the V prize if the battle-type reach effect is executed from the start of the variable display to the confirmation of the variable display. Is executed as. As a result, the display effect from the start of the variable display to the finalization of the variable display and the display effect from the final display of the jackpot to the V prize can be integrated in content, and the V after the finalized jackpot display is displayed. It is possible to improve the interest of the display production until the prize is won.

The configuration for realizing these features of this embodiment will be described below.

Next, the first symbol change start processing of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the first symbol variation start processing. The point that the first symbol change start processing of this Example is different from Example 1 will be described.

After the fluctuation start processing is performed in step S406, the CPU 501 of the main control unit 261 performs a V closing start processing that starts closing the specific area 435 in step S406A.

Next, the V closure start processing of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the V closing start process.

In step S512A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not it is the fluctuation start timing of the first symbol. If it is the fluctuation start timing of the first symbol, the process proceeds to step S512B, and if not, the present process ends. In step S512B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 releases each of the induction levers 437 of the five V regions 435 at once. In step S512C, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the closing timing of each of the five V regions 435. In step S512D, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the V closing timer. The closure of V region 435 is started. As described above, in this embodiment, the closing timing of the V region 435 is set according to the fluctuation start timing of the first symbol.

Next, the jackpot game state lottery process of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery process. The point that the jackpot game state lottery process of this embodiment is different from that of the first embodiment will be described.

When the jackpot game state lottery flag is turned on in step S511, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 opens the induction valve 451 in step S515 because the jackpot is confirmed. When the jackpot game state lottery flag is off (step S511: No), since the deviation is confirmed, the V region 435 is completely closed in order to end the closing operation of the specific region 435 that was performed during the start of the fluctuation. (Step S554). Further, in order to end the measurement of the timer for closing the V switch, the timer is returned to 0 (step S555).

Next, the closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435 of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 63A is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region 435, FIG. 63B is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and FIG. 63C is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. The points that the closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435 of this embodiment are different from those of the first embodiment will be described.

As shown in FIG. 63 (a), the V regions 435A to 435E are closed at a speed at which the game ball is closed to a width of 10 mm, which prevents the game ball from entering, 30 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 63 (b), the V regions 435A to 435E are opened at the start of the fluctuation of the first symbol.

As shown in FIG. 63 (c), the V region 435A starts the closing operation 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the V region 435E starts the closing operation 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the V region 435B changes. The closing operation is started 90 seconds after the start, the closing operation of the V region 435D is started 120 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and the closing operation of the V region 435C is started 150 seconds after the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 of this embodiment wins the V region 435 will be described. FIG. 64 is a time chart showing the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 wins the V region 435.

At the same time as the fluctuation of the first symbol starts, the V regions 435A to 435E are opened. The V region 435A starts closing 30 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and cannot enter the ball 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The V region 435E starts closing 60 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and cannot enter the ball 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The V region 435B starts closing 90 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and cannot enter the ball 120 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The V region 435D starts closing 120 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and cannot enter the ball 150 seconds after the start of fluctuation. The V region 435C starts closing 150 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and cannot enter the ball 180 seconds after the start of fluctuation.

The time required for the game ball to pass through the round distribution accessory 415a of the distribution mechanism 415 of the ball entry unit 411 for the advantageous game state transition varies depending on the round distribution accessory 415a, but for convenience of explanation, it is a big hit. The game ball is launched at the same time as the jackpot is confirmed, passes through the induction valve 451 3 seconds after the jackpot is confirmed, passes through the role gate 413 18 seconds after the jackpot is confirmed, and 24 seconds after the jackpot is confirmed, the second rolling surface 476. It shall reach the downstream end.

When the jackpot super reach A and B are confirmed, the jackpot is confirmed 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 54 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the game ball passing through the combination gate 413 reaches the downstream end of the second rolling surface 474. To do. At this time, when the jackpot super reach A and B are determined, the V regions 435 in which the game balls that have passed through the winning combination gate 413 can enter are all of the V regions 435A to 435E. From 54 seconds to 60 seconds after the start of this fluctuation, all five V regions 435 can enter the ball. Therefore, during this period, the ball can enter the V region 435 no matter where the game ball reaches the downstream end of the second rolling surface 476.

When the jackpot super reach C and D are confirmed, the jackpot is confirmed 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 84 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the game ball passing through the combination gate 413 reaches the downstream end of the second rolling surface 474. To do. At this time, when the jackpot super reach C and D are confirmed, the V region 435 in which the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 can enter is already in the V region 435A, so the V region 435B to 435E. is there. From 84 seconds to 90 seconds after the start of this fluctuation, the V regions 435B to 435E can enter the ball. Therefore, if the position corresponds to these V regions 435B to 435E during this period, the game ball that has reached the downstream end of the second rolling surface 476 can enter the V region 435B to 435E.

When the jackpot super reach E and F are confirmed, the jackpot is confirmed 150 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, and 174 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, the game ball passing through the combination gate 413 reaches the downstream end of the second rolling surface 474. To do. At this time, when the jackpot super reach E and F are determined, the V region 435 in which the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 can enter is already unable to enter the V region 435A, 435B, 435D, 435E. Only the V region 435C. The V region 435C can enter the ball only from 174 seconds to 180 seconds after the start of this fluctuation. Therefore, only the game ball that has reached the position corresponding to the V region 435C during this period can enter the V region 435C from the game ball that has reached the downstream end of the second rolling surface 476.

From the above, when the jackpot super reach A and B with a fluctuation time of 30 seconds are confirmed, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 almost always enters the V region 435, so that the winning rate to the V region 435 ( Ease of winning) is the highest. Next, when the jackpot super reach C and D with a fluctuation time of 60 seconds are determined, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 will be in the V region 435B to 435E if it reaches the position corresponding to the V region 435B to 435E. Since the ball is entered, the winning rate in the V region 435 is the second highest. Next, when the jackpot super reach E and F with a fluctuation time of 150 seconds are determined, the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 enters the V region 435C only when it reaches the position corresponding to the V region 435C. The winning rate to the V region 435 is the lowest because it cannot be made to. As described above, the shorter the fluctuation time of the jackpot super reach, the higher the winning rate in the V region 435.

Next, the relationship between the variation pattern of the main decorative pattern of this embodiment and the enemy character during the reach development effect will be described. FIG. 65 is a table for selecting an enemy character during the variation pattern of the main decorative symbol and the reach development effect.

In Super Reach A to F, a battle production is performed in which the own character and the enemy character compete against each other during the reach development production. Your character's victory corresponds to a jackpot, and your character's defeat corresponds to a loss. The own character image PY and the enemy character image TK are displayed on the third symbol display device 42. Enemy characters are classified into small bosses, medium bosses, and large bosses. Small boss A appears in Super Reach A, which has the lowest expectation for big hits. The middle boss A will appear in Super Reach C, which has the highest expectation of a big hit next to Super Reach A. The big boss will appear in Super Reach E and F, which have the highest expectations for big hits. Enemy characters also include Zako and Middle Boss B. Zako has the same fluctuation time as Super Reach A, but appears in Jackpot Super Reach B, which has a confirmed jackpot and a low appearance. The middle boss B also appears in the jackpot Super Reach D, which has the same fluctuation time as the Super Reach C, but has a confirmed jackpot and a low appearance.

The Zako is displayed as an enemy character image TK1 (for example, a small triangular character image). The small boss is displayed as an enemy character image TK2 (for example, a triangular character image larger than TK1). The middle boss A is displayed as an enemy character image TK3 (for example, a double triangle character image). The middle boss B is displayed as an enemy character image TK4 (for example, a triangular character image having a white triangle). The large boss is displayed as an enemy character image TK5 (for example, a triangular character image having a black triangle).

Further, as an enemy character not included in the selection table shown in FIG. 65, the final boss displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in the game of determining whether or not the probability change state is attached, which is performed after the hit is confirmed ( Below, there is also a last boss). The last boss is displayed as an enemy character image TK6 (for example, a triangular character image having an inverted triangle).

In this way, since the enemy character image TK is related to the jackpot expectation and the time of the variable display effect, the player is given the time of the jackpot expectation and the variable display effect when the enemy character image TK is viewed. It suggests how much it is. It should be noted that the enemy character image TK and the jackpot expectation degree and the time of the variable display effect are not determined by a one-to-one relationship, but may be a relationship that the predetermined jackpot expectation degree and the variable display effect time are likely to occur.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach A and B to the time of winning V will be described. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach A to the end of the reach development effect. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach B to the end of the reach development effect. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot of Super Reach A and B is confirmed to the time when V is won.

See FIG. 66. As shown in (a) and (b), when a game ball enters the special figure 1 start winning device 33a or the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b, the third symbol display device 42 changes the third symbol. The display starts. Before the start of the fluctuation shown in (a), the V light emitting regions 436A to 436E of the ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state were turned off, but after the start of the fluctuation shown in (b), the V light emitting region 436 was turned on. This suggests which V region 435 is open.

(C) As shown in (d), 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, the reach display of the third symbol (for example, the reach of the "7" symbol) changes to the reach development effect of the development symbol, like "Super Reach A". The name of the reach development effect (for example, the confrontation reach of XX) is displayed. Further, as the enemy character corresponding to this reach development effect, the enemy character image TK2 corresponding to the small boss is displayed. When the jackpot Super Reach A is executed, as shown in (e), 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, as a result of the confrontation, the result that the own character image RY wins the enemy character image TK2 is displayed, and the development pattern is displayed. For example, the jackpots aligned with "7" are displayed. When the out-of-order Super Reach A is executed, as shown in (f), 30 seconds after the start of the fluctuation, as a result of the confrontation, the result that the own character image RY is defeated by the enemy character image TK2 is displayed, and the development pattern is displayed. For example, the out-of-order symbol "6" is displayed.

Thirty seconds after the start of fluctuation, all V light emitting regions 436 continue to be lit. Therefore, it is suggested that the winning rate to the V region 435 is high when the big hit is achieved in the variable display effect in which the enemy character image TK2 is displayed.

See FIG. 67. When the jackpot super reach B is executed, the jackpot becomes a jackpot in the same manner as the jackpot super reach A. The enemy character TK1 is a Zako image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed. When the ally character wins the enemy character TK1, all the V light emitting areas 436 are lit. Therefore, it is suggested that the jackpot is confirmed in the variable display effect in which the enemy character TK1 is displayed, and the winning rate in the V region 435 that occurs subsequently is high.

See FIG. 68. In the jackpot super reach A and B described above, after the jackpot of the developed symbol is displayed, the jackpot confirmation of the third symbol is displayed as shown in (a). Next, as shown in (b), the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 corresponding to the type of jackpot is displayed, and the opening of the induction valve 451 and the right-handed notification message are displayed. Forty-eight seconds after the start of the fluctuation, as shown in (c), it is notified that the gate 413A corresponding to the 16R has passed.

In this embodiment, as shown in (d), after the game ball has passed through the role-matching gate 413, a battle effect that is related to the battle effect that was executed during the variable display effect is executed. For example, if the ally character defeats the last boss character, it is notified that V has been acquired (a probable change state occurs). Specifically, as shown in (e), when it is detected that the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 has entered the V region 435, the own character P image Y is an enemy character corresponding to the last boss. An image indicating that the image TK6 has been won is displayed. After that, as shown in (f), the message "V acquisition! Congratulations" is displayed to congratulate the V prize.

In jackpot super reach A and B, all V areas 435 are open at the timing when the game ball that has passed through the role-ream gate 413 reaches the downstream end of the second rolling surface 476, so the own character at that time. An image in which the image PY displays an image that is likely to win the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss, and confirms the victory when the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor 433 (for example, glittering around the own character image PY). An image that makes it shine) may be displayed.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach C and D to the time of winning V will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach C to the end of the reach development effect. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach D to the end of the reach development effect. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot of Super Reach C and D is confirmed to the time when V is won.

An example in which Super Reach C is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 69. Here, the explanation starts from the start timing of the reach development production. As shown in (a), "Super Reach C" is displayed 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the enemy character image TK3 corresponding to the middle boss A is displayed. The fluctuation time of Super Reach C is 60 seconds, which is longer than the fluctuation time of Super Reach A (30 seconds). As shown in (b) and (c), the image in which the own character image PY and the enemy character image TK3 confront each other continues even when 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation and 50 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. From this, it is suggested to the player that the fluctuation time of the enemy character image TK3 is likely to be long.

As shown in (d), in the case of the jackpot super reach C, an image in which the ally character image PY wins the enemy character image TK3 corresponding to the middle boss A is displayed 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. In the case of the out-of-order super reach C, as shown in (e), the defeat image is displayed 60 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. Since the V region 435A is in a non-entry state at the timing when 60 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the V light emitting region 436A corresponding to the V region 435A among the V light emitting regions 436 is turned off. From this, when the enemy character image TK3 is displayed, it is easy to suggest to the player that the winning rate in the V region 435 is likely to be lower than that in the jackpot super reach A and B. Since the player can actually see the non-entry state of the V area 435A, the relationship between the enemy character image TK3 and the winning rate to the V area 435 is suggested even if the V light emitting area 436 is not lit. ing.

See FIG. 70. When the jackpot super reach D is executed, the jackpot becomes a jackpot in the same manner as the jackpot super reach C. The enemy character TK3 corresponding to the middle boss B is an image suggesting that the jackpot is confirmed. When the ally character wins the enemy character TK3, the V light emitting areas 436B to 436E are lit. Therefore, it is suggested that the jackpot is confirmed in the variable display effect in which the enemy character TK3 is displayed, and the winning rate in the V region 435 that occurs subsequently is relatively high.

See FIG. 71. In the case of the jackpot super reach C and D, as shown in the jackpot super reach A and B, the game ball is passed through the combination gate 413 as shown in (a) to (c). Here, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the role gate 413C. As shown in (d), after the game ball passes through the role gate 413C, a battle effect in which the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss appears is executed. If the game ball that has passed through the role gate 413C enters any of the V areas 435B to 435E, as shown in (e), the own character image PY has won the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss. The image shown is displayed.

If the game ball that has passed through the role-ream gate 413C falls into the V region 435A in which the ball cannot enter, the game ball rolls on the upper surface of the closed guidance lever 437 and falls into the game area 30a, and the out port. The ball is detected by the detection sensor in 36. At this time, when the ball is detected at the out port 36, an image showing that the own character image PY has been defeated by the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss is displayed. It should be noted that a detection sensor for detecting a game ball falling into the game area 30a is provided instead of the ball entry detection at the out port 36, and an image showing that the enemy character image TK6 has been defeated is displayed based on the ball entry detection. It may be displayed. Further, the game ball that rolls on the upper surface of the closed guide lever 437 may be discharged to the outside without falling into the game area 30a. The detection sensor may also serve as a normal winning sensor 434.

Further, in the jackpot super reach C and D, at the timing when the game ball passing through the role-ream gate 413 reaches the downstream end of the second rolling surface 476, the own character image PY and the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss are combined. An image in which the game is likely to be settled may be displayed, and an image in which the victory is confirmed when the game ball is detected by the V winning sensor (for example, an image in which the surroundings of the own character image PY shine brilliantly) may be displayed. If there is no ball entry detection by the V prize sensor during the period when this game ball will be detected by the V prize sensor, an image that is likely to be defeated is displayed on the own character image PY and the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss. , An image (for example, an image that illuminates around the enemy character image TK6) is displayed when it is confirmed that there is no ball entry detection at the out port 36 or ball entry detection at the V winning sensor 433. You may.

Next, the display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach E to the time of winning V will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the start of fluctuation of the super reach E to the end of the reach development effect. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot of Super Reach E is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won.

An example in which the jackpot super reach E is executed will be described with reference to FIG. 72. Here, the explanation starts from the start timing of the reach development production. As shown in (a), "Super Reach E" is displayed 10 seconds after the start of fluctuation, and the enemy character image TK5 corresponding to the large boss is displayed. The fluctuation time of Super Reach D is 150 seconds. As shown in (b) to (e), the image in which the own character image PY and the enemy character image TK5 confront each other continues even when 2 minutes have passed from the start of the fluctuation from 10 seconds after the start of the fluctuation. From this, it is suggested to the player that the fluctuation time of the enemy character image TK5 corresponding to the big boss is likely to be very long.

As shown in (f), in the case of jackpot super reach E, an image in which the ally character image PY wins the enemy character image TK5 corresponding to the big boss is displayed 2 minutes and 30 seconds (150 seconds) after the start of fluctuation. To. At the timing when 150 seconds have passed from the start of the fluctuation, the V regions 435A, 435B, 435D, and 435E are in a non-entry state. Further, of the V light emitting region 436, only the V light emitting region 436C corresponding to the V region 435C is lit. From these facts, it is suggested to the player that when the enemy character image TK5 corresponding to the big boss is displayed, the winning rate to the V area 435 is likely to be very low.

See FIG. 73. In the case of the jackpot super reach E as well, as shown in (a) to (c), the game ball is passed through the combination gate 413. Here, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the role gate 413A. As shown in (d), after the game ball has passed through the role gate 413A, a battle effect in which the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss appears is executed. When the game ball that has passed through the role gate 413A enters the V region 435C, an image showing that the own character image PY has won the enemy character image TK6 corresponding to the last boss is displayed as shown in (e). To. However, if it falls into the V region 435 other than the V region 435C, the V prize cannot be obtained, so it is suggested that the possibility of winning in this confrontation is low.

In this way, the player is suggested to have a jackpot expectation and a length of time for the variable display effect depending on the type of the enemy character image TK that appears in the battle effect executed in the reach development effect of the variable display effect. In addition, the length of time of the suggested variable display effect suggests the winning rate for the V region 435 in the game in which the V region 435 is won after the jackpot is confirmed. As a result, the player can play the game with a feeling of expectation for winning the V region 435 from the middle of the variable display effect.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment,
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
The jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 capable of shifting to the jackpot round game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the combination gate 413, and the jackpot game state lottery process.
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability, and the state shifts to the high probability state. The next game state setting process to be executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided.
The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a function of changing the V region 435 when a predetermined condition of time from the start of fluctuation is satisfied (for example, the gaming machine according to (B0) described above).

According to such a configuration, by setting a predetermined condition to be established as an opportunity to change the V region 435 to the time from the start of the fluctuation, the ball enters the V region 435 according to the time from the start of the fluctuation. Since the ease of use can be changed, it is possible to improve the interest in the transition to the gaming state that is advantageous to the player by changing the expectation for the transition to the specific gaming state according to the time from the start of the fluctuation. Can be done.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the time from the start of fluctuation when the game ball passes through the winning sensor of the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 in the V closing start process. When the measurement is started and a predetermined time of, for example, 30 seconds, 60 seconds, 90 seconds, 120 seconds, 150 seconds is measured from the start of fluctuation, the change in the V region 435A to 435E (closing operation of the induction levers 437A to 437E) is performed. It can be controlled to start (for example, the gaming machine according to (B1) described above). According to such a configuration, when the fluctuation display becomes a big hit, the change of the V region 435 changes to the V region 435 at the timing when the game ball reaches the V region 435 according to the time from the start of the fluctuation. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the ball is within the allowable range.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a time from the start of fluctuation when the game ball passes through the winning sensor of the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 in the V closing start process. The measurement of the maximum opening time of the V region 435) is started, and when a specific time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) is measured from the start of the fluctuation, the game ball is controlled so as not to enter the V region 435. According to such a configuration, the game is played in the V region 435 from the time when the winning sensor of the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is passed to the time when the maximum opening time of the V region 435 elapses. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that the ball must be inserted while the variable display is being executed.

In the gaming machines of the first to fourth embodiments, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes through the winning combination gate 413, the gaming machine passes through the winning combination gate 413 when the gaming ball passes through the winning combination gate 413. The number of rounds in the jackpot round game state generated based on the above is uniquely determined, but in the gaming machine of this embodiment, when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, the number of rounds in the combination gate 413 is passed. It is different from the gaming machines of Examples 1 to 4 in that the number of rounds in the jackpot round gaming state generated based on the lottery is drawn.

The ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 74 is a perspective view of the advantageous gaming state transition entry section 411, the specific gaming state transition entry section 431, and their surroundings as viewed from diagonally above, and FIG. 74A is a perspective view before the jackpot is confirmed. Shown, (b) shows after the jackpot is confirmed.

The ball entry section 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state of this embodiment includes two combination gates 413E and combination gates 413F. The game ball that has passed through the Yuren Gate 413E is guided to the advantageous route 472. The timing at which the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413E reaches the V region 435 is 3.8 to 3.9 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413E (V area 435A cannot enter the ball). Before becoming). The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413F is guided by the first guide portion 473 and flows down the second guide portion 476 in which a large number of protrusions 476a are arranged to reach the discharge portion 484, as in the first embodiment. To do.

Next, the jackpot game state processing of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery process. The difference between the jackpot game state lottery process of the present embodiment and the jackpot game state lottery process of the first embodiment (FIG. 18) will be described.

In step S525A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the fluxgate sensor 414E that detects the game ball that has passed through the fluxgate 413E is turned on. In step S527A, when the combination gate sensor 414E is on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 acquires a round number lottery random number for drawing the number of rounds of the jackpot round game. In step S527B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the number of rounds corresponding to the acquired number of rounds by referring to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 jackpot lottery table shown in FIG. 76, which will be described later. ..

In step S531A, when the combination gate sensor 414E is not on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the combination gate sensor 414F for detecting the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413F is on. In step S533A, when the combination gate sensor 414F is on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 acquires a round number lottery random number for drawing the number of rounds of the jackpot round game. In step S533B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the number of rounds corresponding to the acquired number of rounds lottery random numbers with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 jackpot lottery table.

Next, the jackpot lottery table will be described as being different from the jackpot lottery table of the first embodiment. FIG. 76 is a big hit lottery table, (a) shows a special figure 1 big hit lottery table, and (b) shows a special figure 2 big hit lottery table.

See FIG. 76 (a). In this embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 jackpot, when the winning combination gate 413E is passed, the round number lottery random numbers 1 to 10 for passing the winning combination gate 413E are acquired. In the case of the second and third big hits, when the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 1 to 5, 2R is distributed to the winning combination gate E, and the occurrence of the probability change state is confirmed as described later. On the other hand, when the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, 2R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413E, but the normal winning is confirmed. In the case of the first big hit, when the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 1 to 5, 2R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413E, and the occurrence of the probability change state is confirmed as described later. On the other hand, when the random number for the round number lottery is 6 to 10, 8R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413E, but the normal winning is confirmed. In this way, when the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 413E, the number of jackpot rounds is distributed to either 2R or 8R. Further, when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413E, it is distributed to either the probability change confirmation or the normal confirmation.

In the case of a special figure 1 jackpot, when passing through the winning combination gate 413F, random numbers 1 to 10 for lottery for the number of rounds for passing through the winning combination gate 413F are acquired. In the case of the third big hit, if the round number lottery random number is 1 to 5, 2R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F, and if the round number lottery random number is 6 to 10, 8R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F. In the case of the second big hit, if the round number lottery random number is 1 to 5, 2R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F, and if the round number lottery random number is 6 to 10, 16R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F. In the case of the first big hit, if the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 1 to 5, 8R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F, and if the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, 16R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F. In this way, when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413F, the number of jackpot rounds is distributed to a larger number than when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413E. It should be noted that the presence or absence of the occurrence of the probability variation state is not determined at this point, as in the case of passing through the combination gates 413B to 413D of the first embodiment.

See FIG. 76 (b). In this embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 jackpot, when the winning combination gate 413E is passed, the round number lottery random numbers 1 to 10 for passing the winning combination gate 413E are acquired. In the case of the second and third big hits, when the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 1 to 5, 8R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413E, and the occurrence of the probability change state is confirmed as described later. On the other hand, when the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, 2R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413E, but the normal winning is confirmed. In the case of the first big hit, when the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 1 to 5, 8R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413E, and the occurrence of the probability change state is confirmed as described later. On the other hand, when the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, 16R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413E, but the normal winning is confirmed.

In the case of the special figure 2 big hit, when passing through the winning combination gate 413F, the round number lottery random numbers 1 to 10 for passing through the winning combination gate 413F are acquired. In the case of the second and third big hits, if the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 1 to 5, 8R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F, and if the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, 16R is assigned to the winning combination gate 413F. It is sorted. In the case of the first big hit, when the random numbers for the number of rounds lottery are 1 to 5 and 6 to 10, 16R is distributed to the winning combination gate 413F. In this way, in the case of the special figure 2 jackpot, when the game ball passes through the winning combination gate 413F, the number of jackpot rounds is larger than that in the case of the special drawing 1 jackpot, and the winning combination gate 413E is played. A larger number of rounds is distributed than when the ball passes. Whether or not a probabilistic state has occurred is not determined at this point.

In this way, the number of rounds is drawn in both the case of passing through the combination gate 413E and the case of passing through the combination gate 413F, but the case of passing through the combination gate 413F is the winning combination. It is set to have an advantageous distribution with a higher number of rounds than when passing through the continuous gate 413E. As a result, the player can see whether the player passes through the combination gate 413E or the combination gate 413F with excitement. Although the probability variation confirmation or the normal confirmation is set in the combination gate 413E, it may be set in the combination gate 413F. In this case, the player's feeling of excitement can be further increased.

Next, the closing speed and closing timing of the V region 435 will be described. In FIG. 77, (a) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region 435, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region 435, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region 435. is there.

See FIG. 77 (a). When passing through the winning combination gate 413E and acquiring random numbers 1 to 5 for the number of rounds lottery, and when passing through the winning combination gate 413F, the random numbers 1 to 5 and 6 to 10 for the number of rounds lottery When acquired, the game balls cannot enter the V regions 435A to 435E 4 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state, as in the closing speed of the V region 435 of the first embodiment. It is closed at a speed that allows it to be closed up to a width of 10 mm.

On the other hand, when the random numbers 6 to 10 for the number of rounds lottery are acquired even after passing through the combination gate 413E, the V regions 435A to 435E are closed from the completely opened state, and then 2 It is closed at a speed that closes the game ball to a width of 10 mm, which makes it impossible to enter the ball in seconds. In this way, when the random numbers 6 to 10 for the round number lottery are acquired even after passing through the winning combination gate 413E, the closing speed is significantly faster than usual.

As shown in FIG. 77 (b), the V regions 435A to 435E are closed during the normal state before the jackpot winning is confirmed, but are opened when the jackpot is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 77 (c), the number of rounds is drawn when the random numbers 1 to 5 for the number of rounds are obtained when the gate 413E is passed and when the random numbers 1 to 5 for the lottery are passed. When the random numbers 1 to 5 and 6 to 10 are acquired, the V region 435A starts the closing operation at the same time as the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V region 435E is the combination gate. The closing operation is started 4 seconds after the passage of the 413, the V region 435B is closed 8 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V region 435D is closed 12 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413. The operation is started, and the V region 435C is closed 16 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413.

On the other hand, when the winning combination gate 413E is passed and the round number lottery random numbers 6 to 10 are acquired, the closing operation is started at the same time when all the V regions 435 pass through the winning combination gate 413E. In this way, when the round number lottery random numbers 6 to 10 are acquired even after passing through the combination gate 413E, the closing speed is significantly faster than usual and all the V regions 435 are closed at the same time.

Next, the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 wins the V region 435 will be described. FIG. 78 is a time chart showing the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 wins the V region 435.

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413E is V at 3.8 to 3.9 seconds (hereinafter referred to as arrival timing E), which is before 4.0 seconds when the V region 435A cannot enter the ball. It is assumed that the area 435 is reached. It is assumed that the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413F reaches the central area 476b from the left side area 476a of the discharge unit 458 5 to 9 seconds after the passage detection of the combination gate 413F (hereinafter, arrival timing F).

The game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413E can enter all of the V regions 435A to 435E at the arrival timing E when the round number lottery random numbers 1 to 5 are acquired. However, when the round number lottery random numbers 6 to 10 are acquired, all the V regions 435A to 435E cannot enter the ball at the arrival timing E. In this way, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413E is determined to be probable when the round number lottery random numbers 1 to 5 are acquired, but when the round number lottery random numbers 6 to 10 are acquired, the game ball is confirmed. , It is usually confirmed.

When the round number lottery random numbers 1 to 5 and 6 to 10 are acquired, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413F has the timing at which the game ball reaches the left side area 476a and the central area 476b at the arrival timing F. If the timing with the movable portion 483 located in the left side region 476a and the central region 476b is matched, the ball can enter the V region 435B, the V region 435C, and the V region 435D. In this way, the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413F is set to be in a probable change state when the timing is correct.

As an example in which the winning rate in the V region 435 differs between the case of passing through the winning combination gate 413413E and the case of passing through the winning combination gate 413F, the winning rate in the V region 435 when passing through the winning combination gate 413E It is also possible to design the rate to be lower than the winning rate to the V region 435 when passing through the winning combination gate 413F. It is also possible to change the winning rate by making the diameters of the holes of the combination gate 413E and the combination gate 413F different.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment,
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
The main control that enables the game ball flowing down the game area 30a to shift to the jackpot round game state of the number of rounds corresponding to the acquired round number lottery random number by passing through either of the winning gates 413E and 413F. The jackpot game state lottery process (processes of steps S527A and 527B and steps S533A and 533B) executed by the CPU 501 of the device 261 and
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability. The next game state setting process (process of step S561 in FIG. 19) executed by the CPU 501 of the above is provided.
The passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on whether the passing location of the winning gate 413 is the winning gate 413E or 413F (for example, the gaming machine according to (A0)).

According to such a configuration, the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on whether the passing point of the winning combination gate 413 is the winning combination gate 413E or 413F. Depending on the presence, the player can be made to recognize the ease of passing through the V winning sensor 433. Therefore, the player can get a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the passing portion of the winning combination gate 413 of the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 30a is a portion easily passing through the V winning sensor 433. Further, if the passing portion of the winning combination gate 413 is a portion that easily passes through the V winning sensor 433 and the game ball can be passed through the V winning sensor 433, the player can pass the game ball to the V winning sensor 433 by himself / herself. You can get a feeling of self-help as if you passed through. As a result, it is possible to determine the ease of transition to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state without requiring a complicated program, and the interest in transitioning to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state can be obtained. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be improved.

The CPOU 501 of the main control device 261 makes it possible to shift to a jackpot round game state that is advantageous to the player by allowing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a to pass through the combination gate 413. By passing through any one of the gates 413, it may be possible not to shift to the big winning round gaming state which is advantageous to the player. As a result, the passage of the game ball through the role-matching gate 413 can be further noticed.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a can pass through an advantageous hole having a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) in the combination gates 413E and 413F. , The number of rounds is drawn by a lottery random number (for example, the gaming machine according to (A5)). According to such a configuration, it is possible for a game ball that has passed through the game area 30a to pass through an advantageous hole having a large number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) in the combination gates 413E and 413F without changing the structure. It is possible to change whether or not. In addition, it can be expected that the game ball will be in a jackpot round game state with a larger number of rounds from the time when the game ball passes through the winning gates 413E and 413F until the result of the lottery by the random number for the number of rounds is obtained.

In the sixth embodiment, the advantageous gaming state transition entry ball section 411 includes two combination gates 413E and 413F, but the advantageous gaming state transition entry section 411 has one combination gate 413G. It may be provided.

The ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the advantageous gaming state transition entry section 411, the specific gaming state transition entry section 431, and their surroundings as viewed from diagonally above, and FIG. 79A is a perspective view before the jackpot is confirmed. Shown, (b) shows after the jackpot is confirmed.

The ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state of the present embodiment includes one combination gate 413G and a movable portion 485 under the gate that plays a game ball that has passed through the gate combination gate 413G under the rolling region 417. .. The game ball that has passed through the Yuren Gate 413G is repelled by the movable portion 485 under the gate and guided in any of the left, center, and right directions of the first guide portion 473, and the protrusion 475a is arranged from each position. It is discharged to the second induction unit 475. The movable portion 485 under the gate includes a flat plate-shaped member for playing a game ball and a rotating mechanism (motor) for rotating a shaft portion that supports the member. The movable portion 485 under the gate is rotated at the same time as the movable portion 483 of the winning distribution portion 481 is rotated (for example, the jackpot is confirmed).

The second guide surface 476 of the second guide portion 475 is composed of a left guide surface 476A, a central guide surface 476B, and a right guide surface 476C. The central guide surface 476B is a region in which the game ball discharged from the central side of the first guide portion 473 flows down, and is a region having the smallest protrusion 475a among the three regions. The left guide surface 476A is a region where the game ball discharged from the left side of the first guide portion 473 flows down, and is a region where the protrusion 475a is the second smallest after the central guide surface 476B. The right guide surface 476C is a region in which the game ball discharged from the right side of the first guide portion 473 flows down, and is a region having the largest number of protrusions 475a among the three regions. Therefore, the timing at which the game ball flowing down the second guide surface 476 reaches the discharge portion 484 is the earliest for the game ball flowing down the central guide surface 476B, followed by the left side guide surface 476A and the right side guide surface 476C. .. The difference in arrival timing affects the winning rate in the V region 435 as described later.

The jackpot game state lottery process of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery process.

Next, the jackpot game state processing of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery process. The difference between the jackpot game state lottery process of the present embodiment and the jackpot game state lottery process of the first embodiment (FIG. 18) will be described.

In step S525B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the fluxgate sensor 414G for detecting the game ball that has passed through the fluxgate 413G is turned on. If the Fluxgate Compass 414G is not on, this process ends. In step S527C, when the combination gate sensor 414G is on, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 acquires a round number lottery random number for drawing the number of rounds of the jackpot round game. In step S527D, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 sets the number of rounds corresponding to the acquired number of rounds lottery random numbers with reference to the special figure 1 or special figure 2 jackpot lottery table.

The jackpot game state lottery table of this embodiment will be described. In FIG. 81, (a) is a special figure 1 big hit lottery table, and (b) is a special figure 2 big hit lottery table.

See FIG. 81 (a). In this embodiment, in the case of a special figure 1 jackpot, when passing through the winning combination gate 413G, random numbers 1 to 10 for round number lottery are acquired. In the case of the third big hit, if the round number lottery random number is 1 to 5, 2R is distributed, and if the round number lottery random number is 6 to 10, 8R is distributed. In the case of the second big hit, if the round number lottery random number is 1 to 5, 2R is distributed, and if the round number lottery random number is 6 to 10, 16R is distributed. In the case of the first big hit, if the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 1 to 5, 8R is distributed, and if the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, 16R is distributed.

In the case of the special figure 2 big hit, when passing through the winning combination gate 413G, random numbers 1 to 10 for round number lottery are acquired. In the case of the third big hit, if the round number lottery random number is 1 to 5, 8R is distributed, and if the round number lottery random number is 6 to 10, 16R is distributed. In the case of the second big hit, if the round number lottery random number is 1 to 5, 8R is distributed, and if the round number lottery random number is 6 to 10, 16R is distributed. In the case of the first big hit, 16R is fixed when the random numbers for the number of rounds lottery are all 1 to 10.

Next, the closing speed and closing timing of the V region will be described. In FIG. 82, (a) is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, (b) is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and (c) is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region.

As shown in FIG. 82 (a), when passing through the combination gate 413G, the game balls cannot enter the V regions 435A to 435E within 3 seconds after the closing operation starts from the completely opened state. It is closed at a speed that allows it to be closed up to a width of 10 mm.

As shown in FIG. 82 (b), the V regions 435A to 435E are closed during the normal state before the jackpot winning is confirmed, but are opened when the jackpot is confirmed.

As shown in FIG. 82 (c), when passing through the combination gate 413G, the V region 435A starts closing operation 3 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413G, and the V region 435E is the combination gate 413G. The closing operation is started 5 seconds after the passage, the V region 435B is closed 7 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413G, and the V region 435D is closed 9 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413G. The V region 435C is started, and the closing operation is started 11 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413G.

Next, the timing at which the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413G wins the V region 435 will be described. FIG. 83 is a time chart showing the timing at which the game ball passing through the winning combination gate 413G wins the V region 435.

In this embodiment, the game ball flowing down the central guide surface 476B reaches the central region 484b of the discharge unit 484 at a timing 5 to 7 seconds after the passage detection (hereinafter referred to as arrival timing G1). To do. It is assumed that the game ball flowing down the left guide surface 476A reaches the left region 484a of the discharge unit 484 at a timing 7 to 9 seconds after the passage detection (hereinafter referred to as arrival timing G2). It is assumed that the game ball flowing down the right guide surface 476C reaches the right region 484c of the discharge unit 484 at a timing 9 to 11 seconds after the passage detection (hereinafter referred to as arrival timing G3).

Since the game ball that flows down the central guide surface 476B (arriving at the arrival timing G1) has the shortest flow time, the V regions 435B, 435C, and 435D that can be positionedly entered if the timing with the movable portion 483 is matched. It is possible to enter all of the balls. The game ball flowing down the left guide surface 476A (arriving at the arrival timing G2) has the shortest flow time next to the central guide surface 476B, so if the timing with the movable portion 483 matches, the first half of the arrival timing G2 (passage detection). (7 to 8 seconds after), it is possible to enter both the V regions 435D and 435E where the ball can enter locally, but even in the latter half of the arrival timing G2 (8 to 9 seconds after the passage detection). For example, it is possible to enter only the V region 435D. The game ball that flows down the right guide surface 476C (arriving at the arrival timing G3) has the shortest flow time, so if the timing with the movable portion 483 matches, the first half of the arrival timing G3 (9 to 10 seconds after the passage detection). ) Only, it is possible to enter the V region 435B where the ball can be entered locally.

In this way, the winning rate of the game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413G to the V region 435 is highest when it flows down the central guide surface 476B and arrives at the arrival timing G1, and then flows down the left side guide surface 476A. It is designed so that the arrival timing G2 is high, and the arrival timing G3 is the lowest when the vehicle flows down the right guide surface 476C and arrives at the arrival timing G3.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment,
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that enables the game ball flowing down the game area 30a to shift to the jackpot round game state of the number of rounds corresponding to the acquired round number lottery random number by passing through the combination gate 413G. The jackpot game state lottery process to be executed (process of steps S527C and 527D) and
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability. The next game state setting process (process of step S561 in FIG. 19) executed by the CPU 501 of the above is provided.
The passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on whether the passing point (exit point) of the combination gate 413G is the left side, the center side, or the right side of the first guide portion 473 (for example, (A0)). The gaming machine described in).

According to such a configuration, the left side of the second guide surface 476 depends on whether the passage point (exit point) of the combination gate 413G is the left side, the center side, or the right side of the first guide portion 473. Which of the guide surface 476A, the central guide surface 476B, and the right side guide surface 476C flows down changes. The flow time differs depending on which of the left guide surface 476A, the center guide surface 476B, and the right guide surface 476C flows down. Due to the difference in the flow time, the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 also differs. As a result, the player can be made to recognize the ease of passing through the V winning sensor 433 depending on where the passing point (exit point) of the combination gate 413G is. Therefore, the player feels a sense of excitement as to whether or not the passing point of the winning combination gate 413G of the game ball flowing down the game area 30a is a place where it can easily pass to the V winning sensor 433 (for example, the center side of the first guide portion 473). Can be obtained. Further, if the passing point of the winning combination gate 413G is a place where the V winning sensor 433 can easily pass (for example, the center side of the first guide portion 473) and the game ball can be passed through the V winning sensor 433, the player Can obtain a feeling of self-help as if the game ball was passed through the V winning sensor 433 by itself. As a result, it is possible to determine the ease of transition to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state without requiring a complicated program, and the interest in transitioning to the jackpot round gaming state or the high-probability gaming state can be obtained. It is possible to provide a gaming machine that can be improved.

The CPOU 501 of the main control device 261 makes it possible to shift to a jackpot round game state that is advantageous to the player by allowing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a to pass through the combination gate 413. By passing through any one of the gates 413, it may be possible not to shift to the big winning round gaming state which is advantageous to the player. As a result, the passage of the game ball through the role-matching gate 413 can be further noticed.

Example 8 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 and 85. FIG. 84 (a) is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the eighth embodiment, and FIG. 84 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 85 is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the combination gate and a guide lever that closes the V region.

In the gaming machines of Examples 1 to 7, the V winning sensor 433 is used regardless of whether the result of the lottery based on the winning detection of the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is a big hit result. In this embodiment, the result of the lottery based on the winning detection of the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 is a big hit result, and the winning detection of the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is obtained. It is configured so that the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 changes depending on the case where the result of the lottery based on is the jackpot result. Further, in this embodiment, the winning combination gate 413 does not have the advantageous route 427 as in the first embodiment, and the result of the lottery based on the winning detection of the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 It is configured so that the ease of winning a prize in the V region 435 is different based on (type of jackpot).

In the jackpot determination process (step S501) performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through either the start prize device 33a for special figure 1 or the start prize device 33b for special figure 2. Then, it becomes possible to shift the gaming state to the jackpot round gaming state which is advantageous to the player. That is, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 shifts the gaming state to the jackpot round gaming state that is advantageous to the player if the result of the jackpot discrimination process is a jackpot, but if the result of the jackpot discrimination process is different, the gaming state Does not shift to the jackpot round game state.

The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, so that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 has a high probability from the value when the value is low. It shifts to a high probability state that is changed to the value of time. The passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on whether the passing location of the game ball is the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. In this embodiment, the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 is higher when the passing location is the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 than when the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 is passed. It is composed. The opposite may be true.

Specifically, when the result of the big hit lottery is the big hit result, there are cases where the passing location is the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 and the case where the starting winning device 33b for special figure 2 is the V area 435A. The closing patterns of the induction levers 437A to 437E that close the ~ 435E are different. When the passing location is the start winning device 33a for FIG. 1, the guide levers 437A to 437E operate as follows.

When the passing location is the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1, the induction lever 437A starts the closing operation at the same time as the passing of the winning combination gate 413, and 4 seconds after the start of the closing operation, the V region 435A cannot enter the ball. It is operated in a closed pattern (time that can be entered: 4 seconds). The induction lever 437B has a closing pattern (ball entry time: 12 seconds) in which the closing operation is started 8 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435B cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation is started. It works. The induction lever 437C has a closing pattern (ball entry time: 20 seconds) in which the closing operation starts 16 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435C cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation starts. It works. The induction lever 437D has a closing pattern (ball entry time: 16 seconds) in which the closing operation is started 12 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435D cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation is started. It works. The guidance lever 437E has a closing pattern (ball entry time: 8 seconds) in which the closing operation is started 4 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435E cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation is started. It works.

When the passing location is the start winning device 33b for FIG. 2, the guide levers 437A to 437E remain completely open for at least 4 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413, and then in the above-mentioned closing pattern. It works. That is, the guidance lever 437A starts the closing operation 4 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413, and the V region 435A cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the start of the closing operation (ball entry possible time: 8 seconds). ) Is operated. The induction lever 437B has a closing pattern (ball entry possible time: 16 seconds) in which the closing operation starts 12 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435B cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation starts. It works. The induction lever 437C has a closing pattern (ball entry time: 22 seconds) in which the closing operation is started 20 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435C cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation is started. It works. The induction lever 437D has a closing pattern (ball entry time: 20 seconds) in which the closing operation is started 16 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435D cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation is started. It works. The induction lever 437E has a closing pattern (ball entry time: 12 seconds) in which the closing operation is started 8 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413 and the V region 435E cannot enter the ball 4 seconds after the closing operation is started. It works.

As described above, the closing speed of the guide levers 437A to 437E is slower when the passing location is the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 than when the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 2 is used (V region 435A). Since it is a closed pattern (with a long ball entry time of ~ 435E), it is easy to pass through the V winning sensor 433. As a result, it is easier to pass the game ball to the V winning sensor 433 when the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is passing through than when the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 is passing. Can be recognized by a person.

That is, when the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a wins the start prize device 33b for special figure 2 among the start prize device 33a for special figure 1 and the start prize device 33b for special figure 2, the game ball is launched with the same strength. Even if the operation is performed so as to be performed, the passage location is configured to be easier to pass through the V winning sensor 433 than in the case where the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 is used. Specifically, as described above, the V region 435A to 435E is closed when the passing location is the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 1 than when the passing location is the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 2. A closing pattern is set in which the closing times of the induction levers 437A to 437E are long.

The guide lever 437 is configured to make it easier to pass through the V winning sensor 433 when the passing location is the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 than when the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 is passed. In addition to the configuration that slows down the closing pattern, a configuration that reopens the induction lever 437 that has become unable to enter the ball, and a configuration that allows the game ball to easily ride on the movable portion 483 of the V winning distribution portion 481 It may be configured to operate (for example, the rotation speed of the movable portion 483 is reduced, the stop time of the movable portion 483 is extended at a place where the game ball can easily reach, etc.).

Further, the game shifts to a jackpot round game having a different number of rounds depending on whether the passing point through which the game ball passing through the game area 30a passes is the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special figure 2. To do. For example, when the passing location is the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 than when the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 is used, it is easier to shift to the jackpot round game with a large number of rounds. FIG. 1 jackpot lottery table and special figure 2 jackpot lottery table are set.

Specifically, the special figure 1 big hit lottery table and the special figure 2 big hit lottery table have a plurality of rounds when the game ball passes through the special figure 1 start winning device 33a or the special figure 2 starting winning device 33b. A lottery will be drawn to determine which of the numbers will be in the jackpot round game state. The special figure 1 big hit lottery table and the special figure 2 big hit lottery table have a special passing point when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit result, as compared with the case where the passing point is the start winning device 33a for special figure 1. The start winning device 33b for FIG. 2 is configured so that it is easier to shift to a jackpot round game having a high number of rounds.

Whether or not the special figure 1 jackpot lottery table and the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table are in a support state (time saving state or probability change state) in which the right-handed game can be continued in the next game state after the end of the big hit round game state. The lottery is also held.

Specifically, the special figure 1 big hit lottery table allows a game ball that has passed through the game area 30a to pass through the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next game state after the end of the big hit round game state. A lottery will be held to determine whether or not (usually "0 times", which corresponds to a jackpot, or "100 times" or "200 times", which corresponds to a jackpot with a support status). If the result of the lottery based on the passage of the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is a jackpot with a support state (“100 times” or “200 times”), the jackpot round gaming state in the next gaming state of the jackpot round gaming state. A game aiming at the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is performed by a right-handed operation having the same strength as the inside. Compared to the normal game, during the normal game, the game is performed by left-handing to aim at the start winning device 33a for special figure 1, but during the support game, the game is aimed at the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 in the right. change. If it is a normal jackpot (support "0 times"), in the next gaming state of the jackpot round gaming state, the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is operated by a left-handed operation of launching a game ball toward the left game area 30al. The target game is performed. As a result, whether or not the game ball can pass through the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is determined by the result of the lottery using the lottery table, so that the game ball can be used without changing the structure. It is possible to change whether or not it is possible to pass through the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2.

Further, the special figure 2 jackpot lottery table is on the right side when the next gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state is set to be a support state that enables the special figure 2 start winning device 33b to pass through. A lottery is held to determine whether or not the game ball that has passed through the game area 30ar can continue to pass through the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next game state after the end of the jackpot round game state. To do. If the result of the lottery based on the passage of the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is a jackpot with a support state (“100 times” or “200 times”), the jackpot round game is also in the next game state of the jackpot round game state. The game of aiming at the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 continues with the right-handed operation of the same strength as in the state. If it is a normal jackpot (support "0 times"), in the next gaming state of the jackpot round gaming state, the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 is operated by a left-handed operation of launching a game ball toward the left game area 30al. Return to the target game. As a result, if the result is that it is possible to pass through the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the support state where it is possible to pass through the special figure 2 start winning device 33b, more output will be obtained. You can increase the chances of getting a ball.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment.
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
Main control capable of shifting to a jackpot round game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through either the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. The jackpot determination process (step S501) executed by the CPU 501 of the device 261 and
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability, and the state shifts to the high probability state. The next game state setting process to be executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided.
The passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on whether the passing location of the game ball is the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 (for example, the game described in (A0)). Machine).

According to such a configuration, in the jackpot determination process (step S501) performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261, the game ball flowing down the game area 30a is the start prize device 33a for special figure 1 or the start prize device for special figure 2. By passing through any of 33b, if the result of the jackpot discrimination process is a jackpot, the gaming state is shifted to the jackpot round gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and if the result of the jackpot discrimination process is different, the gaming state is changed. Do not shift to the jackpot round game state. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines the game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, so that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 has a high probability from the value when the value is low. It shifts to a high probability state that is changed to the value of time. Since the passing rate to the V winning sensor 433 differs depending on whether the passing point of the game ball is the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, the passing point of the game ball is special. The player can be made to recognize the ease of passing through the V winning sensor 433 depending on whether the starting winning device 33a for FIG. 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is used. Further, if the V-winning sensor 433 can pass the game ball, the player can obtain a feeling of self-help as if the game ball was passed through the V-winning sensor 433 by himself / herself. As a result, it is possible to determine the ease of transition to the high-probability gaming state without requiring a complicated program, and provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in transitioning to the high-probability gaming state. be able to.

Further, the game shifts to a jackpot round game in which the number of rounds differs depending on whether the passing point through which the game ball passing through the game area 30a passes is the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special figure 2. (For example, the gaming machine according to (A1)). For example, the specific number of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) may be transferred only when it is based on the winning of either the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. As a result, attention can be focused on the movement of the game ball entering the starting winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2.

Further, when the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a wins the start prize device 33b for special figure 2 among the start prize device 33a for special figure 1 and the start prize device 33b for special figure 2, the game ball is launched with the same strength. Even if it is operated so as to be operated, it may be configured so as to easily pass through the V winning sensor 433 (for example, the gaming machine according to (A2)). As a result, attention can be focused on the movement of the game ball entering the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2.

Further, when the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a wins the start winning device 33b for the special figure 2, it may shift to the jackpot round gaming state with a larger number of rounds among the jackpot round gaming states with a plurality of rounds ( For example, the gaming machine described in (A3)). As a result, attention can be focused on the movement of the game ball entering the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2.

In addition, a lottery table for drawing which of the plurality of rounds the jackpot round game state will be obtained when the gaming ball passes through the starting winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. (For example, the gaming machine according to (A4)). As a result, it is expected that the game ball will be in a more advantageous gaming state from the time when the game ball passes through the special drawing 1 start winning device 33a or the special drawing 2 starting winning device 33b until the result of the lottery is obtained. it can.

In addition, a lottery (usually) in which it is determined whether or not the game ball that has passed through the game area 30a can pass through the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 in the next game state after the end of the jackpot round game state. A special figure 1 jackpot lottery table for a jackpot or a jackpot with support status) is provided. Further, in the support state that enables the player to pass through the special figure 2 start winning device 33b in the next game state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state, the gaming ball that has passed through the right gaming area 30ar is in the jackpot round gaming state. In the next gaming state after the end of the game, a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table may be provided for drawing a lottery to determine whether or not it is possible to continue passing through the special figure 2 start winning device 33b ( For example, the gaming machine according to (A5)). As a result, whether or not the game ball can pass through the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2 is determined by the result of the lottery in the supported state using the lottery table, so that the structure is not changed. It is possible to change whether or not the game ball can pass through the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2.

Further, as described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment,
A taxiway 455 through which a game ball flowing down the game area 30a can pass, and
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through either the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2, it is possible to shift to a jackpot round game state advantageous to the player. The jackpot determination process (step S501) executed by the CPU 501 of the control device 261 and
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 changes from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability after the end of the jackpot round game state. It is provided with the next game state setting process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 to shift to the high probability state changed to.
The gaming ball that has passed through the taxiway 455 is configured to be able to pass at least the starting winning device 33b for FIG. 2 (for example, the gaming machine according to (C0) described above).

According to such a configuration, it is not possible to shift to the jackpot round game state unless the game ball passing through the taxiway 455 passes through the start winning device 33b for special drawing 2. Therefore, by adding the operating skill of the player to the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player, it is possible to pay attention to the movement of the game ball as to where the game ball has passed in the game area 30a. , It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player.

This embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 92. FIG. 86 is a front view of the game board of the ninth embodiment. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game state lottery process. FIG. 88A is a table for setting the closing speed of the V region, FIG. 88B is a table for setting the opening timing of the V region, and FIG. 88C is a table for setting the closing timing of the V region. FIG. 89 is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the combination gate and a guide lever that closes the V region. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery display process. FIGS. 91 (a) to 91 (f) are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won. 92 (g) to 92 (j) are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won, following FIG. 91.

In the first and fourth embodiments, the V region 435 is changed (the induction lever 437 is closed) triggered by the time from the passage of the fluxgate 413 (fluxgate sensor 414). The V region 435 is changed (the induction lever 437 is closed) triggered by the time from the start of the fluctuation, but the V region 435 may be changed when other conditions are satisfied. Specifically, in this embodiment, the V region 435 is changed when the condition generated during the jackpot round game state is satisfied.

Specifically, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a game ball that flows down the game area 30a, and is a specific Q count (for example, a third round) in a specific P round (for example, a third round) during the jackpot round game state. For example, the game ball that becomes the third count) passes through the large winning opening sensor that detects the game ball that has won the large winning opening 32a, so that the V region 435 can be entered (first induction valve). Time measurement is started together with 451A, the second induction valve 451B, and the induction induction lever 437), and the closing operation for the V region 435 starts for a predetermined time after the V region 435 is in a state where the ball can enter. By measuring the time until), the change of the V region 435 (the closing operation of the induction lever 437) is started.

Further, when the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts a round game of a specific P round (for example, the third round) during the big hit round game state, a game ball flowing down the game area 30a is a big winning opening. Based on the fact that the winning of the specific Qth count (for example, the 3rd count) is counted after passing through the winning sensor, the V area 435 is opened to the state where the ball can be entered, and the time measurement is started. When a specific time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) is measured from the opening of the region 435, the game ball is controlled so as not to enter each V region 435.

The game board 30 of this embodiment will be described. The game board 30 is configured such that the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 and the specific game state transition transition entry section 431 use different game balls to determine the transition. That is, in this embodiment, the advantageous gaming state transition entry ball 411 of the first embodiment constitutes a part of the configuration for determining the transition to the specific gaming state (the specific gaming state transition entry section 431 described later). It is used as a main body 431A) on the upper side of the ball entry portion for shifting to a specific game state. The specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431 of the first embodiment is used as the lower main body 431B of the specific game state transition entry ball entry unit in this embodiment. The ball entry portion 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state is provided at a position different from that of the first embodiment, in which the taxiway 455 is branched.

The taxiway 455 of the present embodiment has a first exit portion 457A and a ball entry portion 456 that branch off a part of the taxiway 455 and discharge the game ball that has entered from the entrance portion 456 to the entry section 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state. It is branched so as to guide the entered game ball to the second outlet portion 457B for discharging the entered game ball to the upper main body 431A of the entry unit for shifting to the specific game state and the discharge port 458 for discharging to the right game area 30ar. A first induction valve 451A is provided immediately downstream of the discharge port 458. A second induction valve 451B is provided immediately downstream of the first outlet portion 457A. The first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B are each provided with sensors for detecting the passage of the game ball.

The game ball entered from the inlet portion 456 is guided to the advantageous gaming state transition entry portion 411 while the first induction valve 451A is open and the second induction valve 451B is closed. This state occurs when a game ball is inserted into the specific game state transition entry ball unit 411 before the start of the jackpot round game. While the first induction valve 451A is open and the second induction valve 451B is open, the guide is guided to the upper main body 431A of the ball entry portion for shifting to the specific gaming state. This state occurs when a predetermined condition that occurs during the jackpot round game is satisfied. While the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B are closed, they are guided to the right gaming area 31ar. This is the state during the normal game state, the jackpot round game state, and the right-handed game state.

Next, the jackpot game state lottery process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 of this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 87. In particular, the difference from the jackpot game state lottery process of the first embodiment of FIG. 18 will be described.

When the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines that the result of the variation display of the symbol is the jackpot result, the first induction valve 451A is opened (step S515A). When one game ball passes through the first induction valve 451A, the first induction valve 451A is closed (step S517A, step S523A). Even when it is determined that the opening time of the first induction valve has elapsed, the first induction valve 451A is closed (step S521A). The number of rounds in the jackpot round game state is determined by passing the game ball discharged from the first exit part 457A and guided to the ball entry part 411 for the advantageous game state transition by passing through any of the four combination gates 413. (Step S525, Step S531, Step S536A). The game ball that has passed through the Yuren Gate 413 is discharged to the back surface side of the game board 30 as it is.

When the number of rounds is determined in step S527, step S533, and step S536B, the opening command is set and the jackpot round game is started (step S528). That is, by maintaining the state in which the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B are closed, the game ball entered from the entry section 456 is discharged from the discharge section 458. The game ball discharged from the discharge unit 458 flows down toward the variable winning device 32, and enters the large winning opening 32a while the large winning opening 32a is open. The game ball that has entered the large winning opening 32a is detected by the large winning opening switch, and the number of game balls that have won the large winning opening 32a is counted.

When it is determined that the number of rounds in the jackpot round game state becomes a specific P round (for example, the third round) and the count number becomes the specific Q count (for example, the third count) (step S528A). The first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B are opened, and the induction induction lever 437 is opened so that the V region 435 can enter the ball (step S528B). If the above rounds and counts have not been reached, this process is temporarily terminated. When one game ball is detected to pass through the sensors of the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B (step S528C), the measurement of the V region closing timer is started (step S528D), and the first induction valve 451A And the second induction valve 451B is closed again (step S528E). Further, when it is determined that the opening time has elapsed without detecting the passage (step S528F), the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B are closed again. If the opening time has not passed, this process is temporarily terminated.

The game ball that has passed through the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B enters the upper main body 431A of the ball entry portion for shifting to the specific game state and rolls in the rolling region (cruin). After this rolling, the game ball that has entered the upper main body 431A of the specific game state transition entry unit has four communication gates 432A to 432D (collectively referred to as communication) corresponding to the combination gates 413A to 413D of the first embodiment. Pass through any of the gates 432). The passage of the communication gate 432 is detected by a sensor provided at each gate (step S528G). If the passage of the communication gate 432 is not detected, this process is temporarily terminated.

In this way, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is in a state where the V region 435 can be entered by passing the game ball which is the Qth count of the P round passes through the large winning opening sensor, and the time is up. By measuring a predetermined time (time until the closing operation with respect to the V region 435 starts) after the measurement is started and the V region 435 is in a state where the ball can enter (step S528D, step S529), the V region 435 (Closed operation of the induction lever 437) is started (step S537). After that, the V region 435 is closed while determining whether the V region 435 has been passed or the maximum opening time has passed without passing through, as in the process of FIG. 18 of the first embodiment.

The measurement of the predetermined time may be started when the game ball passes through the large winning opening sensor. If the player is notified in advance that the ball can enter the V region 435 in any round, the player's expectation can be increased in the number of rounds during the jackpot round game. It may be started when the first induction valve 451A, the second induction valve 451B, and the induction lever 437 are opened. Since the measurement starts when the ball can actually enter the V region 435, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the process of entering the V region 435. It may be started at least when the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B are opened, or when the game ball passes through the opened first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B. May be started as. The player's feeling of excitement can be enhanced from the timing of opening or passing the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B. At least, it may be started when the guide lever 437 is opened so that the ball can enter. The player's feeling of excitement can be enhanced from the timing when the guidance lever 437 is opened. In the following, the detection of the game ball in the third count of the third round and the opening of the first induction valve 451A, the second induction valve 451B, and the induction lever 437 occur almost at the same time, and a predetermined time from this timing. Measurement shall be started.

The operation of closing the V region 435 will be described. See FIGS. 88 and 89.
The guidance lever 437A maintains the V region 435A in a state where it can enter the ball until 8 seconds after the start of measurement, and starts a closing operation which gradually narrows the range where the ball can enter 8 seconds after the start of measurement. Then, 12 seconds after the start of measurement, the ball is changed to the non-entry state. The guidance lever 437E maintains the V region 435E in a state where it can enter the ball until 12 seconds after the start of measurement, and starts a closing operation that gradually narrows the range where the ball can enter 12 seconds after the start of measurement. Then, 16 seconds after the start of measurement, the ball is changed to the non-entry state. The guidance lever 437B maintains the V region 435B in a state where it can enter the ball until 16 seconds after the start of measurement, and starts a closing operation that gradually narrows the range where the ball can enter 16 seconds after the start of measurement. Then, 20 seconds after the start of measurement, the ball cannot be entered. The guidance lever 437D maintains the V region 435D in a state where it can enter the ball until 20 seconds after the start of measurement, and 20 seconds after the start of measurement, it performs a closing operation that gradually narrows the range in which the ball can enter. It starts, and 24 seconds after the start of measurement, the ball is changed to the non-entry state. The induction lever 437C keeps the V region 435C in a state where it can enter the ball until 24 seconds after the start of measurement, and starts a closing operation that gradually narrows the range where the ball can enter 24 seconds after the start of measurement. Then, 28 seconds after the start of measurement, the ball is changed to the non-entry state.

The predetermined time at which the change of the V region 435 is started is each time from the start of measurement to the start of the closing operation of the guide levers 437A to 437E with respect to the V regions 435A to 435E. Specifically, it is the time after 8 seconds, 12 seconds, 16 seconds, 20 seconds, and 24 seconds from the start of the measurement described above. This predetermined time may be constant, but may be changed depending on the passing location of the combination gate 413. It is interesting that the ease of winning a V prize changes depending on the passing point of the role gate 413. It may also be changed depending on the type of jackpot symbol. Depending on the type of jackpot symbol, you can get the fun that the ease of winning V will change. Further, it may be changed randomly by lottery. It is interesting that the ease of winning a V prize is not always constant.

The specific time (maximum opening time) for controlling the game ball from entering the V region 435 is each time from the start of measurement to the end of the closing operation of the guide levers 437A to 437E with respect to the V region 435A to 437E. .. Specifically, it is the time 12 seconds, 16 seconds, 20 seconds, 24 seconds, and 28 seconds after the start of the measurement described above. This specific time may be constant as described above, but may be changed depending on the passage point of the communication gate 432. Further, as in the predetermined time, it may be changed depending on the passing location of the winning combination gate 413, the type of jackpot symbol, and the lottery.

The ease of entering the V region 435 differs depending on the time it takes for the game ball to pass through each of the specific game state transition entry ball upper body 431A and the specific game state transition lower body 431B. .. Specifically, the time for passing through the upper main body 431A of the ball entry portion for shifting to the specific game state is the rolling time until the game ball entering the rolling region from the second exit portion 457B passes through the communication gate 432. It depends. In the following, the ease of entering the V region 435 is taken as an example when the rolling time is 6 seconds (passing timing 1), 12 seconds (passing timing 2), and 18 seconds (passing timing 3). To explain.

When the rolling time is 6 seconds, when the game ball passes through the communication gate 432, all of the V regions 435A to 435E remain open (the ball can enter). When the rolling time is 12 seconds, when the game ball passes through the communication gate 432, the V region 435A is changed to the non-entry state, and four V regions 435B to 435E out of the five V region 435s. It is open (the ball can be entered). When the rolling time is 18 seconds, when the game ball passes through the communication gate 432, the V regions 435A, 435B, 435D, and 435E are changed to the non-entry state, and one of the five V regions 435. Only the V region 435C is open (the ball can enter). As described above, also in this embodiment, the longer the rolling time in the rolling region, the lower the winning rate of the game ball in the V region 435.

In the first embodiment, since the game shows whether or not the first launched game ball before the start of the jackpot round game passes through the V region 435, the feeling of excitement as to whether or not the ball enters the V region 435 is felt. It ends at the beginning of the jackpot round game. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ease of entering the V region 435 can be changed when the condition generated during the jackpot round game is satisfied, which is advantageous for the player even during the jackpot round game. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a game state. Specifically, the game ball reaches the V area 435 according to the time after the V area 435 is opened to the state where the ball can enter, even from the middle of the jackpot round game state such as the specific count of the specific round. At the timing of this, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the change in the V region 435 is within the range that allows the passage of the game ball in the V region 435. Further, even in the middle of the jackpot round game state, it is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement that the game ball must be put into the V area 435 from the opening of the V area 435 to the elapse of the maximum opening time. ..

Next, the jackpot game state lottery display process of this embodiment and the display mode in the third symbol display device 42 will be described. 90-92.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the processes of steps S3201 to S3203 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the jackpot game state lottery command (according to the timing at which the first induction valve A is opened). That is, in step S3201, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a right-handed notification image for notifying the player to perform a right-handed hit on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 emits light of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 with the lighting color of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 according to the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413. Let me.

In step S3205, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the right-handed game ball has passed through the first induction valve 451A. Specifically, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 receives the first induction valve passage command from the sub control device 262, it determines that the right-handed game ball has passed through the first induction valve 451A. If it is determined that the first induction valve 451A has passed, the process proceeds to step S3206, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3207A.

In step S3206, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the first tilt display. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the area indicating 16R displayed on the third symbol display device 42 in red.

In step S3207A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413, and if so, which combination gate 413 has passed. If it is determined that the gate has passed the combination gate 413, the process proceeds to step S3207B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3207C. In step S3207B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball has passed. In step S3207C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the P-1 round (for example, the second round) immediately before the specific P round (for example, the third round) described above has been reached. When the P-1 round is reached, the process proceeds to step S3207D.

In step S3207D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a V-passing game notice display for notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the game of passing the game ball through the V area 435 will start in the next round, and step S3207E. Proceed to. In step S3207E, it is determined whether or not the Q count of a specific P round has been reached. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 indicates that the command indicating that the P round is started and the Qth count have been reached from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 via the sub control device 262. Receives a command and makes a judgment. As a result of the determination, when it is the Qth count of the P round, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a V-passing game display indicating on the third symbol display device 42 that the game of passing the game ball starts. (Step S3207F).

In step S3208A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the communication gate 432. If it is determined that the communication gate 432 has passed, the process proceeds to step S3209A, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3209A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the second tilt display. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display an image showing the V region 435 being opened.

In step S3210A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 drives the effect accessory (clock accessory) 403 to perform a countdown display (analog display) of the remaining time of the maximum opening time of the V region.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. If the passage of the V winning sensor 433 is detected, the process proceeds to step S3212, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3213.

In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image (for example, a character image of “V winning!”) Notifying the third symbol display device 42 of the V winning. In step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the normal winning sensor. If the passage of the normal winning sensor is detected, the process proceeds to step S3214, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3215.

In step S3214, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays (out-displays) an image (for example, a character image of "V prize not won!") Notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the V prize has not been won. .. In step S3215, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V region has elapsed. If the maximum opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3216, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3216, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image (for example, a character image of “timeout!”) Notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the maximum opening time has elapsed.

Next, a display mode from the time when the jackpot in the present embodiment is determined until the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state are determined will be described. See FIGS. 91 and 92.

The third symbol display device 42 displays that the jackpot combination according to the third symbol has been confirmed (FIG. 91 (a)).

Next, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image for firing the game ball by hitting right (FIG. 91 (b)). For example, in the third symbol display device 42, "Gate 1 OPEN!" Is displayed indicating that the first induction valve 451A has been opened, and "Aim for the crune by hitting right!" Is displayed, and an image showing the correspondence between the four holes of the crune and the number of jackpot rounds is displayed.

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, a round fanning effect is displayed from the time when the game ball passes through the first induction valve 451A until the game ball passes through the combination gate 413 (FIG. 91 (c). )). Assuming that the game ball has passed through the role gate 413D, the image of "16R acquisition!" Is displayed (FIG. 91 (d)).

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, an opening image is displayed to the player that the jackpot round game is started. For example, an image of "Big hit round START!" Is displayed (FIG. 91 (e)). After that, an image of "1R" indicating the current number of rounds, a character image displayed during the jackpot round, a background image, and the like are displayed.

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, in the first P-1 round (for example, the second round) immediately before the third P round (for example, the third round) in which the game of passing the game ball through the V region 435 is performed. In that case, the image of "2R" showing the number of rounds and the image of "Next round is V passing challenge!" Are displayed as the above-mentioned V passing game notice display, and the V area 435 is surely displayed in the next round. An image of "Please continue right-handed" is displayed as a right-handed operation notice image prompting the player to pass the game ball (FIG. 91 (f)).

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, when the P round (for example, the third round) in which the game of passing the game ball through the V region 435 is performed, an image of "3R" indicating the number of rounds is displayed. Then, at the timing when it is detected that the game ball of the Qth count has won a prize in the large winning opening 32a in this third round, the image of "V passing challenge!" Is displayed as the above-mentioned V passing game display and is specified. As a right-handed operation promotion image that encourages right-handed hitting to enter the game state transition entry unit 431, "Gates 1, 2, V OPEN!" And "Right-handed passing through Gates 1, 2, V. The image of "Yo!" Is displayed (Fig. 92 (g)).

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, when it is detected that the game ball has passed through the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B, "gates 1 and 2 have passed!" The image of "Decide the V prize within 30 seconds!" Is displayed (Fig. 92 (h)). Further, at this timing, the second hand of the clock accessory 403 is driven to 30 seconds to display a countdown. If a V prize is won within the time limit, an image of "V prize!" Is displayed as shown in FIG. 92 (i). After that, as shown in FIG. 92 (j), the third symbol display device 42 displays an image during the jackpot round game, for example, an image such as "I'm still going on!", And returns to the round game.

In this way, a game in which the game ball is passed through the V area 435 occurs at a timing in the middle of the jackpot round game, and the game is played according to the time since the V area 435 at that timing is opened to a state where the ball can enter. When the ball reaches the V region 435, it is determined whether or not the change in the V region 435 is within the range that allows the game ball to pass through the V region 435. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement in the game of passing the ball.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment,
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
The jackpot game state lottery process executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 capable of shifting to the jackpot round game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through the combination gate 413, and the jackpot game state lottery process.
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability, and the state shifts to the high probability state. The next game state setting process to be executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided.
The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 has a function of changing the V region 435 when a predetermined condition generated during the jackpot round gaming state is satisfied (for example, the gaming machine according to (B0) described above).

According to such a configuration, the condition that occurs during the jackpot round gaming state is satisfied by setting the predetermined condition that is established as an opportunity to change the V region 435 to the predetermined condition that occurs during the jackpot round gaming state. Since the ease of entering the V region 435 can be changed with the above as an opportunity, it is possible to improve the interest in the transition to the gaming state which is advantageous for the player even during the jackpot round gaming state.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a game ball that flows down the game area 30a and becomes a specific count (for example, the third count) in a specific round (for example, the third round) during the jackpot round game state. However, by passing through the large winning opening sensor that detects the game ball that has won the large winning opening 32a, the V region 435 is in a state in which the ball can be entered (the first induction valve 451A and the second induction valve 451B and the induction). The time measurement is started at the same time as the induction lever 437 is opened), and the V area 435 is changed (the induction lever 437 is closed) by measuring a predetermined time after the V area 435 is in a state where the ball can enter. (For example, the gaming machine according to (B1) described above). According to such a configuration, even in the middle of the jackpot round game state, the V is at the timing when the game ball reaches the V area 435 according to the time after the V area 435 is opened to the state where the ball can enter. It is possible to give the player a feeling of excitement as to whether or not the change in the area 435 is within the range that allows the game ball to pass through the V area 435.

Further, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is a game ball that flows down the game area 30a and becomes a specific count (for example, the third count) in a specific round (for example, the third round) during the jackpot round game state. However, by passing through the large winning opening sensor that detects the game ball that has won the large winning opening 32a, the measurement of a specific time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) is started, and the V region 435 can enter the ball. When a specific time (maximum opening time of the V region 435) is measured after the state is set, the game ball is controlled so as not to enter each V region 435. According to such a configuration, even in the middle of the jackpot round game state, the game feels the excitement that the game ball must be put into the V area 435 from the opening of the V area 435 to the elapse of the maximum opening time. Can be given to a person.

In this embodiment, in the jackpot game state lottery display process executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 described above and the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won, the timer display of the right-handed notification is displayed. It differs from the first embodiment in that an effect (countdown display effect) is added. This point will be described below. FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game state lottery display process of the tenth embodiment.

As a premise, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the jackpot game status lottery display process described below when the display jackpot game status lottery command is received (see FIG. 37 of the first embodiment). That is, if the jackpot lottery process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entry detection by the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, the jackpot game state lottery display if the jackpot is won. The process is performed, and if it is out of the game, it is determined that the jackpot game state lottery display process is not performed. That is, the jackpot lottery process performed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 triggered by the ball entry detection by the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2 is performed in the jackpot game state lottery display process described below. It also functions as a lottery that can determine whether or not to perform a predetermined effect (timer effect of right-handed notification described later) that encourages the player's operation.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has elapsed 5 seconds from the reception of the jackpot game state lottery command (timing of the display start of the jackpot confirmation display), which is the execution condition for performing the timer effect of the right-handed notification of this embodiment. Whether or not it is determined (step S3201A). This time is adjusted to the timing at which the induction valve 451 is opened. If 5 seconds have passed from the jackpot confirmation display, the process proceeds to step S3201B. If not, this process is terminated once.

In step S3201B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a right-handed notification to urge the player to operate the guide valve 451 to perform a right-handed hit within the time limit (15 seconds) as a timer effect of the right-handed notification. The third symbol display device 42 is made to execute the countdown display of the induction valve opening time by the timer display effect image, and the process proceeds to step S3202. Further, in step S3201B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the second hand of the clock accessory 403 to the time limit (15 seconds) of the right-handed notification as a timer effect of the right-handed notification, and then directs the second hand to the position of 0 seconds. A countdown display of the induction valve opening time by the clock accessory 403, which is driven counterclockwise, is performed. Next, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 emits light of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 with the lighting color of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 according to the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413. Let me. That is, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the timer display effect of the right-handed notification, the right-handed operation prompted by the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is performed to perform a specific effect (a large number of rounds). The number of rounds display process, which shows the player the degree of expectation that the number of rounds will be displayed), and the distribution of the number of rounds for each role gate 413, and the ball entry section for transition to the advantageous game state according to the distribution of the number of rounds. Is being lit.

In step S3205A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the right-handed game ball has passed through the induction valve 451 within the induction valve opening time. If it is determined that the induction valve 451 has passed, the process proceeds to step S3205B, and if it is determined that the induction valve 451 has not passed, the process proceeds to step S3205D.

In step S3205B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 ends the timer display effect image of the right-handed notification and the countdown display of the induction valve opening time by the clock accessory 403, and proceeds to step S3205C. In step S3205C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the countdown display of the maximum opening time of the V area 435 on the third symbol display device 42, and also displays the countdown display of the maximum opening time of the V area 435 in the clock accessory 403. Start.

In step S3205D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the opening time of the inductive valve 451 that is being counted down has reached 0 seconds. If it is 0 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3205E, and if not, the present process is temporarily terminated. In step S3205E, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a puncture display for displaying an image indicating that the right to be a jackpot round game has been extinguished on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process. The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs such a puncture display when the player does not properly perform a right-handed operation even though the induction valve 451 is opened, and the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 performs such a puncture display. Alternatively, the display returns to the display of the game in which the game ball is passed through the start winning device 33b for special figure 2.

In step S3206, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the first tilt display on the third symbol display device 42 or the like when the game ball has passed through the induction valve 451.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413, and if so, which combination gate 413 has passed. If it is determined that the gate has passed the combination gate 413, the process proceeds to step S3209, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball has passed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the number of rounds display lamps 421. Turn on the lamp. In step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the second tilt display.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. If the passage of the V winning sensor 433 is detected, the process proceeds to step S3212, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3213.

In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image notifying the V prize on the third symbol display device 42, and turns on the SUPER V lamp 422. In step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the normal winning sensor. If the passage of the normal winning sensor is detected, the process proceeds to step S3214, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3215.

In step S3214, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays (out display) an image notifying that the V prize has not been won in the third symbol display device 42, and lights the V lamp 423. In step S3215, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V region has elapsed. If the maximum opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3216, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3216, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image (time-out display) notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the maximum opening time has elapsed, and turns on the V lamp 423.

Next, a display mode from the time when the jackpot is determined in the present embodiment to the determination of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won.

On the third symbol display device 42, the jackpot combination by the third symbol (for example, "7", "7", "7") is confirmed and displayed, and an image congratulating the jackpot (for example, "Congratulations on the jackpot" image) is displayed. (Fig. 94 (a)).

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, a timer display effect image of the right-handed notification for firing the game ball by right-handed is displayed (FIG. 94 (b)). For example, in the third symbol display device 42, "Gate OPEN!" Is displayed indicating that the induction valve 451 has been opened, the induction valve 451 can be passed through, and the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is started. A text image indicating that "Pass the gate by hitting right within 15 seconds!" Is displayed. In addition, the third symbol display device 42 also displays an image showing the correspondence between the four holes of the crune and the number of jackpot rounds. At this time, in the clock accessory 403, the second hand is driven to a position indicating the right-handed notification time (15 seconds), and a countdown display is displayed until the game ball passes the induction valve 451 or the second hand indicates 0 otherwise. do.

The timer display effect of the right-handed notification gives the player a feeling of excitement by showing the passage of time related to the right-handed operation for passing the game ball through the induction valve 451 within the opening time. It is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the operation of. In addition, the player can display the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 displayed together with the timer display effect of the right-handed notification, and the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state in a color corresponding to the distribution of the number of rounds. By lighting and displaying, a specific effect (distribution display effect including 16R and advantageous game state transition) that allows the ball to enter the winning combination gate 413 with a large number of rounds by performing a right-handed operation within the opening time. There is also a feeling of expectation that it will be possible to see a round number display effect with a large number of rounds that displays the ball entry section 411 in an advantageous color, so it is related to the operation effect that encourages the player's operation. It can improve the interest.

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, immediately after the game ball passes through the induction valve 451, a countdown display of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 and the like is performed (FIG. 94 (c)). For example, an image of "passing through the gate!" Showing that the vehicle has passed the induction valve 451 and an image of "decide a crune prize and a V prize within 30 seconds after passing the gate!" Are displayed, and 16 rounds of roles are displayed. The area corresponding to the gate 413A is highlighted (first tilting effect). Further, in the clock accessory 403, the second hand is driven to a position indicating "30 seconds" indicating the maximum opening time of the V region 435, and the game ball passes through the V region 435 or the normal winning region. If not, the countdown is displayed until it reaches 0 seconds.

Here, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413D at the passage timing 1 shown in FIG. 44 (that is, 8 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451). In the third symbol display device 42, after passing through the winning combination gate 413A, an image of “16R acquisition!” Showing the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413A through which the game ball has passed is displayed (FIG. 94 (d)). Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "Determine the V prize based on the remaining time!" (FIG. 94 (e)).

When the game ball enters the V region 435, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "V prize!" Showing that the V prize has been detected (FIG. 94 (f)).

Next, a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 will be described when the game ball does not pass through the induction valve 451 within 15 seconds, that is, when the player does not properly perform the right-handed operation. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 when the right-handed operation is not performed in FIG. 94.

On the third symbol display device 42, the jackpot combination by the third symbol is confirmed and displayed (FIG. 95 (a)), and the timer display effect image of the right-handed notification ("Pass the gate by right-handed within 15 seconds!" ) Is displayed (FIG. 95 (b)), and the countdown display of the opening time (15 seconds) of the induction valve 451 is performed. If the player does not perform the right-handed operation properly even when the remaining 10 seconds are left, the timer display effect image of the right-handed notification shows that the remaining time is short and the player is strongly urged to right-handed. 10 seconds left! Hit to the right !! ”(Fig. 95 (c)). If the player does not properly perform the right-handed operation even when the remaining 5 seconds are reached, the timer display effect image of the right-handed notification indicates that the remaining time is further reduced and the player is strongly urged to right-handed. As you can see, the image changes to "5 seconds left! Punk! Hit to the right!" (Fig. 95 (d)). Displaying an image explaining the result of neglecting to hit right in this way may reduce the disadvantage to the player.

If the player does not properly perform the right-handed operation even when the remaining 0 seconds are left, the third symbol display device 42 is displayed with a message such as "Big hit round game disappears !!" indicating that the big hit round game has disappeared. A puncture display for displaying a character image is performed (FIG. 95 (e)). After that, the third symbol display device 42 returns to the display screen for passing the game ball through the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, and if there is a start winning, the variation display of the third symbol is displayed. It is done (Fig. 95 (f)).

In this way, the player is informed that the right to the jackpot round game has been extinguished because he did not make a right-handed hit during the countdown of the timer display effect of the right-handed hit notification. As a result, the player can see the round number display effect with a large number of rounds such as "16R acquisition!" Instead of the puncture display effect. Since it gives a feeling of excitement, it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player to operate. If an image suggesting that the jackpot round game has disappeared (for example, an image in which the character's facial expression displayed during the right-handed notification timer display effect changes to a dark face) is displayed, the flow of the display effect will flow. It is possible to notify that the right to the jackpot round game has naturally disappeared.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment,
Triggered by the ball entry detection by the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2, a predetermined effect for prompting the player's operation (right to prompt the right-handed operation for passing the induction valve 451). The jackpot lottery process (step S501) executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 that performs a lottery that can determine whether or not to perform the hit notification timer display effect).
Execution condition to be executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that determines whether or not the predetermined execution condition that 5 seconds have passed from the jackpot confirmation display when it is determined as a result of the lottery to perform a predetermined effect is satisfied. The establishment determination process (step S3201A) and
As a result of the above determination, when it is determined that the predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect (timer display effect of right-handed notification) that prompts the player's operation is executed while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation. A timer display effect process (step S3201B) for right-handed notification executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 is provided (for example, the gaming machine according to (D0) described above). As a result, the player is given a feeling of excitement by showing the passage of time related to the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player to operate.

Further, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the timer display effect of the right-handed notification, the right-handed operation prompted by the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is performed to perform a specific effect (a large number of rounds). Shows the player the degree of expectation that the number of rounds will be displayed. The lighting process of the ball entry portion for shifting to the advantageous game state according to the distribution of the number of rounds is performed (for example, the game described in (D1) described above). Machine). As a result, the player is given a sense of expectation as to whether or not he / she can receive a specific effect by performing the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player's operation.

The round number display effect with a large number of rounds is an example of an effect that explicitly indicates that a large game value may be obtained.

When the right-handed operation prompted by the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is not performed, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has another effect (puncture) different from the specific effect (round number display effect with a large number of rounds). A puncture display effect process for executing the display effect) is performed (for example, the gaming machine according to (D4) described above). As a result, the player can see the round number display effect with a large number of rounds instead of the puncture display effect, so that the passage of time related to the operation is shown, which gives a greater feeling of excitement. It is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the operation of the person.

The puncture display effect is an example of an effect that is not preferable for the player, which is executed when the operation prompted by the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is performed, and indicates that the game value has not been obtained. ..

The timer display effect of the above-described tenth embodiment is limited to one operation (timer display effect of right-handed notification), but the timer display effect in the present embodiment is one operation. The above-mentioned Example 10 is different from the above-mentioned Example 10 in that the effect of performing another operation (timer display effect of right-handed notification) is performed after the effect of performing the effect (timer display effect of left-handed notification) is performed. It's different. Therefore, in the above-described 10th embodiment, the number of rounds and the presence / absence of the probabilistic state are determined by one game ball, but in this embodiment, the number of rounds and the presence / absence of the probabilistic state are determined as in the fourth embodiment. It is different from the above-described Example 10 in that each of the game balls needs to be hit separately.

Since the closing timing of the V region 435 is different from that of the fourth embodiment, this embodiment will be described from this point. FIG. 96 is a time chart of the game ball that has passed through the combination gate of the eleventh embodiment and the guide lever that closes the V region.

In the fourth embodiment, the closing timing of the V region 435 (that is, the opening time in which the V region 435 is allowed to enter the ball) is different depending on which of the winning combination gates 413 is passed. The winning rate of the V region 435 was set to change according to the passing location of the continuous gate 413. In this embodiment, the closing timing of the V region 435 is set to be the same regardless of which of the combination gates 413 passes through. That is, in this embodiment, the closing timing of the V region 435A is set to 10 seconds from the passage of the winning combination gate 413, and the closing timing of the V region 435B is set to the winning combination gate 413 regardless of the passing gate. The closing timing of the V region 435C is set to 14 seconds from the passage of the combination gate 413, and the closing timing of the V region 435D is set to 16 seconds from the passage of the combination gate 413. ..

In this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is set to 30 seconds after passing through the induction valve 451. If the timing at which the game ball passes through the combination gate 413 is the passage timing 1 8 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451 and the passage timing 2 14 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451, each V region 435. The time during which the ball can enter is the same as the closing timing described above, but if the timing at which the game ball passes through the combination gate 413 is timing 3 20 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451, the V region 435B , 435C, 435D, the time available for entering the ball is reduced. Therefore, unlike the fourth embodiment (similar to the first embodiment), the present embodiment has a configuration in which the longer the rolling time in the rolling region 417, the lower the winning rate in the V region 435 is likely to be. ing.

Next, the big hit game state lottery display process executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 and the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the big hit is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won will be described differently from the tenth embodiment. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the jackpot game state lottery display process of the eleventh embodiment.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has elapsed 5 seconds from the reception of the jackpot game state lottery command (timing of the display start of the jackpot confirmation display), which is the execution condition for performing the timer effect of the left-handed notification of this embodiment. Whether or not it is determined (step S3201A). This time is adjusted to the timing at which the induction valve 451 is opened. If 5 seconds have passed from the jackpot confirmation display, the process proceeds to step S3201C. If not, this process is terminated once.

In step S3201C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs left-handed notification within the time limit (15 seconds) to prompt the player to operate the induction valve 451 as a timer effect for left-handed notification. The third symbol display device 42 is made to execute the countdown display of the induction valve opening time by the timer display effect image, and the process proceeds to step S3202. Further, in step S3201C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 sets the target time of the digital display on the third symbol display device 42 to 15 seconds as a timer effect of the left-handed notification, and sets the current time from 0 seconds. A count-up display of the induction valve opening time is displayed. Next, the process proceeds to step S3202.

In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 emits light of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 with the lighting color of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 according to the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413. Let me.

In step S3205A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the left-handed game ball has passed through the induction valve 451 within the induction valve opening time. If it is determined that the induction valve 451 has passed, the process proceeds to step S3205F, and if it is determined that the induction valve 451 has not passed, the process proceeds to step S3205D.

In step S3205F, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 changes the timer display effect image of the left-handed notification to the timer effect display image of the Kroon winning / V winning, and sets the target time of the digital display from the induction valve opening time to the present. The time is updated to the time obtained by adding the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the V region 435 to the time of, and the process proceeds to step S3205G. In step S3205G, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 continues the count-up display based on the updated target time. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 serves as an image for supplementarily explaining the timer display effect of the Kroon winning / V winning, after the player has won a prize in any of the winning gates 413 at the timing of performing the right-handed operation. An image indicating that there is is displayed on the third symbol display device 42. As a result, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 changes from the timer display effect of the left-handed notification to the timer display effect of the Kroon prize / V prize, the player appropriately performs the next operation to be performed. Can be executed.

In step S3205D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the opening time of the inductive valve 451 that is being counted down has reached 0 seconds. If it is 0 seconds, the process proceeds to step S3205E, and if not, the present process is temporarily terminated. In step S3205E, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs a puncture display for displaying an image indicating that the right to be a jackpot round game has been extinguished on the third symbol display device 42, and ends this process.

In step S3206, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the first tilt display on the third symbol display device 42 or the like when the game ball has passed through the induction valve 451.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413, and if so, which combination gate 413 has passed. If it is determined that the gate has passed the combination gate 413, the process proceeds to step S3208A, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3208A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 updates the timer effect display image of the Kroon winning / V winning by adding the time limit (the time when the induction valve 451 passes and the maximum opening time of the V region 435A). The timer effect display image of the right-handed notification that prompts the player to operate by hitting right within the area 435A (maximum opening time) to pass any of the V areas 435 is changed to the digital display of the third symbol display device 42. The count-up display with the maximum opening time of the V region 435 as the target time is continued, and the process proceeds to step S3209. At this time, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 also displays the individual maximum opening times of the V regions 435A to 435D on the third symbol display device 42 as an image for supplementarily explaining the timer display effect of the right-handed notification. As a result, when the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 42 changes from the timer display effect of the crune prize / V prize to the timer display effect of the right-handed notification, the player appropriately performs the next operation to be performed. Can be executed.

In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball has passed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the number of rounds display lamps 421. Turn on the lamp. In step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the second tilt display.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. If the passage of the V winning sensor 433 is detected, the process proceeds to step S3212, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3213.

In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image notifying the V prize on the third symbol display device 42, turns on the SUPER V lamp 422, and proceeds to step S3215 otherwise.

In step S3215, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V region has elapsed. If the maximum opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3216, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3216, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image (time-out display) notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the maximum opening time has elapsed, and turns on the V lamp 423.

Next, a display mode from the time when the jackpot is determined in the present embodiment to the determination of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state will be described. FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (f) are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won when the result of the V chance determination is a hit.

On the third symbol display device 42, the jackpot combination by the third symbol (for example, "7", "7", "7") is confirmed and displayed, and an image congratulating the jackpot (for example, "Congratulations on the jackpot" image) is displayed. (Fig. 98 (a)).

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, a timer display effect image of the left-handed notification for firing the game ball by left-handed is displayed (FIG. 98 (b)). For example, in the third symbol display device 42, "Gate OPEN!" Is displayed indicating that the induction valve 451 has been opened, the induction valve 451 can be passed through, and the timer display effect of the left-handed notification is started. A timer effect display image of the left-handed notification is displayed, which indicates that "Left-handedly pass through the gate by the elapse of 15 seconds!". At the same time, a numerical image of "0/15" indicating that a count-up display with a target time of 15 seconds is performed is displayed in the timer display area provided on the right side thereof. In addition, the third symbol display device 42 also displays an image showing the correspondence between the four holes of the crune and the number of jackpot rounds. In the timer display area, the count-up display is performed until the game ball passes through the induction valve 451 or the timer display has passed 15 seconds.

If the game ball does not pass through the induction valve 451 by the time 15 seconds have passed, the third symbol display device 42 has a character image such as "Big hit round game disappears!" Indicates that the big hit round game has disappeared. A puncture display is performed.

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, an image of "passing through the gate!" Is displayed indicating that the game ball has passed through the induction valve 451 immediately after passing through the induction valve 451. By the time the image passes the current time (5 seconds) of passing through the induction valve 451 plus the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the V region 435 (35 seconds), the service gate 413 and the V region 435 are reached. It is changed to a timer effect display image of the Kroon prize / V prize such as "Determine the Kroon prize & V prize by the lapse of 35 seconds!", Which indicates that the game to be won is performed (Fig. 98 (c)). Further, in the game in which the third symbol display device 42 wins the winning combination gate 413 and the V area 435, the right-handed operation should be performed after passing through the winning combination gate 413. An auxiliary explanatory image such as "After winning the Kroon" is displayed. Further, in the timer display area, from the display of "5/15" indicating that the time when the game ball passes through the induction valve 451 is 5 seconds after the start of the count-up, "5 /" after updating the target time. The display is changed to "35". In the timer display area, the count-up display is continuously performed.

Here, it is assumed that the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413D at the passage timing 1 shown in FIG. 96 (that is, 8 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451). In the third symbol display device 42, after passing through the winning combination gate 413D, an image of “16R acquisition!” Showing the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413D through which the game ball has passed is displayed (FIG. 98 (d)). In the timer display area, "13/35" indicating that the time when the game ball passes through the combination gate 413D is 13 seconds after the start of the count-up is displayed.

Next, the character image of "V OPEN!" Indicates that the V area 435 has been opened is displayed on the third symbol display device 42, and the timer effect display image of the crune winning / V winning is displayed in the V area 435. It is changed to the timer effect display image of the right-handed notification that "Right-handed V prize is decided by 35 seconds elapse!", Which indicates that the game to win the game ball by right-handed is performed (Fig. 98 (e)). .. Further, the third symbol display device 42 has an auxiliary explanatory image for notifying the player of the closing time of the V regions 435A to 435D in order to supplementarily explain the game in which the game ball is won in the V region 435 by right-handed striking. Is displayed. For example, with respect to the V region 435A, if the game ball has passed the role-matching gate 413D, the auxiliary "A: Closed when 21 seconds have passed" indicates that the game ball will be closed 21 seconds after the start of the count-up. An explanatory image is displayed. Further, the image of "B: closed after 23 seconds has elapsed" is displayed for the V region 435B, the image of "C: closed after 25 seconds have elapsed" is displayed for the V region 435C, and "D: closed after 25 seconds have elapsed" for the V region 435D. The image "Closed after 27 seconds" is displayed. In the timer display area, an image of "14/35" indicating the time at the time when the timer effect display image of the right-handed notification is displayed is displayed.

When the game ball enters the V region 435, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "V prize!" Showing that the V prize has been detected (FIG. 98 (f)). In the timer display area, an image of "19/35" showing the time when the game ball wins the V area 435A is displayed.

In this way, the player is given a feeling of excitement by showing the passage of time related to the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player to operate. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the left-handed operation prompted by the timer display effect of the left-handed notification when the induction valve 451 passes, so that the game is performed while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation. Since the timer display effect processing of the right-handed display is performed to execute the second effect (timer display effect of the right-handed notification when passing through the role-ream gate 413) that prompts the operation of the player, the player can elapse the time related to the operation. Is continuously given to give a feeling of excitement, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player's operation.

When 35 seconds have passed without the game ball entering the V area 435, an image such as "timeout!" Or "V challenge failed!" Indicates that the V prize has been detected on the third symbol display device 42. Is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment,
A main control device that performs a lottery that can determine whether or not to perform a predetermined effect that encourages the player's operation, triggered by the detection of a ball entered by the start winning device 33a for special figure 1 or the start winning device 33b for special figure 2. The jackpot lottery process (step S501) executed by the CPU 501 of 261
Execution condition to be executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that determines whether or not the predetermined execution condition that 5 seconds have passed from the jackpot confirmation display when it is determined as a result of the lottery to perform a predetermined effect is satisfied. The establishment determination process (step S3201A) and
As a result of the above determination, when it is determined that the predetermined execution condition is satisfied, a predetermined effect (left-handed notification when the induction valve 451 passes) prompts the player's operation while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation. The left-handed notification timer display effect process (step S3201C) executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that executes the timer display effect) is provided (for example, the gaming machine according to (C0) described above). As a result, the player is given a feeling of excitement by showing the passage of time related to the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player to operate.

Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the left-handed operation urged by the timer display effect of the left-handed notification when the induction valve 451 passes, so that the game is performed while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation. The right-handed display timer display effect process is performed to execute the second effect (timer display effect of right-handed notification when passing through the combination gate 413) that encourages the operation of the person. As a result, the player is continuously given a feeling of excitement by continuously indicating the passage of time related to the operation, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player's operation.

In the present embodiment, as in the fourth embodiment, it is necessary to separate the game balls to determine the number of rounds and the presence or absence of the probability change state. However, in the fourth embodiment, the combination gate 413 is the combination gate 413E. , The point that there are two of the combination gates 413F, the method of allocating the number of rounds for each combination gate 413, and the closing timing of the V region 435 are different. FIG. 99 (a) is a special figure 1 jackpot lottery table of the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 99 (b) is a special figure 2 jackpot lottery table. FIG. 100 is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the combination gate and a guide lever that closes the V region.

In the gaming machine of the fourth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, when the gaming ball flowing down the gaming area passes through the winning combination gate 413, when the gaming ball passes through the winning combination gate 413, the combination gate 413 is used. The number of rounds in the jackpot round game state that occurs based on the passage of is uniquely determined, but in the gaming machine of this embodiment, as in the sixth embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the role-matching gate 413. , The number of rounds in the jackpot round gaming state generated based on the passage of the winning combination gate 413 is drawn, and it is drawn whether it is probable variation rich or normal confirmation, or both are possible.

As in the sixth embodiment, the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state of this embodiment is composed of two winning combination gates 413E and a winning combination gate 413F, but the gaming ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 is the fourth embodiment. Similarly, it is guided to the back surface of the game board 30 and discharged. Therefore, as in the fourth embodiment, after the game ball is passed through the winning combination gate 413 by left-handed hitting, a game is performed aiming at the specific game state transition transition ball entry portion 431 by right-handed hitting.

In this embodiment, in both the case of the special figure 1 jackpot and the special figure 2 jackpot, when the winning combination gate 413E is passed, the number of rounds for passing the winning combination gate 413E, the lottery random numbers 1 to 10, are acquired, and the number of rounds is obtained. Is decided by lottery. When the number of rounds lottery random numbers are 1 to 5, the closing timing of the V region is longer than usual (16 seconds after the passage of the V region 435A and the passage of the combination gate 413, and 17 of the V region 435B after the passage of the combination gate 413. After a second, the V region 435C is set to 18 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V region 435D is set to 19 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413), so that there is a possibility of entering the V region 435. It is a state with a V chance and a probable change. When the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, the closing timing of the V region 435 is set earlier than usual (V regions 435A to 435D are set to 2 seconds after passing through the winning combination gate 413), so that the V region 435 is set. It is a state where there is no V chance that it is difficult to enter the ball, and it is usually a confirmed state.

In both the case of the special figure 1 big hit and the special figure 2 big hit, when passing through the winning combination gate 413F, the number of rounds for passing the winning combination gate 413F, random numbers 1 to 10 for lottery are acquired, and the number of rounds is determined by lottery. To. When the number of rounds lottery random number is 1 to 5, the closing timing of V area 435 is the normal timing (V area 435A is 8 seconds after passing through the winning combination gate 413, V area 435B is 9 after passing through the winning combination gate 413. After seconds, the V region 435C is set to 10 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, and the V region 435D is set to 11 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413). Whether the probability change is confirmed or the normal confirmation is not confirmed at this point, and if the player's operation is good, there is a possibility that the V region 435 will be won. When the random number for the number of rounds lottery is 6 to 10, in the case of the special figure 1 jackpot, the closing timing of the V region 435 is set earlier than the above-mentioned normal timing, so that there is no V chance described above, which is normal. Winning is confirmed. On the other hand, in the case of the special figure 2 big hit, since the closing timing of the V region 435 is set to the above-mentioned normal timing, the presence or absence of the occurrence of the probability variation state is not determined at this point, and if the player's operation is good. There is a possibility that the V region 435 will be won. In this way, the difference is made so that the special figure 2 jackpot is more likely to be in a probable change state.

Next, in this embodiment, the jackpot game state lottery display process executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 and the display mode of the third symbol display device from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won are different from the eleventh embodiment. Will be explained. Specifically, in this embodiment, the left-handed operation based on the timer display effect of the left-handed notification is performed, and the presence or absence of the above-mentioned V chance is determined based on the passage of the winning combination gate 413, and the determination is made. A point different from that of the eleventh embodiment will be described in that the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is performed when the result of the above is the V chance. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery display process.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413, and if so, which combination gate 413 has passed. If it is determined that the gate has passed the combination gate 413, the process proceeds to step S3208B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3209.

In step S3208B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 can allow the game balls to enter the V region 435 by the gate random numbers E and F acquired by passing the game balls through the winning combination gates 413E and 413F. Determine if there is a V chance. For example, when the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 is a special figure 1 big hit, the CPU 521 passes through the winning combination gate 413E and the gate random number E is 1 to 5 with reference to the above-mentioned special figure 1 big hit lottery table. If the command indicates that there is a V chance, or if the command indicates that the gate random number F is 1 to 5 and the gate random number F has passed through the combination gate 413F, it is determined that there is a V chance, and the process proceeds to step S3208D. Further, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45, for example, in the case of a special figure 1 jackpot, is a command indicating that the gate random number E is 6 to 10 or a command indicating that the gate random number E is 6 to 10 or a command indicating that the gate random number E is 6 to 10 or a combination gate 413F. If it has passed and has received a command indicating that the gate random number F is 6 to 10, it is determined that there is no V chance, and the process proceeds to step S3208C. In the case of a special figure 2 big hit, the determination is made in the same manner with reference to the above-mentioned special figure 2 big hit lottery table.

When it is determined that there is a V chance, in step S3208D, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has an image indicating that there is a possibility of entering the V area 435, that is, there is a V chance (for example, a character image of "V chance!"). Then, the timer effect display image of the right-handed notification described above is displayed, and the count-up display of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is continued. As described above, in this embodiment, the left-handed operation based on the timer display effect of the left-handed notification is performed, and the presence or absence of the above-mentioned V chance is determined based on the passage of the winning combination gate 413, and the determination is made. Only when the result has a V chance, the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is performed.

When it is determined that there is no V chance, in step S3208C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 has an image indicating that there is a possibility of entering the V area 435, that is, there is no V chance (for example, "No V chance, sorry!" (Character image) and the number of rounds are displayed, and this process ends. That is, in this embodiment, even if the left-handed operation is performed based on the timer display effect of the left-handed notification, the above-mentioned determination of the presence or absence of the V chance is performed based on the passage of the winning combination gate 413, and the result of the determination is the result of the determination. If there is no V chance, the player is informed that the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is not performed.

Next, a display mode from the time when the jackpot is determined in the present embodiment to the determination of the number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state and the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state will be described. FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (f) are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed to the time when the V prize is won when the result of the V chance determination is a hit.

On the third symbol display device 42, the jackpot combination (for example, “7”, “7”, “7”) according to the third symbol is confirmed and displayed (FIG. 102 (a)).

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, a timer display effect image of the left-handed notification for firing the game ball by left-handed is displayed (FIG. 102 (b)).

Next, in the third symbol display device 42, immediately after the game ball passes through the induction valve 451 it is changed to the timer effect display image of the Kroon winning / V winning (FIG. 102 (c)). Further, in the game in which the third symbol display device 42 wins the winning combination gate 413 and the V area 435, the right-handed operation passes through the winning combination gate 413, and the result of determining whether or not there is a V chance is won (V). An auxiliary explanatory image such as "Right-handed is a Kroon prize, after the display of V chance" is displayed to indicate that it should be performed after it is displayed that "there is a chance".

In the third symbol display device 42, for example, after passing through the winning combination gate 413D, an image of "16R acquisition!" Showing the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413D through which the game ball has passed is displayed (FIG. 102 (d)). .. Further, at this time, an image (for example, an image such as "V chance determination in progress") may be displayed indicating that the presence or absence of the V chance is determined based on the passage of the combination gate 413.

Next, on the third symbol display device 42, a character image of "V chance is present!" Is displayed indicating that the result of determination of the presence or absence of V chance is winning (V chance is present), and the V area 435 is opened. The text image of "V OPEN!", Which indicates that the game has been played, and the timer effect display image of the Kroon prize / V prize, indicate that a game is performed in which the game ball is won by hitting right in the V area 435, "35 seconds have passed." It is changed to the timer effect display image of the right-handed notification saying "Please decide the V prize by right-handed!" (Fig. 102 (e)). Further, the third symbol display device 42 displays an auxiliary explanatory image informing the player of the closing time of the V regions 435A to 435D.

When the game ball enters the V region 435, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "V prize!" Showing that the V prize has been detected (FIG. 102 (f)). Along with the opening of the V region 435, a jackpot round game has also started.

In this way, the result of the lottery (determination of the presence or absence of the V chance) of whether or not the player executes the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is the result of executing the timer display effect of the right-handed notification (with V chance). Only in the case of, since the passage of time related to the operation is continuously shown to give a feeling of excitement continuously, the interest in the operation effect (timer display effect of right-handed notification) that encourages the player's operation. The sex can be improved.

Next, the case where the result of the determination of the presence or absence of the V chance described above is no V chance will be described. FIGS. 103A to 103F are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the jackpot is confirmed when the result of the V chance determination is off.

The third symbol display device 42 is provided with the same display effect as in FIGS. 102 (a) to 102 (d) up to FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (d). From FIG. 103 (e) is different from FIG. 102.

When the result of the determination of the presence or absence of the V chance is wrong (no V chance), the third symbol display device 42 indicates that the result of the judgment of the presence or absence of the V chance is wrong, "No V chance, sorry. The character image of "!" And the right-handed operation for passing the game ball through the V area 435 are not necessary, but the right-handed operation for the big hit round game is necessary. Aim for the big prize opening by hitting right! ”Is displayed (Fig. 103 (e)). In this embodiment, there is no big difference between the two right-handed operations, but the right-handed operation may be different in the intensity of the firing operation. In such a case, the player can perform an appropriate operation by the right-handed notification image of the jackpot round game.

Next, on the third symbol display device 42, images of "first round start!" And "1R" indicating that the jackpot round game has started are displayed (FIG. 103 (f), and the player strikes right. Perform a jackpot round game by operation.

In this way, when the result of the determination of the presence or absence of the V chance is wrong, the player no longer needs to perform the right-handed operation for entering the V region 435, and causes the player to enter the game ball into the large winning opening 32a. Since you know that you only have to perform the right-handed operation for this, you can switch your mind and execute the jackpot round game.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment,
Since the left-handed operation prompted by the left-handed notification timer display effect is performed, the right-handed notification timer display effect that prompts the player's right-handed operation is executed while showing the passage of time related to the player's operation. It is provided with a determination process (step S3208B) for determining whether or not there is a V chance executed by the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 that performs a lottery.
As a result of the lottery, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 executes the timer display effect of the right-handed notification when it is determined that there is a V chance and the timer display effect of the right-handed notification is executed (for example, described above). (D3). As a result, the player has a lottery (determination of the presence or absence of V chance) as to whether or not to execute the timer display effect of the right-handed notification, and the result is the result of executing the timer display effect of the right-handed notification (with V chance). Only when there is, the passage of time related to the operation is continuously shown to give a feeling of excitement continuously, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the operation effect that encourages the player to operate.

In the first embodiment, for example, the closing timing of the V region 435C is 20 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413, and in the other examples, the closing timing of the V region 435 is longer than 10 seconds, so that the V region 435 is closed. There is a concern that fraudulent acts against the V area 435 will be more likely to occur due to the longer opening time of. In this regard, in the present embodiment, as described below, during the period of the game in which the game ball is passed through the V area 435, the game is played in the V area 435 during the period in which the game ball is easily entered into the V area 435. A period in which it is difficult to enter the ball is provided so that fraudulent activity against the V region 435 is suitably reduced.

The configuration of the ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 104 is a front view of the game board 30 of the thirteenth embodiment. FIG. 105 is a top view of the advantageous gaming state transition transition ball entry section 411, the specific game state transition transition ball entry section 431, and its surroundings.

In the specific game state transition transition ball entry portion 431 of the present embodiment, the second guide surface 476 of the second guide portion 475 is provided up to a position higher than that of the first embodiment, for example. Further, in the specific game state transition transition ball entry portion 431, the number of protrusions 475a arranged on the left half of the second guide surface 476 is changed to the number of protrusions 475a arranged on the right half of the second guide surface 476. It is configured to be more than (for example, 2 to 3 times more). Therefore, in this embodiment, the game ball that has entered the specific game state transition entry unit 431 has a long rolling time on the second guide surface 476 (particularly, the left half of the second guide surface 476). For example, it takes longer time to enter the specific area 435 than the game ball that has entered the specific game state transition entry unit 431 of the first embodiment. For example, the time required to enter the specific region 435 of this embodiment is from 4 seconds at the shortest (when using the advantageous route 472) to 15 at the longest (when flowing down the left half of the second guide surface 476 described above). It is said to be seconds.

The ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific gaming state of this embodiment includes V regions 435A to 435F (collectively referred to as V region 435) and six V winning sensors 433A to 433F provided in each V region 435A to 435F. Collectively, it is equipped with a V winning sensor 433). Further, the specific game state transition transition ball entry portion 431 structurally covers the V region 435A to 435F (collectively referred to as the V region 435), and the guide levers 437A to 437F (collectively referred to as the guidance lever 437). To be equipped.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot round gaming state is a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and after it is determined that the jackpot will be a jackpot, the game ball enters the ball entry unit 411 for shifting to the advantageous gaming state, so that the jackpot gaming state Includes a period in which the number of rounds in the game is determined, and a period in which it is determined whether or not a probability variation state occurs when the game ball enters the specific game state transition entry unit 431. The game board 30 is configured to facilitate the entry of the game ball launched by the player's right-handed operation into the entrance portion 456 of the taxiway 455 during this period, which is advantageous to the player. ..

Next, the operation mode of the specific area 435 during the period in which the game ball can enter the specific area 435 of this embodiment will be described. FIGS. 106 (a) to 106 (f) are diagrams illustrating an operation mode of the specific region 435 during a period in which the game ball can enter the specific region 435. FIG. 107 is a time chart of a game ball that has passed through the combination gate 413 and a guide lever 437 that closes the V region 435.

During the period in which it is determined whether or not a probabilistic state occurs when the game ball enters the specific game state transition entry unit 431, the open state in which the game ball can enter the specific area 435 and the game ball remain. A first period (FIGS. 106 (b), (c)) in which the game ball is more likely to enter the specific area 435 than in other periods (normal state, etc.) by opening and closing in the closed state where the ball cannot enter. The period shown in FIG. 106) and the second period (the period shown in FIGS. 106 (d) and (e)) that occurs after the first period and it is more difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 435 than the first period. ) And secondly, the game ball enters the specific area 435 by opening and closing the specific area 435 between the open state where the game ball can enter and the closed state where the game ball cannot enter. A first period (the period shown in FIG. 106 (f)), which is easy to ball, is included.

An example of the opening / closing pattern of the induction lever 437 in this embodiment will be described. First, the guide levers 437A to 437F are released to the intermediate position of the V region 435 when the jackpot is confirmed. The intermediate position is a position where the game ball cannot enter the V region 435. In the first period, which constitutes the first period, the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E start the opening operation from the intermediate position to the maximum open position when the combination gate 413 is passed, and the induction levers 437B, When the 437D and 437F start the closing operation from the intermediate position to the completely closed position (FIG. 106 (a)), the V regions 435A, 435C and 437E are in a state where the ball can enter, and the V regions 435B, 435D and 437F enter. The ball becomes impossible.

During the first period, which constitutes the first period, the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E start the closing operation from the maximum open position to the completely closed position, and the induction levers 437B, 437D, and 437F start from the completely closed position. By starting the opening operation toward the maximum opening position (FIG. 106 (b)), the V region 435A, 435C, 437E can enter the ball while the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E move from the maximum opening position to the intermediate position. While the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E are in the completely closed position from the intermediate position, the V regions 435A, 435C, and 437E are in the non-entry state, and the V regions 435B, 435D, and 437F are in the middle from the completely closed position. The V areas 435B, 435D, and 437F are in a state where the ball cannot enter while the position is reached, and the V areas 435B, 435D, and 437F are in a state where the ball can enter while the V areas 435B, 435D, and 437F are in the maximum open position from the intermediate position. It is said that.

During the first period, which constitutes the first period, the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E start the opening operation from the completely closed position to the intermediate position, and the induction levers 437B, 437D, and 437F are intermediate from the maximum open position. By starting the closing operation toward the position (FIG. 106 (c)), the V region 435A, 435C, 437E is in a non-entry state while the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E move from the completely closed position to the intermediate position. Then, while the V regions 435B, 435D, and 437F move from the maximum open position to the intermediate position, the V regions 435B, 435D, and 437F are in a state where the ball can enter. This first period is a period during which the induction lever 437 can be opened and closed once (operations from the period 1A to the period 1C) twice. In this way, by performing the closing operation and the opening operation for the V region 435 in the first period, the V region 435 is illegal as compared with the case where the V region 435 is continuously opened for a long time as in the first embodiment. Actions can be reduced.

In this second period, the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E reach the intermediate position from the completely closed position for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second), and the induction levers 437A, 437C, and 437E are in the V region 435A, 435C, 437E. The ball cannot be entered (the same position as the intermediate position shown in FIG. 106 (a)), and the guide levers 437B, 437D, and 437F reach the intermediate position from the maximum open position for a predetermined time (for example, 1 second). ), The induction levers 437B, 437D, and 437F are interval periods during which the V regions 435B, 435D, and 437F are maintained in a non-entry state (FIG. 106 (d)). The second period may be set so that the time is 1 second or longer and does not exceed the length of the first period (8 seconds). As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to cheat on the V region 435, and it is possible to reduce the slack in the game due to the length of the second period being too long. In addition, although the opening / closing pattern in which the non-entry state in the second period is the intermediate position is adopted, the opening / closing pattern in which the non-entry state in the second period is the completely closed position may be adopted.

The first period that occurs after the second period is a repetition of the operation of the first period described above, and the above-mentioned period 1A starting from the state shown in FIG. 106 (e) and the above-mentioned period 1A and FIG. 106 (f). It is composed of the above-mentioned first period B starting from the state shown in the above and the above-mentioned first C period (not shown). If the game ball is rolling on the second guide surface 474 during the new first period, the second period and the first period are repeated after the new first period.

In this way, the period during which it is determined whether or not the probability variation state occurs when the game ball enters the specific game state transition entry unit 431 is the period during which the game ball is likely to enter the specific area 435 ( In particular, compared to the case where the opening time is longer than the closing time), the period during which it is difficult for the game ball to enter the specific area 435 (second period) is provided. Since the period during which the specific area 435 can enter the ball is shortened, it is possible to make it difficult for fraudulent acts against the specific area 435 to be performed. Further, since the first period occurs after the second period, it is possible to reduce the chance of passing the game ball through the specific area 435 by providing the second period.

Further, also in this embodiment, the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is set to 30 seconds, so that when the passing timing of the combination gate 413 is late (for example, passing timings 2 and 3), the maximum opening time is set. After that, the opening / closing operation of the V region 435 is forcibly terminated. Therefore, also in this embodiment, the earlier the time to pass through the combination gate 413, the easier it is to enter the V region 435.

Next, the jackpot game state lottery display process of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery display process.

The CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the processes of steps S3201 to S3203 after a predetermined time has elapsed from the reception of the jackpot game state lottery command (according to the timing at which the induction valve is released). That is, in step S3201, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays a right-handed notification image for notifying the player to perform a right-handed hit on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3202, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413 on the third symbol display device 42. In step S3203, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 emits light of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 with the lighting color of the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 according to the distribution of the number of rounds for each combination gate 413. Let me.

In step S3205, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the right-handed game ball has passed through the induction valve 451. If it is determined that the induction valve 451 has passed, the process proceeds to step S3206, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3208.

In step S3206, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the first tilt display. In step S3207, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 drives the effect accessory (clock accessory) 403 to perform a countdown display (analog display) of the remaining time of the maximum opening time of the V region.

In step S3208, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed through the combination gate 413, and if so, which combination gate 413 has passed. If it is determined that the gate has passed the combination gate 413, the process proceeds to step S3209, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3211.

In step S3209, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display the number of rounds corresponding to the winning combination gate 413 through which the game ball has passed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the number of rounds display lamps 421. Turn on the lamp. In step S3210, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 performs the second tilt display.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. If the passage of the V winning sensor 433 is detected, the process proceeds to step S3212, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3213.

In step S3212, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image for notifying the V prize (for example, a character image of "V prize!") On the third symbol display device 42, and SUPERV for notifying that it is a probability variation jackpot. Turn on the lamp 422. In step S3213, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the normal winning sensor. If the passage of the normal winning sensor is detected, the process proceeds to step S3214, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3214A.

In step S3214, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays (out-displays) an image (for example, a character image of "V prize not won!") Notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the V prize has not been won. At the same time, the V lamp 423 that notifies that it is a normal jackpot is turned on.

In step S3214A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not it is the timing to end the first period (the period in which the V area 435 is opened and closed so that the game ball can easily enter the V area 435). To do. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 drives the induction lever 437A that closes the V region 435A from the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 via the sub control device 262 with reference to the V region 435A. Eight seconds after receiving the drive start command sent to the mechanism (same as when passing through the combination gate 413), it is determined that all of the V regions 435A to 435F have completed the first first period. Then, the process proceeds to step S3214B. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S3214B. The end timing of the first first period is 8 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413, but the end timing of the first period after the second time is the time of the second period (interval period). It occurs every 9 seconds after the end timing of the first period immediately before.

In step S3214B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 notifies the information about the game of passing the game ball through the V area 435 at the timing when the V area 435 ends the first period. Specifically, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 causes the third symbol display device 42 to display a V-passing game attention image that draws attention to the game passing through the V region 435 during the second period, and proceeds to step S3215. .. The V-passing game attention image can be displayed even in the second period after the second time. The V-passing game attention image will be described later.

In step S3215, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the V region has elapsed. If the maximum opening time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S3216, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3216, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image (for example, a character image of "timeout!") Notifying the third symbol display device 42 that the maximum opening time has elapsed, and is usually a big hit. The V lamp 423 that notifies the above is turned on.

Next, a display mode of the process of determining the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state will be described. FIGS. 109 (a) to 109 (f) are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the number of jackpot rounds is determined to the time when the V prize is won. The display mode from the time when the jackpot is confirmed until the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is determined is the same as in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (d).

In this embodiment, it is assumed that the game ball passes through the combination gate 413 8 seconds after passing through the induction valve 451.

When the game ball passes through the combination gate 413, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "8R acquisition", an image showing a prize for the combination gate 413B, and "remaining time: 22" indicating the remaining time. The image of "seconds" is displayed (Fig. 109 (a)). Immediately after that, the third symbol display device 42 displays the image of "8R acquisition" and the image of "remaining time: 22 seconds" indicating the remaining time, and replaces the image showing the winning of the winning combination gate 413B. An image of "Determine a V prize based on the remaining time!" And an image showing the opening / closing status of the V area 435 are displayed (FIG. 109 (b)). The images showing the opening / closing status of the V region 435 at this time are all displayed as "CLOSE" because the guide levers 437A to 437F are in the intermediate position and are in a non-entry state. That is, the initial position of the V region 435 in the game in which the game ball is inserted into the V region 435 is recognized by the player as a position where the guide levers 437A to 437F are in the intermediate position and the ball cannot be entered.

Next, on the third symbol display device 42, as an image 1 second after the passage of the combination gate 413B (9 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451), an image of "Determine V prize in the remaining time!" And V. An image showing the opening / closing status of the area 435 and an image of "remaining time: 21 seconds" showing the remaining time are displayed (FIG. 109 (c)). The image showing the opening / closing status of the V region 435 at this time is displayed as "OPEN" because the V regions 435A, 435C, and 435E are opened to the maximum open position, and the V regions 435B, 435D, and 435F are completely closed positions. It is displayed as "CLOSE" because it is closed to. As a result, the player can recognize that the period during which the opening / closing operation of the V region 435 is performed makes it easier for the game ball to enter the V region 435.

Next, on the third symbol display device 42, as an image 3 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413B (11 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451), an image of "Determine V prize in the remaining time!" And V. An image showing the opening / closing status of the area 435 and an image of "remaining time: 19 seconds" showing the remaining time are displayed (FIG. 109 (d)). The image showing the opening / closing status of the V region 435 at this time is displayed as "CLOSE" because the V regions 435A, 435C, and 435E are closed to the completely closed position, and the V regions 435B, 435D, and 435F are the maximum open positions. Since it is open to, "OPEN" is displayed.

Next, on the third symbol display device 42, as an image 8 to 9 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413B (16 to 17 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451), "Determine the V prize with the remaining time!" Image, an image showing the opening / closing status of the V region 435, and an image of "remaining time: 14 seconds" showing the remaining time are displayed (FIG. 109 (e)). The images showing the opening / closing status of the V region 435 at this time are all displayed as "CLOSE" as in the initial position because the guide levers 437A to 437F are in the intermediate position and are in a non-entry state. Therefore, the player sees the image 8 to 9 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413B, and the opening / closing pattern of the V region 435 is a pattern that returns to the initial position (ball entry impossible state) after the opening / closing operation. If the player has not won the V prize by the time when the ball cannot be entered (that is, during the opening / closing operation period), he / she may give up that there is no possibility of winning the V area 435.

At this time, the third symbol display device 42 shown in FIG. 109 (e) is provided with a V-passing game attention image (“V-passing game attention image” that draws attention to the game passing through the V region 435 as information regarding the game in which the game ball is passed through the V region 435. The image of "V There is still a chance to win a prize!") Is displayed. The display period of the V-passing game attention image is 1 second in which all the V regions 435 are in a non-entry state. If the display period of the V-passing game attention image is set to 1 second or longer, the player can sufficiently recognize that the V-passing game should be paid attention to. The V-passing game attention image shows that the V region 435 is in a state where the ball cannot be entered at the present time, but the V region 435 is in the state where the ball can be entered from now on. From the V-passing game attention image that the player says, "There is still a V-winning chance!", There is still a V-winning chance in this V-winning passing game (the period during which the V area 435 is easy to enter the game ball is It can be recognized that it will come again).

In this way, in the jackpot round game state, the game ball is placed in the specific area 435 during the period in which it is determined whether or not the probability change state is generated by the game ball entering the specific game state transition entry unit 431. If only a second period in which it is difficult to enter the ball is provided, it may be mistaken that the possibility of entering the specific area 435 has disappeared, and the entry into the specific area 435 may be overlooked. By displaying a V-passing game attention image such as "There is still a chance to win a V!" During the period of, even during the second period when it is difficult for the player to enter the game ball into the specific area 435. Since we are aware that there will be a chance of winning a V after that, it will be mistaken that there is no possibility of entering the specific area 435 in the second period, and we will miss the entry to the specific area 435. The risk can be reduced.

As the V-passing game attention image, in addition to the image that indirectly focuses on the rolling region 417 such as "There is still a chance to win V!", Directly such as "Attention to V region!" An image that draws attention to the rolling region 417 may be added. Further, by continuing to display the character image displayed until the V prize is determined, the image may be an image suggesting to the player that the chance of the V prize remains.

FIG. 109 (f) shows that the game ball has not passed through the combination gate 413 (continuing to roll in the rolling region 417) 12 seconds after passing through the combination gate 413 (20 seconds after passing through the induction valve 451). It is a display mode of the 3rd symbol display device 42 in the state (). At this time, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image of "Determine V winning based on the remaining time!", An image of "10 seconds" indicating the remaining time, and an image showing the opening / closing status of the V area 435. ing. The image showing the opening / closing status of the V region 435 shows that the V regions 435A, 435C, and 435E are closed to the completely closed position, and the V regions 435B, 435D, and 435F are opened to the maximum open position. Shown. At this time, when the game ball wins in the V area 435E, the image of "V winning!" Is displayed on the third symbol display device 42 indicating that the V winning is detected.

In this way, the player who sees the V-passing game attention image of "There is still a chance to win V!" In the second period pays attention to the game ball rolling on the second guide surface 476 again. Since it is reduced that the game ball that has passed through the continuous gate 413 misses the process of entering the V region 435, the image of "V prize!" Showing that the V prize is detected on the third symbol display device 42 is displayed. You can enjoy a great sense of accomplishment in what is displayed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the thirteenth embodiment,
The game area 30a where the game ball launched by the game ball launcher is guided, and
Main control capable of shifting to a jackpot round game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area 30a through either the start winning device 33a for special drawing 1 or the starting winning device 33b for special drawing 2. The jackpot determination process (step S501) executed by the CPU 501 of the device 261 and
When the game ball flowing down the game area 30a passes through the V winning sensor 433 in the V area 435, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is changed from the value at the low probability to the value at the high probability, and the state shifts to the high probability state. The next game state setting process to be executed by the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 is provided.
The jackpot round game state is at least
The first period in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the V area 435 by changing the V region 435 into an open state in which it is easy to enter the game ball and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball.
Includes a second period in which the V region 435 is in a closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter.
In the second period, the process of step S3214B of the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 for displaying the V-passing game attention image for paying attention to the game of passing the game ball through the V area 435 on the third symbol display device 42 is provided (for example, ((for example). The gaming machine) according to E0).

The jackpot round game state is changed to at least an open state in which the V area 435 is easy to enter the game ball and a closed state in which the game ball is difficult to enter, so that the game ball is easy to enter the V area 435. It includes a first period and a second period in which the V region 435 is in a closed state where it is difficult for the game ball to enter. As a result, as compared with the case where the advantageous gaming state is composed of only the first period, the period during which the specific area can be entered is shortened by the amount of the second period, so that the specific area can be entered. It can make cheating less likely. In the second period, a process of displaying a V-passing game attention image (an image of "There is still a chance to win a V!") On the third symbol display device 42 to pay attention to the game of passing the game ball through the V area 435. Will be done. As a result, information on the game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area in the second period is notified, so that there is no possibility of entering the specific area even if the second period is provided in the advantageous gaming state. The risk of being misidentified by the player is reduced, and the risk of missing a ball entering a specific area is also reduced. Therefore, it is possible to preferably reduce fraudulent activities in a specific area.

In addition, the jackpot round game state is an opening in which the V region 435 easily enters the game ball, which occurs after the first period, the second period that occurs after the first period, and the second period. Since it includes a first period in which it is easy to enter the game ball into the V region 435 by being changed to a state and a closed state in which it is difficult to enter the game ball, the V region is provided by providing the second period. It is possible to reduce the chance that the game ball is passed through the 435. In the second period, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 provides information on the game in which the game ball is passed through the V area 435 generated when the next first period is entered (“V winning chance is still available!”. Information shown in the image of) is notified. As a result, the player can recognize that the game ball is likely to enter the V area 435 again, so that there is a possibility that the player will enter the V area 435 even if the second period is provided in the jackpot round game state. The risk of being mistaken for lost by the player is further reduced, and the risk of missing the ball entering the V region 435 is further reduced (for example, the gaming machine described in (E1) above).

In the thirteenth embodiment, the information regarding the game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area 435 displayed in the second period is the V-passing game attention image that draws attention to the game in which the game ball is passed through the specific area 435. This embodiment is different from the thirteenth embodiment in that it also includes information for prompting the player to perform a predetermined operation (for example, a right-handed launching operation of a game ball).

Therefore, in Example 13 (the same applies to Examples 1 to 12), the game ball used for the game of passing the game ball through the V region 435 is one ball that enters during the opening / closing operation of the induction valve 451. Although it was a game ball (closed when one game ball passed through), in this embodiment, the induction valve 451 is opened and closed a plurality of times. That is, if the game ball that entered during the opening of the first induction valve 451 cannot finally win the V region 435, the second induction valve 451 is opened at a predetermined timing, and the V region 435 is performed. Give more chances to win a prize than in Example 13. Hereinafter, a specific example for realizing this configuration will be described.

The jackpot game state lottery process of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 110 is a flowchart illustrating the jackpot game state lottery process of the fourteenth embodiment. The jackpot game state lottery process of the present embodiment will be described mainly on the points different from the jackpot game state lottery process of the first embodiment.

In step S517, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the induction valve sensor 453 is turned on when the induction valve 451 is opened. If the induction valve sensor 453 is on, the process proceeds to step S517A, and if the induction valve sensor 453 is off, the process proceeds to step S521.

In step S517A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether the induction valve 451 is opened for the first time or for the second and subsequent induction valves 451.

In step S519, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 starts measuring the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the V region 435 when the induction valve 451 is opened for the first time.

In step S521, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the maximum opening time of the induction valve 451 has elapsed. When the maximum opening time of the induction valve 451 has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S523, and if not, the present process ends.

In step S523, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 closes the induction valve 451 and proceeds to step S523A. In step S523A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the induction valve 451 is opened for the first time. If it is the first opening of the induction valve, the process proceeds to steps S525 to S537 (the processing of determining the number of rounds based on the passage of the joint gate 413 and the processing of opening and closing the V region 435), and if it is the second and subsequent opening, proceed. These processes are skipped and the process proceeds to step S539.

In step S539, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. When the game ball passes through the V winning sensor 433, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 turns on the probability change flag (step S541), and proceeds to step S547. If the game ball has not passed through the V winning sensor 433, the process proceeds to step S543.

In step S543, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the maximum opening time (30 seconds) of the V region 435 has elapsed. When the maximum opening time has elapsed from the start of measurement, the normal flag is turned on (step S545), and the process proceeds to step S547 (complete closure of V region 435). If the maximum opening time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S546A.

In step S546A, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the discharge unit 484 provided in front of the V region 435. As a result of the determination, if the ball has entered the discharge unit 484, the process proceeds to step S546B, and if not, the present process ends. In this embodiment, instead of providing the normal winning sensor in the discharge unit 484, a discharge unit sensor for detecting that the discharge unit 484 has passed is provided. The CPU 501 of the main control device 261 outputs a command indicating that the game ball has passed the discharge unit 484 based on the passage detection signal of the discharge unit sensor to the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 via the sub control device.

In step S546B, the CPU 501 of the main control device 261 determines whether or not the end timing of the first period has arrived. As a result of the determination, when the end timing of the first period arrives, the process returns to the state before step S515 (opening process of the induction valve 451) described above, and the second opening process of the induction valve 451 is performed. If the end timing of the first period has not arrived, this process ends.

Next, the jackpot game state lottery display process of this embodiment will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a jackpot game state lottery display process. The jackpot game state lottery display process of the present embodiment will be described mainly on the points different from the jackpot game state lottery display process of the thirteenth embodiment.

In step S3211, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has passed the V winning sensor 433. If the passage of the V winning sensor 433 is detected, the process proceeds to step S3212 (notification of the V winning), otherwise the process proceeds to step S3213A.

In step S3213A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the game ball has entered the discharge unit 484. As a result of the determination, if the game ball has passed through the discharging unit 484, the process proceeds to step S3213B, and if not, the process proceeds to step S3214A.

In step S3213B, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 displays an image (for example, an image of “out!” Described later) showing that the game ball has entered the discharge unit 484 without entering the specific area 435. It is displayed on the symbol display device 42. In step S3214A, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 determines whether or not the end timing of the above-mentioned first period (the period during which the V region 435 is opened and closed and the game ball is likely to enter) has arrived. If it is the end timing of the first period, the process proceeds to step S3214C, otherwise the process ends.

In step S3214C, the CPU 521 of the display control device 45 hits the player right as the above-mentioned V-passing game attention image at least in the above-mentioned second period (the period in which the V region is closed and it is difficult for the game ball to enter). The third symbol display device 42 displays a right-handed notification V-passing game attention image that performs an operation and notifies that the induction valve 451 being opened for the second time is passed. The V-passing game attention image of the right-handed notification will be described later.

Next, a display mode of the process of determining the gaming state after the end of the jackpot round gaming state will be described. 112 (a) to 112 (f) are diagrams showing a display mode of the third symbol display device 42 from the time when the number of jackpot rounds is determined to the time when the V prize is won. The display mode from when the jackpot is confirmed until the number of rounds in the jackpot game state is determined is the same as in FIGS. 45 (a) to 45 (d), and the rounds are displayed from the passage of the winning combination gate 413. The display of the opening status of the first V region 435 is the same as that of FIGS. 109 (a) and 109 (b) of the thirteenth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 112 (a) and 112 (b), when the game ball passes through, for example, the winning combination gate 413D, the corresponding number of rounds is determined to be two rounds, the number of rounds is displayed, and the opening status of the V area 435 is displayed. Is displayed. After that, similarly to FIGS. 109 (c) and 109 (d), the opening status of the V region 435 and the countdown display of the maximum opening time are displayed.

Next, the game ball is ejected to the third symbol display device 42 as an image 6 seconds after the passage of the combination gate 413B (14 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451) without the game ball entering the V region 435. Based on the fact that the ball has entered the section 484, an image of "out!" Is displayed as an image informing this (FIG. 112 (c)). Note that FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which the game ball enters the discharge unit 484 by partially breaking the front side of the specific game state transition transition ball entry unit 431.

After that, the third symbol display device 42 displays an image showing the opening / closing status of the V region 435 and an image showing the remaining time, and 8 seconds after the passage of the service gate 413B (16 seconds after the passage of the induction valve 451). Later), an image showing the same opening / closing state as the initial state of the game in which the game ball is passed through the V region 435 (all CLOSE images) and an image showing the remaining time (“remaining time: 14 seconds”) are displayed. (Fig. 112 (d)). Therefore, the player may give up that there is no possibility of winning the V region 435 because the game ball enters the discharge unit 484 and the opening / closing pattern of the V region 435 is completed.

At this time, the third symbol display device 42 shown in FIG. 112 (d) has an image (gate reopen!) Notifying that the induction valve 451 has been opened again as information regarding the game in which the game ball is passed through the V region 435. ), And a right-handed notification V-passing game attention image (an image of "Right-handed to pass through the gate!") Is displayed. Normally, the induction valve 451 is opened only once, but due to the surprise that the induction valve 451 is opened again and that the second right-handed strike is required at this timing, the player V. The game of passing through the area 435 can be strongly noticed. The display period of the V-passing game attention image of the right-handed notification is adjusted to the opening time of the induction valve 451. In addition, if the content of the right-handed notification V-passing game attention image is changed according to the remaining time (for example, from the middle of the opening time of the induction valve 451 "Last chance of V winning! Right-handed!"), By strongly urging the player to hit right, the game passing through the V region 435 can be strongly noticed.

The player hits right during the display period of the V-passing game attention image of the right-handed notification, and the right-handed game ball passes through the induction valve 451 and passes through the combination gate 413 (note that the second induction valve). The passage of the combination gate 413 detected during the opening of 451 is not considered by the CPU 501 of the main controller 261; that is, the number of rounds is not determined twice), and the ball enters the V region 435. For example, it is displayed as shown in FIGS. 112 (e) and 112 (f).

In this way, the player can use the information displayed in the V-passing game attention image of the right-handed notification even during the second period in which the V region 435 is in a non-entry state (“gate reopen!” “ By "pass the gate with a right-handed strike!"), It can be recognized that a right-handed operation of newly passing the game ball through the V region 435 is required in the game of passing the game ball through the V region 435. If the player stops the operation during the period of the above period, it is possible to reduce the disadvantage that the V-winning machine that would otherwise be obtained cannot be obtained.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of Example 14,
The information regarding the game in which the game ball is passed through the V area 435 is information for prompting the operation of the player who passes the game ball through the V area 435 in the game (for example, the game machine of (E2) described above). According to this, the information regarding the game in which the game ball is passed through the V region 435 is the information for prompting the operation of the player who passes the game ball through the V region 435 in the game. As a result, the player can recognize that it is necessary to pass the game ball through the V region 435 in the game based on the information even during the second period, so that the player can perform the operation in the second period. It is possible to reduce the disadvantage of stopping the operation.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may be another configuration that exhibits the same effect, and can be modified and implemented as follows, for example.

[1] In the above-described first embodiment, the start of measurement of the maximum opening time of the V region 435 (passage of the induction valve 451) is notified by the third symbol display device 42, but the maximum opening time of the V region 435 is notified. It is not necessary to notify the start of the measurement of. Even in this case, it is good to be notified that the V region 435 is completely closed when the maximum opening time of the V region 435 that is not notified to the player comes (at a timing that the player does not know). For example, it notifies that "V prize is given until the V area is completely closed!". As a result, the player can be made to aim for the V prize while being excited when the complete closure of the V region 435 comes.

[2] In the above-described fourth embodiment, in the game board 30 in which it is necessary to separate the advantageous game state transition entry ball 411 and the specific game state transition entry section 431, the specific game state transition entry section 431 is used. Although it is arranged on the game board 30 in a bare state, it may be arranged in a partitioned portion guided by the taxiway 455, such as the ball entry portion 411 for shifting to an advantageous game state. Further, although the guide lever 437 of the ball entry unit 431 for shifting to the specific game state is configured to protrude from the front-rear direction of the game board 30, it may be configured to advance and retreat to the left and right parallel to the board surface of the game board 30. Absent.

[3] In Example 5 described above, in the variable display effect of the jackpot super reach, the shorter the variable time, the easier it is to win the V prize. However, the longer the variable time, the higher the expectation of the big hit, the higher the V prize. It may be an easy-to-use example. Specifically, as in the first embodiment, when the fluctuation timing of the V region 435 is set so that the V region 435 is opened by determining the jackpot, and the fluctuation display effect has a long fluctuation time and a high expectation of the jackpot. Slow down the closing speed of the V region 435. As a result, it is possible to suggest to the player that it is easy to win a prize in the V region 435 from the content of the variable display effect even in the configuration as in the first embodiment.

[3] In the first embodiment described above, the induction valve 451 is provided on the taxiway 455, and the induction valve 451 closes when the induction valve sensor 453 detects the passage of one ball of the game ball. A configuration in which 451 is not provided may be used. Specifically, when the induction valve sensor 453 detects the passage of one game ball, the combination gate sensor 414 enables the ball entry detection for only that one ball, and invalidates the passage of the subsequent game ball. Is.

[4] In Examples 1, 6 and 7 described above, the combination gate 413 is set to the number of rounds of 1 or more, but any one of the gates is set to be an out-of-gate gate having the number of rounds 0. You may. Further, for example, in a two-round jackpot round game state, the number of rounds is one or more because the opening time and closing time (interval time) of the variable winning device 32 are extremely short, but the rounds are substantially no balls. You may set it to the jackpot round game state. Even in this setting, if the configuration is the same as in the first embodiment, the game ball that has passed through the winning combination gate 413 is given a winning opportunity to the V winning sensor 433. That is, the CPOU 501 of the main control device 261 is advantageous to the player (that is, more prize balls are paid out than the game balls to be fired) because the game balls flowing down the game area 30a pass through the winning combination gate 414. Do not shift to the jackpot round gaming state (2R, 8R, 16R jackpot round gaming state with balls), or do not shift to the jackpot round gaming state that is advantageous to the player (0R out of the game or no balls) 2R jackpot round gaming state) may be enabled (for example, the gaming machine according to (A0)). With such a configuration, there is a possibility that a ball cannot be obtained even if the player passes through the winning combination gate 413, so that the player can be made to pay more attention to the passing through the winning combination gate 413.

[5] The present invention may be implemented on various types of gaming machines (for example, first-class, third-class, etc.), or on pachinko machines of a type different from the above-described embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine may be put into a special gaming state on condition that the ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that enters a special gaming state when the ball enters a predetermined winning opening. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines that use game balls such as arranged ball type pachinko and sparrow balls.

[5] The inventions described in the means (A0) to (E2) for carrying out the invention, the inventions described in Examples 1 to 14, and the above-mentioned modifications are appropriate as long as they do not conflict with each other. It is also possible to change, replace, delete, or combine the configurations.

As described above, the present invention is suitable for gaming machines such as pachinko machines.

30 ... Game board 30a Game area 70 Main control device (main control device)
30 Game board 32 Variable winning device 32a Large winning opening 33a Starting winning device for special figure 1 33b Starting winning device for special drawing 2 34 Starting opening for normal symbol 35 Variable display device unit 36 Out port 40 1st symbol display device 41 2nd Symbol display device 42 3rd symbol display device 47A Center frame 47B Stage part 401 Type 2 accessory 403 Directional accessory 411 Advantageous gaming state transition ball entry section 413 Accessory continuous operation gate (role gate)
414 Fluxgate compass 415 Distribution mechanism 415a Round number distribution accessory 417 Rolling area 421 Round number display lamp 422 SUPERV lamp 423 V lamp 425 LED for crune lighting
427 LED for lighting the gate
431 Specified game state transition entry ball 433 V winning sensor 434 Normal winning sensor 435 V area 436 V light emitting area 437 Induction lever 438 Induction lever drive mechanism 451 Induction valve 452 Induction valve drive unit 453 Induction valve sensor 455 Taxiway 456 Inlet part 457 Exit 458 Taxiway 471 Taxiway 472 Advantageous route 472a Start end 472b End 472c Opening 473 1st lead 474 1st lead surface 475 2nd lead 475a Protrusion 476 2nd lead surface 476a Left area 476b Area 476c Right side area 481 V Winning distribution part 482 Drive part 483 Movable part 484 Discharge part 484a Left side area 484b Central side area 484c Right side area

Claims (1)

The game area where the game ball launched by the launching means is guided,
A passing portion through which a game ball flowing down the game area can pass,
An advantageous game state transition means capable of shifting to an advantageous game state advantageous to the player by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the predetermined area.
A specific game state transition means for shifting to a specific game state advantageous to the player after the end of the advantageous game state by passing the game ball flowing down the game area through the specific area.
A gaming machine characterized in that the gaming ball that has passed through the passing portion has a configuration capable of passing at least the predetermined region.

Images